Ansul HP CO2 Design Manual

CARBON DIOXIDE
SYSTEMS
ANSUL
®
COMPONENTS, DESIGN, INSTALLATION,
RECHARGE AND MAINTENANCE
AutoPulse
®
REVISION RECORD
2-22-01 Page 1
REV. 1
DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE REV. NO.
6-19-98 1-1.1 New Page 6-19-98 7-14 1
6-19-98 1-5.1 New Page 6-19-98 7-15 1
6-19-98 1-8 1 6-19-98 7-16 1
6-19-98 1-8.1 New Page 6-19-98 7-17 1
6-19-98 1-11 1 6-19-98 7-18 1
6-19-98 1-11.1 New Page 6-19-98 7-19 1
6-19-98 1-12 1 6-19-98 7-20 1
6-19-98 1-14 1 6-19-98 7-21 1
6-19-98 1-15 1 6-19-98 7-22 1
6-19-98 1-16 2 6-19-98 7-23 1
6-19-98 1-17 1 6-19-98 7-24 1
6-19-98 1-18 1 6-19-98 7-25 1
6-19-98 1-19 2 6-19-98 7-26 1
6-19-98 1-44 1 6-19-98 7-28 1
6-19-98 1-54 1 6-19-98 7-29 2
6-19-98 1-55 1 6-19-98 8-2 1
6-19-98 2-14 New Page 6-19-98 8-3 1
6-19-98 4-1 1 6-19-98 8-4 1
6-19-98 4-2 1 6-19-98 8-5 1
6-19-98 7-4 1 6-19-98 9-2 1
6-19-98 7-5 1 6-19-98 9-4 2
6-19-98 7-8 2 6-19-98 9-5 2
6-19-98 7-9 1 6-19-98 9-6 1
6-19-98 7-10 1 6-19-98 9-7 1
6-19-98 7-11 1 6-19-98 9-8 1
6-19-98 7-12 1 6-19-98 9-9 1
6-19-98 7-13 1 6-19-98 9-10 1
Indicates revised information.

REVISION RECORD
2-22-01 Page 2
REV. 1
DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE REV. NO.
6-19-98 9-11 1
6-19-98 9-12 1
6-19-98 9-13 New Page
6-19-98 11-1 1
6-19-98 11-3 1
6-19-98 F-91122 2
2-22-01 1-6 1
2-22-01 1-33.1 New Page
2-22-01 7-7 2
2-22-01 7-27 2
Indicates revised information.

ANSUL 
Table of Contents
FORM PAGE
SECTION NO. NO.
1. COMPONENTS
CV90 Valve Cylinder Shipping Assembly F-90110 1-1
CV98 Valve Cylinder Shipping Assembly F-9880 1-1.1
MAX Valve Cylinder Shipping Assembly F-90137 1-2
AP-8 Valve Cylinder Shipping Assembly F-90136 1-3
AUTOPULSE Control System F-90228-1 1-4
HF Electric Actuator F-90182-1 1-5
CV98 Electric Actuator F-9881 1-5.1
CV98/CV90/AP-8 Valve Flexible Discharge Bend F-90132-1 1-6
MAX Valve Flexible Discharge Bend F-90135 1-7
CV90/MAX Valve Stackable/Lever Actuator F-90134-1 1-8
CV98 Lever Release Actuator F-9882 1-8.1
CV90/MAX Valve Manual/Pneumatic Actuator F-90131 1-9
CV90/MAX Valve Pneumatic Actuator F-90133-1 1-10
Discharge Nozzle – Type “D” F-90216-1 1-11

Discharge Nozzle – Type “D” – Corrosion Resistant F-96156 1-11.1
Sealed Nozzle With Strainer F-90217-1 1-12
Bulkhead Mounting Flange F-90218 1-13
Discharge Nozzle – Type “A” F-90219-1 1-14
Discharge Nozzle – Cone Type F-90220-1 1-15
Discharge Nozzle – 4 In. Multi-Discharge Type F-90221-2 1-16

Discharge Nozzle – 6 In. Multi-Discharge Type F-90222-1 1-17
Discharge Nozzle – Regular Type F-90223-1 1-18
Discharge Nozzle – Baffle Type F-90224-2 1-19
Cylinder Bracketing F-90183-1 1-20
Nameplate – MAIN F-90191 1-21

Nameplate – RESERVE F-90190 1-22
Nameplate – Maintenance F-90189 1-23
Warning Plate – Outside Room Without Alarm F-90194 1-24
Pressure Bleeder Plug – 1/4 In. F-90196 1-25
Warning Plate – Outside Room With Alarm F-90193 1-26

Warning Plate – Inside Room With Alarm F-90192 1-27
Connecting Link F-90225 1-28
Lever Release Actuator AP-8 Valve/Selector Valve F-90226-1 1-29
Selector Valves With Pressure Actuator F-90208 1-30
Selector Valves With Electric Solenoid Actuator F-91139-1 1-30.1
2-22-01
ANSUL 
Table of Contents
FORM PAGE
SECTION NO. NO.
1. COMPONENTS (Continued)
Selector Valves With Lever Actuator F-90210-1 1-32

Direction/Stop Valves F-90211-1 1-33
Lock Handle Stop Valve F-2001045 1-33.1
Manual Pull Box F-90213 1-34
Corner Pulley F-90214 1-35
Check Valves F-90215 1-36
Cable With Swaged End Fitting F-90204 1-37
Dual/Triple Control Boxes F-90206 1-38
Remote Cable Pull Equalizer F-90205 1-39
Quartzoid Bulb Actuator F-90203 1-40
Pneumatic Time Delay F-90207 1-41

AP-8 Valve Enclosed Release Attachment With Flexible Connector F-90227 1-42
Hose Reels F-90195 1-43
Pressure Trip F-90212-1 1-44
Header Safety F-90187 1-45
Header Vent Plug F-90188 1-46

Pressure Operated Siren F-90186-1 1-47
Discharge Indicator F-90185 1-48
Odorizer F-90184 1-49
Pressure Switch – DPST F-90202 1-50
Pressure Switch – 3PST F-90199 1-51

Pressure Switch – SPDT F-90201 1-52
Pressure Switch – DPDT – Explosion-Proof F-90200-1 1-53
Marine Actuation Station – Two Step F-90197-1 1-54
Marine Actuation Station – One Step F-90198-1 1-55
2. APPLICATIONS
Electronic Data Processing – Computer Room and Subfloor F-90171 2-1
Electronic Data Processing – Subfloor F-90164 2-2
Recirculating Turbine Generators F-90106 2-3
Non-Recirculating Turbine Generators F-90162 2-4
Control Rooms F-90177 2-5
Record Storage Rooms F-90175 2-6
Battery Storage F-90174 2-7
Open Top Lube Oil Pits F-90176 2-8
2-22-01
ANSUL 
Table of Contents
FORM PAGE
SECTION NO. NO.
2. APPLICATIONS (Continued)
Electrical Cabinets F-90166 2-9
Transformers F-90173 2-10
Wave Solder Machines F-90165 2-11
Industrial Fryers F-90172 2-12

Dip Tanks F-90163 2-13
Open Face Wet Bench and Processing Tool Protection Guide F-97137 2-14
3. SPECIFICATIONS
CSI SPEC-DATA SHEET – Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems F-90181 –
CSI MANU-SPEC SHEET – Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems F-90230 –
4. GENERAL INFORMATION 4-1 – 4-2

Carbon Dioxide 4-1
Personnel Safety 4-1
Types of Systems 4-1
Total Flooding 4-1
Local Application 4-1
Types of Actuation 4-1
Pneumatic 4-1
Mechanical 4-1
Electrical 4-2
Rate of Rise (H.A.D.) 4-2
Types of Detection 4-2
H.A.D. (Rate of Rise) 4-2
Electric 4-2
Mechanical (Fusible Link) 4-2
5. PLANNING 5-1 – 5-4

Application Methods 5-1
Total Flooding 5-1
Local Application 5-1
Hazard Analysis 5-1 – 5-3
Hazard Type 5-1
Hazard Dimensions 5-1
Unclosable Openings 5-1 – 5-2
Types of Fires 5-2
Hazard Atmosphere 5-2
Hazardous Material 5-2
Ventilation Considerations 5-2
Electrical Considerations 5-2
Temperature Range 5-3
Other Factors That Influence System Planning 5-3
6-19-98
ANSUL 
Table of Contents
FORM PAGE
SECTION NO. NO.
6. DESIGN 6-1 – 6-18
Application Method 6-1 – 6-13
Total Flooding 6-1 – 6-5
Local Application 6-5 – 6-13
Hand Hose Lines 6-13
Detection System Requirements 6-13 – 6-14
Mechanical Detectors (Fusible Links) 6-13 – 6-14
Actuation Requirements 6-14 – 6-15
Manual Actuation 6-14
Pneumatic Actuation 6-14
Electric Actuation 6-15
Accessories 6-15 – 6-18
Electric or Mechanical Manual Pull Station 6-15
Selector Valves 6-15 – 6-16
Direction/Stop Valves 6-16
Pressure Operated Siren 6-17
Pressure Switch 6-17
Pressure Trip 6-17
Pneumatic Time Delay 6-17 – 6-18
Alarms 6-18
Reserve System 6-18
Develop Bill of Materials 6-18
Sample Problem 6-18
7. INSTALLATION 7-1 – 7-30

Mounting Components 7-1 – 7-4
Cylinder/Bracket Assembly 7-1 – 7-4
Releasing Devices 7-4
Installing Actuation Piping 7-4 – 7-5
General Piping Requirements 7-4
Actuation Piping Installation 7-5
Installing Distribution Piping 7-5 – 7-7
Hanger Applications 7-5 – 7-6
General Piping Requirements 7-6
Distribution Manifold and Piping Installation 7-7
Main/Reserve System 7-7
Installing Detection/Actuation System 7-8 – 7-17
AUTOPULSE Control System with HF Electric Actuator 7-8
AUTOPULSE Control System with ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C 7-8 – 7-9
with Pneumatic Actuation
ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C Release with Pneumatic Actuation 7-9
H.A.D. Detection with Mechanical Actuation 7-9 – 7-10
Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release with Fusible Link 7-10 – 7-17
Quartzoid Bulb Actuator (QBA-5) 7-17
Installing Actuators 7-17 – 7-19
Pneumatic 7-17 – 7-18
Manual 7-18
Electric 7-19
6-19-98
ANSUL 
Table of Contents
FORM PAGE
SECTION NO. NO.
7. INSTALLATION (Continued)
Stacking Actuators 7-19
Installing Accessories 7-20 – 7-29
Manual Pull Station 7-20 – 7-25
Alarms 7-25
Selector Valves 7-25 – 7-27
Lock Handle Stop Valve 7-27
Direction/Stop Valves 7-27 – 7-28
Pressure Trip 7-29
Pressure Switch 7-29
Time Delay 7-29
Pressure Operated Siren 7-29
8. TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE 8-1 – 8-6

Testing H.A.D. System 8-1
Testing Pull Station 8-1 – 8-2
Testing Electric Detection System – AUTOPULSE Control System 8-2
Testing Electric Detection System – ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C Release 8-2
Testing Mechanical – ANSUL AUTOMAN Release with Fusible Link 8-2 – 8-3
Testing 60 Second Time Delay 8-4 – 8-5
9. RESETTING AND RECHARGE 9-1 – 9-14

Clear Electrical Equipment 9-1
Check Electrical and Mechanical Equipment 9-1 – 9-2
Piping and Nozzles 9-1
Mechanical Detection System 9-1 – 9-2
Electric Detection System 9-2
H.A.D. Detection System 9-2
Pressure Switch 9-2
Place System Back in Service 9-2 – 9-13
Recharge CO2 Cylinder 9-2 – 9-11
Pneumatic Valve Actuator 9-12
Electric Valve Actuator 9-13
Manual Valve Actuator 9-13
Manual Pull Station 9-13
Replace ANSUL AUTOMAN Cartridge 9-13
10. INSPECTION 10-1 – 10-2

Manual Pull Station 10-1
Detectors 10-1
Control System 10-1
ANSUL AUTOMAN Releasing Device 10-1
Cylinders 10-1
Cylinder Actuator 10-1
Distribution Piping and Nozzles 10-1
Alarms and Sirens 10-1
Miscellaneous 10-1
2-22-01
ANSUL 
Table of Contents
FORM PAGE
SECTION NO. NO.
11. MAINTENANCE 11-1 – 11-6
Semi-Annual Maintenance Examination 11-1 – 11-6
General Information – Weigh Cylinders 11-1 – 11-2
Fusible Link Detection/Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release 11-2 – 11-3
Thermal Detection/Electric ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C Release 11-4 – 11-5
H.A.D. Detection/Mechanical Control Head 11-5
Electric Detection/AUTOPULSE Control System 11-6
12. TYPICAL APPLICATIONS 12-1 – 12-272

Design Examples 12-1 – 12-271
Example No. 1 – Dip Tanks 12-2 – 12-13
Example No. 2 – Computer Room and Subfloor 12-14 – 12-36
Example No. 3 – Wave Solder Machines 12-37 – 12-60
Example No. 4 – Electrical Cabinets 12-61 – 12-71
Example No. 5 – Transformers 12- 72 – 12-102
Example No. 6 – Subfloor 12-103 – 12-117
Example No. 7 – Battery Storage Vaults 12-118 – 12-126
Example No. 8 – Document Storage 12-127 – 12-138
Example No. 9 – Control Rooms 12-139 – 12-150.1
Example No. 10 – Lube Oil Pits 12-151 – 12-185
Example No. 11 – Generators 12-186 – 12-213
(Recirculating and Non-Recirculating Type)
Example No. 12 – Industrial Fryer 12-214 – 12-272
13. APPENDIX
Proposal Information F-94148
Parts List for Single Row Cylinder Bracketing With Weigh Rail F-9127-1
Parts List for Double Row Cylinder Bracketing With Weigh Rail F-9128-1
Parts List for Back to Back Cylinder Bracketing With Weigh Rail F-9129-1
Parts List for CV90 Cylinder Valve F-91122-2
6-19-98
ANSUL 
Carbon Dioxide System Components
CV90 Cylinder Shipping Assembly
Description
The CV90 cylinder is factory filled with carbon dioxide. A The cylinders are shipped with a maintenance record card
single cylinder may be used or multiple cylinders can be and protective shipping cap attached to the threaded neck
manifolded together to obtain the required quantity of of each cylinder. This cap entirely encloses and protects
agent for total flooding or local application methods. The the valve while in shipment.
CV90 cylinder can be actuated electrically, pneumatically, The 25, 35, and 50 lb. (11.3, 15.9, and 22.7 kg) cylinders
and/or manually with approved valve actuation compo- are manufactured with a bent siphon tube which allows
nents. for either horizontal or vertical mounting.
Component Material Thread Size/Type Approvals
Cylinder Steel 1-11 1/2 NPT, Female Meets DOT 3A1800 or 3AA1800
CV90 Valve Brass 1-11 1/2 NPT, Male x

1 5/16-12UN-3A Outlet Thread – Male
1.25-18 UNEF-3A Male
Filling Port Thread
Safety Relief Valve Brass .6250-18UNF-3B, Male In Accordance with Bureau of Explosives
Valve/Tank UL (EX-2968), FM Approved, Complies

Assembly with Regulations of the U.S. Coast Guard
(162.038/7/0) and meets requirements of
NFPA 12.
Shipping Cap Steel 3.125-11 NS1, Female
Shipping
Assembly Weight Of CO2 Approximate Weight Dimension A* Dimension B
Part No. lb. (kg) lb. (kg) in. (cm) in. (cm)
Finish: Red Enamel Paint
79814 25 (11.3) 98 (44.5) 26 1/2 (67) 8 1/2 (21.6)

79816 35 (15.9) 121 (54.9) 35 3/4 (90.8) 8 1/2 (21.6)
79818 50 (22.7) 165 (75) 52 3/4 (128.9) 8 1/2 (21.6)
79820 75 (34.0) 200 (91) 57 3/4 (146.7) 9 1/4 (23.5)
79822 100 (45.4) 300 (136) 59 3/4 (151.8) 10 3/4 (27.3)
Finish: Red Epoxy Paint
79815 25 (11.3) 98 (44.5) 26 1/2 (67) 8 1/2 (21.6)

79817 35 (15.9) 121 (55) 35 3/4 (90.8) 8 1/2 (21.6)
79819 50 (22.7) 165 (75) 52 3/4 (133.9) 8 1/2 (21.6)
79821 75 (34.0) 200 (91) 57 3/4 (146.7) 9 1/4 (23.5)
79823 100 (45.4) 300 (136) 59 3/4 (151.8) 10 3/4 (27.3)
*Tolerance ± 1/2 in. (12.7 mm)
1-1
CYLINDER SHIPPING CAP
VALVE SHIPPING CAP

CV90 VALVE
RECORD TAG
SIPHON TUBE ADAPTOR
SIPHON TUBE
SAFETY DISC
NUT
A
HEIGHT
TO
OUTLET
001416 001816
THREADED FOR
RELEASE ATTACHMENT ACTUATION
OR SHIPPING CAP INSERT
SET SCREW
PLUNGER
ACTUATION
ISOLATOR
PLUNGER
SPRING
VALVE
OUTLET SPRING STOP
MAIN SEAL
SPRING
6 IN.
BACK PRESSURE (15.2 cm)
RECOIL
SEAT CHECK VALVE
MAIN STEM
RECOIL
VALVE SAFETY DISC
AND WASHER
DISCHARGE SAFETY DISC NUT

BEND OUTLET
FILL SEAL BODY

CHECK
1 IN. STANDARD
PIPE THREAD
MAIN
SEAL
THREADED FOR
SIPHON TUBE
2 13/16 IN.
(7.14 cm)
001417
NOTE: Use Flexible Discharge Bend, Part No. 42424, when attaching valve to supply pipe or manifold.
ANSUL is a registered trademark.
ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542 715-735-7411 Form No. F-90110 ©1997 Ansul Incorporated Litho in U.S.A.
ANSUL 
CV-98 Cylinder Shipping Assembly
Description
The CV-98 cylinder is factory filled with carbon dioxide. A The cylinders are shipped with a maintenance record card
single cylinder may be used or multiple cylinders can be and protective shipping cap attached to the threaded neck
manifolded together to obtain the required quantity of of each cylinder. This cap entirely encloses and protects
agent for total flooding or local application methods. The the valve while in shipment.
CV-98 cylinder can be actuated electrically, pneumatically, The 35 and 50 lb. (15.9 and 22.7 kg) cylinders are manu-
and/or manually with approved valve actuation compo- factured with a bent siphon tube which allows for either
nents. horizontal or vertical mounting.
CV-98 Valve Brass 1-11 1/2 NPT, Male x

1 5/16-12UN-3A Outlet Thread –
Male
Safety Relief Valve Brass .6250-18UNF-3B, Male In Accordance with Bureau of

Explosives

Assembly with Regulations of the U.S. Coast
Guard (162.038/7/0) and meets
requirements of NFPA 12.
Shipping
Assembly Weight Of CO2 Approximate Weight Dimension A Dimension B
426242 35 (15.9) 121 (54.9) 35 3/4 (90.8) 8 1/2 (21.6)

426244 50 (22.7) 165 (75) 52 3/4 (128.9) 8 1/2 (21.6)
426246 75 (34.0) 200 (91) 57 3/4 (146.7) 9 1/4 (23.5)
426248 100 (45.4) 300 (136) 59 3/4 (151.8) 10 3/4 (27.3)
426243 35 (15.9) 121 (55) 35 3/4 (90.8) 8 1/2 (21.6)

426245 50 (22.7) 165 (75) 52 3/4 (133.9) 8 1/2 (21.6)
426247 75 (34.0) 200 (91) 57 3/4 (146.7) 9 1/4 (23.5)
426249 100 (45.4) 300 (136) 59 3/4 (151.8) 10 3/4 (27.3)
1-1.1
CYLINDER SHIPPING CAP
VALVE SHIPPING CAP

CV-98 VALVE
RECORD TAG
SIPHON TUBE ADAPTOR
SIPHON TUBE
SAFETY DISC
NUT
A
HEIGHT
TO
OUTLET
001416 001816
CV-98 CO2 VALVE

The CV-98 valve has a ten (10) year warranty. The valve
requires no internal maintenance. The valve is sealed
closed and must never be disassembled. If there is ever a
malfunction of the CV-98 valve, the complete valve must
be sent back to Ansul for warranty replacement. If the
external seal is broken, the warranty is voided.
ANSUL 
MAX Valve Cylinder Shipping Assembly
Description
The MAX valve cylinder is factory filled with carbon diox- The cylinders are shipped with a maintenance record card
ide. A single cylinder may be used or multiple cylinders and protective cap attached to the threaded collar on the
can be manifolded together to obtain the required quantity neck of each cylinder. This cap entirely encloses and pro-
of agent for total flooding or local application methods. tects the valve while in shipment.
The MAX valve cylinder can be actuated electrically,
pneumatically, and/or manually with approved valve actu-
ation components.
MAX Valve Brass 1-11 1/2 NPT, Male

3/4-14 NPSM Outlet Thread,
Female
Safety Relief Brass .6250-18UNF-3B, Male In Accordance with Bureau of Explosives

Valve

NFPA 12.
Shipping
70760 50 (22.7) 165 (75) 54 3/4 (139.0) 8 1/2 (21.6)

70761 75 (34) 200 (91) 59 3/4 (151.8) 9 1/4 (23.5)
70762 100 (45.4) 300 (136) 61 3/4 (156.8) 10 3/4 (27.3)
76921 50 (22.7) 165 (75) 54 3/4 (139.0) 8 1/2 (21.6)

76922 75 (34) 200 (91) 59 3/4 (151.8) 9 1/4 (23.5)
76923 100 (45.4) 300 (136) 61 3/4 (156.8) 10 3/4 (27.3)
1-2
CYLINDER
SHIPPING
CAP
SHIPPING PLUG VALVE SHIPPING CAP
STANDARD
BACK-PRESSURE
ACTUATOR
MAX
RECORD VALVE
TAG SIPHON
TUBE
BACK-PRESSURE ADAPTOR
SAFETY DISC NUT ACTUATOR –
REPLACE SIPHON
WITH STACKABLE TUBE
BACK-PRESSURE
ACTUATOR FOR
OTHER ACTUATION
MEANS A
HEIGHT TO
CYLINDER COLLAR OUTLET
(THREADED FOR
ATTACHMENT OF
SHIPPING CAP)
MAX CYLINDER VALVE
B
DIAMETER
001818 001819
STANDARD BACK-
PRESSURE ADAPTOR VALVE OUTLET
PASSAGE FOR
PRESSURE OPERATION
CHECK VALVE
PISTON
INSERT
ACTUATOR
SEAL
SAFETY DISC
AND WASHER
VENT PORT
VALVE
CORE 4 1/2 IN.
(11.4 cm)
BALL
CHECK
PISTON
SAFETY
MAIN SEAL RELIEF
DEVICE
VALVE BODY
1 IN.
THREADED FOR STANDARD
SIPHON TUBE PIPE THREAD
ADAPTOR
4 1/16 IN.
(10.3 cm)
001820
ANSUL 
AP-8 Cylinder Shipping Assembly
Description
The AP-8 cylinder is factory filled with carbon dioxide. A The cylinders are shipped with a maintenance record card
single cylinder may be used or multiple cylinders can be and protective cap attached to the threaded collar on the
manifolded together to obtain the required quantity of neck of each cylinder. This cap entirely encloses and pro-
agent for total flooding or local application methods. The tects the valve while in shipment.
AP-8 cylinder can be actuated electrically, pneumatically,
and/or manually with approved valve actuation
components.
Shipping
46240 50 (22.7) 165 (75) 52 1/4 (132.7) 8 1/2 (21.6)

46242 75 (34) 200 (91) 57 1/4 (145.4) 9 1/4 (23.5)
46244 100 (45.4) 300 (136) 59 1/4 (150.5) 10 3/4 (27.3)
76924 50 (22.7) 165 (75) 52 1/4 (132.7) 8 1/2 (21.6)

76925 75 (34) 200 (91) 57 1/4 (145.4) 9 1/4 (23.5)
76926 100 (45.4) 300 (136) 5 1/4 (150.5) 10 3/4 (27.3)
CYLINDER SHIPPING
CAP
BONNET CAP
AP-8
BONNET VALVE
PRESSURE VENT
RECORD
SAFETY DISC TAG
NUT RECOIL
PREVENTOR MAIN OUTLET
CYLINDER COLLAR
(THREADED FOR 1 IN. STANDARD A
ATTACHMENT OF PIPE THREAD
PROTECTION COVER) HEIGHT TO OUTLET
CYLINDER
001821 001822
1-3
AP-8 Valve Brass 1-11 1/2 NPT, Male

1 5/16-12UN-3A Outlet Thread, Male
Safety Relief Valve Brass .6250-18UNF-3B, Male In Accordance with Bureau of Explosives

NFPA 12.
VALVE IN OPEN POSITION VALVE IN CLOSED POSITION
THREADED FOR RELEASE

ATTACHMENT OR BONNET CAP
PASSAGE FOR PRESSURE

OPERATION
PRESSURE RELEASE PLUG
SAFETY PLUG
CHECK
SAFETY DISC
AND WASHER
OUTLET CHECK
BONNET CAP CHAIN
MINIMUM AREA OF OUTLET DISCHARGE BEND OUTLET

PASSAGE 0.2485 SQ. IN.
THREADED FOR
1 IN. STANDARD PIPE THREAD
SYPHON TUBE
001823
ANSUL 
AUTOPULSE Control System
Description
The AUTOPULSE Control System consists of a micro-
processor based panel field programmable for cross-
zone, counting-zone, independent or priority-zone
(counting) detection circuit applications. Several models
of the AUTOPULSE Control System are available
depending on the type of hazard being protected. The
AUTOPULSE Control System is ideal for industrial, com-
mercial and institutional facilities where an automatic
electronic control system is required to actuate a fixed
suppression system. The control system is listed by UL
and ULC, approved by FM, and has been tested to the
applicable FCC Rules and Regulations for Class “A”
computing devices. The design meets the National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) 72 “National Fire Alarm
Code.”
Component Approvals
AUTOPULSE Control System UL (S-2374) 001824
ULC
FM Approved See Price List and Installation Maintenance Manual for details and part
FCC numbers of individual shipping assemblies.
ANSUL and AUTOPULSE are registered trademarks.
1-4
ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542 715-735-7411 Form No. F-90228-1 ©1997 Ansul Incorporated Litho in U.S.A.
ANSUL 
HF Electric Actuator
Description
Electrical actuation of an agent cylinder is accomplished
by an HF electric actuator interfaced through an
AUTOPULSE Control System. This actuator can be used
in hazardous environments where the ambient tempera-
ture range is between 0 °F to 130 °F (–18 °C to 54 °C).
The HF electric actuator meets the requirements of
N.E.C. Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D and Class II, Div. 1,
Groups E, F, G. A maximum of two HF electric actuators
can be used on a single AUTOPULSE release circuit.
When utilizing only one HF electric actuator, an in-line
resistor, Part No. 73606, is required in the supervised
release circuit. 4 1/2 IN.
(11.4 cm)
The actuator specifications are:
Nominal Rated Voltage
Voltage Minimum Maximum
12 VDC @ 0.57 amps 10.4 VDC* 14.0 VDC
In auxiliary or override applications, a manual-local over-
ride valve actuator or a manual cable pull actuator can be 2 1/4 IN.
(5.7 cm)
installed on top of the HF electric actuator by removing
the safety cap.
001395
An arming tool is required to reset the actuator after oper-
ation. The actuator contains a standard 1/2 in. threaded
female straight connector for electrical conduit hookup.
Shipping Assembly
Part No. Description
73327 HF electric actuator
HF Electric Actuator Body: 1/2 in. Straight Female UL (EX-2968)

Brass FM Approved
Plunger
Stainless
Steel
*Minimum operating voltage is 9.0 VDC.
1-5
ANSUL 
CV-98 Electric Actuator
Description
Electrical actuation of a CV-98 CO2 cylinder valve is
accomplished by a CV-98 electric actuator interfaced
through an AUTOPULSE Control System. This actuator
can be used in hazardous environments where the ambi-
ent temperature range is between 0 °F to 130 °F (–18 °C
to 54 °C). The CV-98 electric actuator meets the require-
ments of N.E.C. Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D and Class
II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G. A maximum of two CV-98 elec-
tric actuators can be used on a single AUTOPULSE
release circuit. When using either one or two CV-98 elec-
tric actuators, an in-line resistor, Part No. 426001, must
always be used.
The actuator specifications are:
Nominal Voltage
24 VDC @ 1.5 amps
In auxiliary or override applications, a manual cable pull
actuator can be installed on top of the CF-98 electric
actuator by removing the safety cap.
The actuator contains a standard 1/2 in. threaded female 001395
straight connector for electrical conduit hookup.
The CV-98 electric actuator uses a replaceable METRON
Shipping Assembly
PROTRACTOR which is a device designed to produce a
Part No. Description high force mechanical output. The actuator is electrically
423684 CV-98 Electric Actuator actuated and will operate within milliseconds.
423958 Replaceable METRON The METRON PROTRACTOR must be replaced after
PROTRACTOR discharge of the CO2 system.
CV-98 Electric Actuator Body: 1/2 in. Straight Female UL (E91021)

Brass FM Approved
Plunger
Stainless
Steel
1-5.1
ANSUL 
CV98/CV90/AP-8 Valve Flexible Discharge Bend
Description
The CV98/CV90/AP-8 valve Flexible Discharge Bend
Shipping Assembly
(Part No. 427082) is a 5/8 in. (1.59 cm) I.D. extra-heavy
flexible hose which connects the valve discharge outlet to Part No. Description
the fixed piping or header manifold. The discharge bend 427082 Flexible discharge bend
has a female 1.3-12-UN-3B thread for connecting to the
842430 Washer
valve outlet and a male 1/2 in. NPT thread for connecting
to the fixed piping or manifold. The discharge bend will
withstand a pressure of 9000 psi (621 bar). Its flexible
connection allows for easy alignment of multiple cylinder
banks to fixed piping. Each bend has a built-in check
valve that prevents loss of agent should the system dis-
charge while any cylinder is removed.
Thread Size/Type
Component Material Valve End Manifold End Approvals
5/8 in. Flexible SAE 100 R2 1 5/16-12-UN-3B 1/2 NPT Male U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Discharge Bend Type AT Female UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
18 7/8 IN.
(47.9 cm)
FEMALE ADAPTOR
(THREAD 1 5/16 IN.-12N-3) 1/2 IN. NPT
(BRONZE) MALE COUPLING
CHECK
SWAGE ON
MANIFOLD/END
VALVE END
000658
1-6
REV. 1
ANSUL 
MAX Valve Flexible DIscharge Bend
Description
The MAX valve Flexible Discharge Bend (Part No. 68714)
Shipping Assembly
is a 5/8 in. (1.59 cm) I.D. extra-heavy flexible hose which
connects the valve discharge outlet to the fixed piping or Part No. Description
header manifold. The discharge bend has a male 3/4-14 68714 Flexible discharge bend
NPSM thread for connecting to the valve outlet and a
male 1/2 in. NPT thread for connecting to the fixed piping
or manifold. The discharge bend will withstand a pressure
of 6000 psi (41370 kPa). Its flexible connection allows for
easy alignment of multiple cylinder banks to fixed piping.
Each bend has a built-in check valve that prevents loss of
agent should the system discharge while any cylinder is
removed.
Thread Size/Type
Component Material Valve End Manifold End Approvals
5/8 in. Flexible Double Wire Braided 3/4–14 NPSM, 1/2 NPT Male U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Discharge (Perforated) Rubber Male UL (EX-2968)
Bend – MAX Covered Hose FM Approved
Bronze Couplings
O-RING (PART NO. 24235)

CHECK 1/2 IN. NPT MALE COUPLING
3/4 IN. SWAGE ON (BRONZE)
MALE
ADAPTOR
MANIFOLD/
PIPE END
VALVE
END
18 7/8 IN.
(47.9 cm)
001827
1-7
ANSUL 
CV90/MAX Valve Stackable/Lever Actuator
Description
Stackable Actuator – MAX Valve Only: The stackable Manual actuation is accomplished by pulling the valve
actuator is required to attach a valve actuation component hand lever. The lever design contains a forged mechani-
to the MAX valve. The slave back-pressure actuator, cal detent which secures the lever in the open position
which comes installed as part of the MAX valve, must be when actuated.
removed in order to attach the stackable back-pressure Cable-pull actuation is accomplished by using a remote
actuator. In one and two-cylinder systems, one stackable manual pull station. The remote manual pull station sys-
back-pressure actuator is required to attach a valve actu- tem must contain the components necessary to meet the
ation component. In a two cylinder system, the remaining actuator lever traveling requirements of 7 in. (17.8 cm).
cylinder is actuated by the pressure generated within the
distribution manifold.
Component Material Approvals
In three or more cylinder systems, two stackable back-
pressure actuators are required to attach valve actuation Stackable Brass U.S. Coast Guard
components. The remaining cylinder(s) is actuated by the Back-Pressure (162.038/7/0)
pressure generated within the distribution manifold. Actuator UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Lever Release Actuator – CV90/MAX Valve: The manu-
al lever release actuator provides a manual means of All Manual Brass with U.S. Coast Guard
agent cylinder actuation by direct manual actuation of its Cable-Pull Stainless (162.038/7/0)
pull lever or cable actuation when used in conjunction with Actuators Steel Pin U.L. (EX-2968)
a remote manual pull station. FM Approved
In three or more cylinder systems, a connecting link is
required to provide simultaneous actuation of both manu-
al cable-pull actuators.
Shipping Assembly
70326 Stackable back-pressure actuator
70846 Manual cable-pull actuator (handle and pin; for local control)
70847 Manual-cable pull actuator (handle, no pin; for remote control)
32098 Manual-cable pull actuator (no handle, no pin; for use with three or more cylinders)
1-8
HANDLE
ON
AL
ON H OR LY.
E
SE LV ON 0475
R U VA ES O. 7
FO MAX ALV EL N
V LAB
90
CV
3 7/8 IN.
PIN (9.8 cm)
3 7/8 IN.
(9.8 cm)
DEPTH: 3 IN. (7.6 cm)
Part No. 70326 Part No. 70846
001828 000897
HANDLE HANDLE
ON ON
AL AL
ON H OR LY. ON H OR LY.
E E
SE LV ON 0475 SE LV ON 0475
R U VA ES O. 7 R U VA ES O. 7
FO MAX ALV EL N FO MAX ALV EL N
V LAB V LAB
90 90
CV CV
3 7/8 IN. 3 7/8 IN.

(9.8 cm) (9.8 cm)
3 7/8 IN. 3 7/8 IN.

(9.8 cm) (9.8 cm)
DEPTH: 2 13/16 IN. (7.1 cm) DEPTH: 2 13/16 IN. (7.1 cm)
001393b 001393b
ANSUL 
CV-98 Lever Release Actuator
Description
The manual lever release actuator provides a manual
means of CV-98 CO2 agent cylinder actuation by direct Component Material Approvals
manual actuation of its pull lever or cable actuation when All Manual Brass with FMRC Approved
used in conjunction with a remote manual pull station. Cable-pull Stainless UL Listed
Manual actuation is accomplished by pulling the actuator Actuators Steel Pin (EX-2968)
hand lever. The lever design contains a forged mechanical
detent which secures the lever in the open position when These lever actuators can also be attached to the top of a
actuated. CV-98 electric actuator.
Cable-pull actuation is accomplished by using a remote Each type actuator has its Part No. stamped on the lever.
manual pull station. The remote manual pull station system
must contain the components necessary to meet the actua-
tor lever traveling requirements of 7 in. (17.8 cm).
Shipping Assembly
423309 Manual cable-pull actuator (handle and pin; for local control)
423310 Manual cable-pull actuator (handle, no pin; for remote control)
423311 Manual cable-pull actuator (no handle, no pin; for remote control)
HANDLE
3 7/8 IN.*
3 7/8 IN.*
(9.8 cm)
(9.8 cm)
PIN
3 7/8 IN.
3 7/8 IN.
(9.8 cm)
(9.8 cm) 000897 002553
1 1/8 – 18 DEPTH: 3 7/8 IN. (7.6 cm) 1 1/8 – 18 DEPTH: 1 13/16 IN. (4.6 cm)
THREAD THREAD
Part No. 423309 Part No. 423311

* Add 1 9/16 in. (3.9 cm) to height when handle is in the straight up position.
1-8.1
HANDLE
3 7/8 IN.*
(9.8 cm)
3 7/8 IN.
(9.8 cm) 001420
1 1/8 – 18 DEPTH: 2 13/16 IN. (7.1 cm)

THREAD
Part No. 423310

* Add 1 9/16 in. (3.9 cm) to height when handle is in the straight up position.
ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542 715-735-7411 Form No. F-9882-1 © 1999 Ansul Incorporated Litho in U.S.A.
ANSUL 
CV90/MAX Valve Manual/Pneumatic Actuator
Description
The CV90/MAX valve manual/pneumatic actuator (Part No.
32094) is used where a system design requires manual-
local override at the cylinder. The manual actuator can be
mounted directly to the release attachment port of the CV90
valve or to the release attachment port on the MAX valve
by incorporating the use of a stackable actuator.
When either valve uses an electric actuator, the
manual/pneumatic actuator can be mounted directly to the
top of the electric actuator, giving the system the capability
of manual, pneumatic, and electric actuation. 3 3/4 IN.
(9.5 cm)
Operation is accomplished by either removing the ring pin
and depressing the red palm button or by supplying a mini- INLET PORT
1/4 IN. NPT
mum of 30 psi (207 kPa) to the inlet port. A swivel connec- FEMALE PIPE
tion is provided to facilitate orientation of the inlet port.
Manual/Pneumatic Brass U.S. Coast Guard

Actuator (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968) 1 7/8 IN.
FM Approved (4.8 cm)
001394
Shipping Assembly
32094 Manual/pneumatic actuator
1-9
ANSUL 
CV90/MAX Valve Pneumatic Actuator
Description
INLET PORT
The CV90/MAX valve pneumatic actuator (Part No. 1/4 IN. NPT
FEMALE PIPE
32096) is used where a system design requires pneumat-
ic actuation at the cylinder. The pneumatic actuator can
be mounted directly to the release attachment port of the
CV90 valve or to the release attachment port on the MAX
valve by incorporating the use of a stackable actuator.
When either valve uses an electric actuator, the pneumat-
1 5/8 IN.
ic actuator can be mounted directly to the top of the elec- (4.1 cm)
tric actuator, giving the system the capability of both
pneumatic and electric actuation.
Operation is accomplished by supplying a minimum of 30
psi (207 kPa) for MAX valve and a minimum of 100 psi
(690 kPa) for CV90 valve, to the inlet port of the actuator.
A swivel fitting is provided for orientation of piping and to
allow for disassembly without breaking the pneumatic 1 7/8 IN.
(4.8 cm)
connections.
Pneumatic Brass U.S. Coast Guard 001391
Actuator (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Shipping Assembly
32096 Pneumatic Actuator
1-10
ANSUL 
Discharge Nozzle – Type “D”
Description
The type ‘‘D’’ nozzle is used primarily for local application the discharge rate and the height of the nozzle above the
and is also listed and approved for use as a total flooding surface being protected. Height range: 15 to 91 1/2 in.
nozzle. The nozzle shell is drawn sheet steel and the (38 to 232 cm). Discharge rate: 11 to 48.5 lbs. per minute
insert is brass. The ‘‘D’’ type nozzle is available in orifice (5 to 22 kg per minute). See carbon dioxide design manu-
sizes ranging from 1 through 7. The discharge rate of the al for UL and FM listed area coverage and required flow
nozzle depends on the orifice size and nozzle pressure. rates. The nozzle is painted red with chrome or nickel
The area covered in local application is dependent upon plating available as an option.
Component Material Thread Size/Type Orifice Size Approvals

Type ‘‘D’’ nozzle Shell: 1/2 in. NPT Female 1 through 7 U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Steel UL (EX-2968)
Insert: FM Approved
Brass
Strainer:
Monel
Shipping Assembly
Part No. Description Orifice Code
426100 Type ‘‘D’’ nozzle with strainer 1–3

426101 Type ‘‘D’’ nozzle 3.5 – 7
426301 Type ‘‘D’’ nozzle, Chrome Plated 3.5 – 7
NOTE: When ordering, specify orifice code required: Example – Part No. 426100 – 2.5.
1-11
Carbon Dioxide Type ‘‘D’’ Discharge Nozzle
NOZZLE CODE 1/2 IN. NPT

STAMPED HERE BRASS DRAWN STEEL
NOZZLE
ORIFICE INSERT
2 IN.
2 1/2 IN.
(5 cm)
3 15/32 IN. (6.3 cm)
DIAMETER
(8.8 cm) DIAMETER
4 IN.
(10.1 cm)
000672a 000672b
Carbon Dioxide Type ‘‘D’’ Discharge Nozzle with Strainer
1/2 IN. NPT STRAINER

DRAWN STEEL
NOZZLE CODE BRASS
STAMPED HERE ORIFICE NOZZLE
INSERT
2 IN.
2 1/2 IN.
(5 cm)
(6.3 cm)
DIAMETER
DIAMETER
3 15/32 IN.
(8.8 cm)
4 IN.
(10.1 cm)
000671a 000671b
ANSUL 
Discharge Nozzle – Type “D”

(Corrosion Resistant)
Description
The corrosion resistant (CR) type “D” nozzle is used pri- tubing can be attached to this to cover the discharge pip-
marily for local application wet bench protection but is ing within the corrosive environment.
also approved for use as a total flooding nozzle. The noz- The discharge rate of the nozzle depends on the orifice
zle shell is drawn sheet steel and the insert is stainless size and nozzle pressure. The area covered in local appli-
steel. The entire nozzle is coated with a corrosion resistant cation is dependent upon the discharge rate and the
material which is not effected by the acid type environment height of the nozzle above the surface being protected.
of a typical wet bench hazard. The CR “D” type nozzle is Height range: 24 to 33 in. (61 to 84 cm). Discharge rate:
available in orifice sizes ranging from 1 through 7. Nozzle 16.4 to 21.8 lbs. per minute (7.4 to 9.9 kg per minute).
shipping assembly includes a blow off cap. Cap should be See carbon dioxide design manual for FM listed area cov-
installed using special tool, Part No. 426206. erage and required flow rates
Also available is a plastic nozzle tube adaptor which can
be threaded on the external nozzle threads and plastic
Type “D” nozzle Shell: Steel 1/2 in. NPT Female 1 through 7 FM Approved*
Insert: Stainless Steel
Strainer: Monel
Assembly coated with acid
resistant material (Halar® ECTFE)
Blow Off Cap Teflon® (TFE)
Shipping Assembly Orifice

1-16 UN 2A
Part No. Description Code EXTERNAL THREAD
422647 Type “D” nozzle with strainer 1

422648 Type “D” nozzle with strainer 1+
422650 Type “D” nozzle with strainer 2+
422652 Type “D” nozzle 3+ 4 IN.
1/2 IN.
FEMALE
422653 Type “D” nozzle 4 (10.2 cm) NPT
422654 Type “D” nozzle 4+
LOCATION OF
422655 Type “D” nozzle 5 ORIFICE SIZE
STAMPING
422656 Type “D” nozzle 5+
422657 Type “D” nozzle 6
BLOW OFF
422658 Type “D” nozzle 6+ CAP
422659 Type “D” nozzle 7
422780 Nozzle Tube Adaptor 2 1/2 IN. DIA.
(6.3 cm)
423256 Spare Blow Off Cap (1)
426206 Cap Installation Tool 001538
NOTE: For non-typical wet bench environments, contact Ansul Technical Services Department.
*FM APPROVAL limited to non-corrosive environments.
ANSUL is a registered trademark, Halar is a registered trademark of Ausimont, Teflon is a registered trademark of DuPont.
1-11.1
ANSUL 
Sealed Nozzle With Strainer
Description
The sealed nozzle is used primarily in ducts and enclosed sealing disc, allowing an unobstructed flow of gas to the
machinery spaces. The seal portion of the nozzle is a internal discharge nozzle.
combination line seal and strainer unit. It is used to pre- The advantage of the sealed nozzle is that it does not
vent dirt or vapors from entering the system piping and require disassembly of the system piping to clean the
also to function as a strainer for the system piping. On strainer or replace a ruptured sealing disc. This is accom-
operation of the carbon dioxide system, the high pressure plished by removing the hex cap on the nozzle.
of the gas released from the cylinders ruptures the thin

Sealed Nozzle Body: 1/2 in. NPT Female 2 through 7 U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Brass UL (EX-2968)
Strainer: FM Approved
Monel
Shipping Assembly
426102 Sealed nozzle with strainer 2– 7
3 1/4 IN. CELERON WASHER

(8.3 cm) JAM NUT TO BE USED IF
NOZZLE
DUCT IS TOO THIN TO BE
THREADED
SEALING
DISC
HEX CAP
2 IN.
(5.1 cm)
SPARE SEALING DISCS 1/2 IN. STRAIGHT

BODY KNURLED PIPE THREAD
MONEL
1/2 IN. NPT INLET SCREEN – RING
STRAINER SEALING DISC
RETAINER
000673
1-12
ANSUL 
Bulkhead Mounting Flange
Description
The bulkhead mounting flange, Part No. 42806, is used
on the multi-discharge type nozzles. The flange allows the
nozzle to be rigidly fastened against a wall or bulkhead of Mounting Steel U.S. Coast Guard
a hazard area, keeping the nozzle outside of the area. Flange (162.038/7/0)
This is an advantage on hazard areas where the nozzle UL (EX-2968)
cannot be mounted inside the area because of space limi- FM Approved
tations or interference with moving parts. A typical appli-
cation is a large exhaust duct where access into the duct
is limited.
Also available is a sealing plug, Part No. 42293, which is
shipped as a separate unit.
Should a seal be required between the flange and the
mounting surface, the fiber seal, Part No. 36550, is avail-
able.
CLAMPING SCREW
000670a
NOZZLE LOCKWASHER PLUG SEAL

CLAMPING AND NUT
BULKHEAD (OPTIONAL)
RING
MOUNTING PART NO. 42293
MOUNTING HOLE
SCREWS 4 1/2 IN. DIAMETER
(1/4 IN. – 20
RETAINING
x 5/8 IN. LONG) RING
ASSEMBLY OF MULTI-DISCHARGE
NOZZLE WITH MOUNTING RINGS
(BULKHEAD NOT SHOWN)
000670b
NOTE: When using mounting flange with a fiber seal, use retaining ring, Part No. 46793.
1-13
ANSUL 
Discharge Nozzle – Type “A”
Description
The type ‘‘A’’ nozzle is used primarily for local application surface being protected. Height range: 18 to 72 in. (46 to
and is also listed and approved for use as a total flooding 183 cm). Discharge rate: 14 to 48.5 lbs. per minute (6 to
nozzle. The nozzle shell is drawn sheet steel and the 22 kg per minute). See carbon dioxide design manual for
insert is brass. The ‘‘A’’ type nozzle is available in orifice area coverage and required flow rates.
sizes ranging from 1 through 7. The discharge rate of the The nozzle is painted red with chrome or nickel plating
nozzle depends on the orifice size and nozzle pressure. available as an option.
The area covered in local application is dependent on the
discharge rate of the height of the nozzle above the
Type ‘‘A’’ Nozzle Shell: 1/2 in. NPT Female 1 through 7 U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Steel UL (EX-2968)
Insert: FM Approved
Brass
Strainer:
Monel
Shipping Assembly
426103 Type ‘‘A’’ nozzle with strainer 1–3

426104 Type ‘‘A’’ nozzle 3.5 – 7
1-14
Carbon Dioxide Type ‘‘A’’ Discharge Nozzle with Strainer
STRAINER DRAWN STEEL

BRASS
STAMPED HERE
NOZZLE
INSERT
ORIFICE
3 1/4 IN.
3 3/4 IN.
(8.2 cm)
(8.2 cm)
DIAMETER
4 23/32 IN. DIAMETER
(11.9 cm)
4 1/2 IN.
(11.4 cm)
001829a 001829b
Carbon Dioxide Type ‘‘A’’ Discharge Nozzle
DRAWN STEEL
BRASS
STAMPED HERE
NOZZLE
INSERT
ORIFICE
3 1/4 IN.
3 3/4 IN.
(8.2 cm)
(8.2 cm)
DIAMETER
4 23/32 IN. DIAMETER
(11.9 cm)
4 1/2 IN.
(11.4 cm)
001830a 001830b
ANSUL 
Discharge Nozzle – Cone Type
Description
The cone nozzle is used primarily for local application and Height range: 42 to 108 in. (107 to 274 cm). Discharge
also listed and approved for use as a total flooding nozzle. rate: 21 to 132 lbs. per minute (10 to 60 kg per minute).
The nozzle insert is stainless steel and the body is sheet See carbon dioxide design manual for area coverage and
steel. The nozzle is available in orifice sizes ranging from required flow rates.
3 through 11. The discharge rate of the nozzle depends The nozzle is painted red with chrome or nickel plating
on the orifice size and nozzle pressure. The area covered available as an option.
in local application is dependent upon the discharge rate
and the height above the surface being protected.
Cone nozzle Shell: 1/2 in. NPT Female 3 through 11 UL (EX-2968)

Steel FM Approved
Insert:
Stainless
Steel
Shipping Assembly Orifice

Part No. Description Code
426105 Cone nozzle 3 – 11
NOTE: When ordering, specify orifice code required: Example –
Part No.426105 – 3.5.
9 1/4 IN.
(23.4 cm)
4 13/16 IN.
(12.2 cm)
001834
1-15
ANSUL 
Discharge Nozzle – 4 in. Multi-Discharge Type
Description
The 4 in. multi-discharge nozzle is used only for total flood- nozzle depends on the orifice size and the nozzle pressure.
ing applications. The nozzle insert is brass and the remain- The nozzle is painted red with chrome or nickel plating
der of the nozzle is steel. The nozzle is available in orifice available as an option.
sizes ranging from 2 through 18. The dischargerate of the
4 in. MD Nozzle Nozzle: 1/2 in. NPT Female 2 through 4.5 U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
w/Strainer Steel UL (EX-2968)
Insert: FM Approved
Brass
4 in. MD Nozzle Nozzle: 1/2 in. NPT Female 5 through 10 U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Steel UL (EX-2968)
Insert: FM Approved
Brass
4 in. MDL Nozzle Nozzle: 3/4 in. NPT Female 8 through 18 U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Steel UL (EX-2968)
Insert: FM Approved
Brass
Shipping Assembly
426106 4 in MD nozzle with strainer 2 – 4.5

426107 4 in MD nozzle 5 – 10
426108 4 in MD nozzle 8 – 18
1-16
Multi-Discharge Nozzle – 4 MD with Strainer
BRASS NOZZLE
METAL HORN INSERT
CODE NO. OF ORIFICE
STAMPED ON CONNECTOR
1/2 IN. NPT
STRAINER
5 13/16 3 1/2 IN.

(13.1 cm) (8.8 cm)
001831a 001831b
Multi-Discharge Nozzle – 4 MD and 4 MDL

BRASS NOZZLE
METAL HORN INSERT
CODE NO. OF ORIFICE
1/2 IN. OR 3/4 IN. NPT

(SEE TABLE)
5 13/16 3 1/2 IN.

(13.1 cm) (8.8 cm)
001835a 001835b
ANSUL 
Discharge Nozzle – 6 in. Multi-Discharge Type
Description
The 6 in. multi-discharge nozzle is used primarily for local the surface being protected. Height range: 36 to 144 in.
application and it is also listed and approved for use as a (91 to 366 cm). Discharge rate: 28.5 to 108 lbs. per minute
total flooding nozzle. The nozzle insert is brass and the (13 to 49 kg per minute). See carbon dioxide design manu-
remainder of the nozzle is steel. The nozzle is available in al for area coverage and required flow rates.
orifice sizes ranging from 2 through 18. The discharge rate The nozzle is painted red with chrome and nickel plating
of the nozzle depends on the orifice size and the nozzle available as an option.
pressure. The area covered in local application is depen-
dent upon the discharge rate and the height above
6 in. MD Nozzle Nozzle: 1/2 in. NPT Female 2 through 4.5 UL (EX-2968)
w/Strainer Steel FM Approved
Insert:
Brass
6 in. MD Nozzle Nozzle: 1/2 in. NPT Female 5 through 10 UL (EX-2968)

Steel FM Approved
Insert:
Brass
6 in. MDL Nozzle Nozzle: 3/4 in. NPT Female 8 through 18 UL (EX-2968)
Steel FM Approved
Insert:
Brass
Shipping Assembly
426109 6 in MD nozzle with strainer 2 – 4.5
426110 6 in MD nozzle 5 – 10
426111 6 in MDL nozzle 8 – 18
1-17
Multi-Discharge Nozzle – 6 MD with Strainer
DRAWN STEEL HORN BRASS NOZZLE
INSERT
CODE NO. OF ORIFICE
1/2 IN. NPT
STRAINER
3 1/2 IN.
7 3/4 IN.
(8.8 cm)
(19.6 cm)
000737b
000737a
Multi-Discharge Nozzle – 6 MD and 6 MDL

DRAWN STEEL HORN BRASS NOZZLE
INSERT
CODE NO. OF ORIFICE
1/2 IN. OR 3/4 IN. NPT
(SEE TABLE)
3 1/2 IN.
7 3/4 IN.
(8.8 cm)
(19.6 cm)
000669a 000669b
ANSUL 
Discharge Nozzle – Regular Type
Description
The regular type nozzle is used for total flooding applica- pressure and orifice size. The regular type nozzle provides
tions only. The nozzle is available in seven different config- orifice sizes of 1 through 18.
urations: regular (1/2 in.), regular RL (3/4 in.), regular The nozzle is available with 1/2 in. NPT threads for orifice
sealed with strainer, regular sealed, regular sealed with sizes 1 through 12 and 3/4 in. NPT threads for orifice sized
flange and strainer, regular sealed with flange, and regular 8 through 18. Nozzles with orifices of 1 through 2+ are sup-
RSFL sealed with flange. The sealed type has a sealing plied with a strainer.
disc retaining ring and a frangible seal to prevent foreign
matter from entering and plugging the nozzle orifice. The The nozzle is supplied in natural brass with chrome or
discharge rate of the regular nozzle depends on nozzle nickel plating available. Stainless steel nozzles are also
available.
Regular Type Brass 1/2 in. NPT Male 3 through 12 U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Regular RL Type Brass 3/4 in. NPT Male 8 through 18 U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Regular Sealed Nozzle: 1/2 in. NPT Male 1 through 2.5 U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
with Strainer Brass UL (EX-2968)
Monel
Regular Sealed Brass 1/2 in. NPT Male 3 through 12 U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Regular Sealed with Nozzle: 1/2 in. NPT Male 1 through 2.5 U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Flange and Strainer Brass UL (EX-2968)
Monel
Flange:
Steel
Regular Sealed Nozzle: 1/2 in. NPT Male 3 through 12 U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
with Flange Brass UL (EX-2968)
Flange: FM Approved
Steel
Regular RSFL Nozzle: 3/4 in. NPT Male 8 through 18 U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Sealed with Flange Brass UL (EX-2968)
Flange: FM Approved
Steel
1-18
Shipping Assembly
426112 Regular type nozzle 3 – 12
426113 Regular RL type nozzle 8 – 18
426114 Regular sealed with strainer nozzle 1 – 2.5
426115 Regular sealed nozzle 3 – 12
426116 Regular sealed with flange and strainer nozzle 1 – 2.5
426117 Regular sealed with flange nozzle 3 – 12
426118 Regular RSFL sealed with flange nozzle 8 – 18
426299 Regular sealed with flange and strainer nozzle (stainless steel) 1 – 2.5
426300 Regular sealed with flange nozzle (stainless steel) 3 – 12
Regular Type Nozzle – Brass Regular Nozzle – Type RL
29/32 IN. 7/8 IN. 1 IN. 1 1/8 IN. HEX

(2.3 cm) HEX (2.5 cm)
5/8 IN.
7/16 IN.
(1.5 cm)
(1.1 cm)
ORIFICE CODE NO. 3/4 IN. STANDARD PIPE THREAD

1/2 IN. STANDARD PIPE THREAD ORIFICE CODE NO.
STAMPED ON HEX
STAMPED ON HEX
001836a 001836b 001837a 001837b
Regular Type Sealed Nozzle With or Regular Sealed Flanged Type Nozzle With or
Without Strainer Without Strainer
3 IN.
(7.6 cm) SELF-
1 5/8 IN.
TAPPING
2 1/2 IN. (4.1 cm)
1 1/2 IN. SCREW
(6.3 cm)
(3.8 cm) FRANGIBLE 1 1/8 IN. 1/2 IN. NPT
SEALING (2.8 cm)
DISC
STRAINER
2 1/2 IN.
(6.3 cm) STRAINER
3 IN.
(7.6 cm) 1 IN.
7/16 IN. ORIFICE CLEARANCE SEAL
(1.1 cm) CODE NO. HOLE
STAMPED
1/2 IN. ON HEX
STANDARD 3/16 IN.
PIPE THREAD MOUNTING HOLE
000666a 000666b 000667a 000667b
Regular Sealed Flanged Type Nozzle –

Type RSFL
3 IN. SELF-
(7.6 cm) 1 7/8 IN.
TAPPING
(4.7 cm)
2 1/2 IN. SCREW
(6.3 cm) 3/4 IN. NPT
2 1/2 IN.
(6.3 cm)
3 IN.
(7.6 cm) 1 IN.
SEAL
CLEARANCE
HOLE
3/16 IN.
MOUNTING HOLE
000668a 000668b
ANSUL 
Discharge Nozzle – Baffle Type
Description
The baffle type nozzle is used in total flood applications space. Discharge rate depends upon nozzle pressure and
only. Placed around the outside edge or placed near the orifice size. Baffle type nozzles are available in orifice sizes
ceiling approximately 15 to 20 ft. (4.6 to 6.1 m) on centers 1 through 16.
in a room or any enclosed space, each nozzle provides a This nozzle is supplied in natural brass with chrome or nick-
180° fan spray of CO2, spreading the extinguishing gas el plating available as an option.
quickly and efficiently throughout the protected
Baffle Type with Nozzle: 1/2 in. NPT Male 1 through 3 U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Strainer Brass UL (EX-2968)
Strainer FM Approved
Monel
Baffle Type Brass 1/2 in. NPT Male 3.5 through 14 U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Baffle Type BL Brass 3/4 in. NPT Male 9 through 16 U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Shipping Assembly
426119 Baffle type with strainer nozzle 1–3
426120 Baffle type nozzle 3.5 – 14
426121 Baffle type BL nozzle 9 – 16
1-19
Baffle Type Nozzle With or Without Strainer
STRAINER (BAFFLE TYPE WITH STRAINER ONLY)
FORGED 1/2 IN. NPT
BRASS BODY
DISCHARGE ORIFICE
ORIFICE SIZE STAMPED

ON THIS SURFACE
2 5/8 IN.
(6.6 cm)
1 3/4 IN.
(4.4 cm)
000662a 000662b
Baffle Type BL Nozzle
3/4 IN. NPT

3 5/16 IN.
(84 cm)
3 1/4 IN.
(8.2 cm)
DISCHARGE ORIFICE
STAMPED
FORGED
NOZZLE CODE
BRASS BODY
2 1/4 IN.
(5.7 cm)
000664a 000664b
ANSUL 
Cylinder Bracketing
Description
The cylinder bracketing is designed to rigidly support the
installed carbon dioxide cylinders. The bracketing compo- Component Material Approvals
nents are constructed of heavy structual steel. Bracket
Bracketing Steel U.S. Coast Guard
assemblies are available in modules for two to six cylinders
(162.038/7/0)
and can also be mated together for any combination over
UL (EX-2968)
six. Bracketing can be assembled to support single row,
FM Approved
double row or back-to-back rows of cylinders. Bracketing
uprights and weigh rail supports are also available for
weighing cylinders in place. Bracketing components are
painted with a red enamel coating. Uprights and back
frame assemblies can be bolted or welded together, which
ever makes the installation more convenient. For weighing
cylinders, a scale and lifting yoke is also available.
Shipping Assembly
45120 50 lb. (22.7 kg) cylinder strap (single cylinder)
45244 50 lb. (22.7 kg) cylinder channel with nuts and bolts (single cylinder)
45121 75 lb. (34 kg) cylinder strap (single cylinder)
45261 75 lb. (34 kg) cylinder channel with nuts and bolts (single cylinder)
45122 100 lb. (45.4 kg) cylinder strap (single cylinder)
45245 100 lb. (45.4 kg) cylinder channel with nuts and bolts (single cylinder)
79638 Back frame assembly (2 cylinder)
73257 Upright (used either for right or left side)
73553 Single row or back-to-back row bracket foot (left side)
73554 Single row or back-to-back row bracket foot (right side)
73555 Double row bracket foot (left side)
73556 Double row bracket foot (right side)
73256 Center upright (required when weighing seven or more cylinders in a row)
79413 Connector (required to hook together back frames for seven or more cylinders)
73250 10 in. (25.4 cm) carriage bolt with nut (for single row 50 lb. (22.7 kg) cylinders)
73251 10.5 in (26.7 cm) carriage bolt with nut (for single row 75 lb. (34 kg) cylinders)
73252 12 in. (30.5 cm) carriage bolt with nut (for single row 100 lb. (45.4 kg) cylinders)
73253 20 in. (50.8 cm) carriage bolt with nut (for double row 50 lb. (22.7 kg) cylinders)
73254 20.5 in. (52.1 cm) carriage bolt with nut (for double row 75 lb. (34 kg) cylinders)
73255 25 in. (63.5 cm) carriage bolt with nut (for double row 100 lb. (45.4 kg) cylinders)
73266 Weigh rail (two cylinder)
73267 Weigh rail (three cylinder)
73268 Weigh rail (four cylinder)
73269 Weigh rail (five cylinder)
73270 Weigh rail (six cylinder)
73091 Cylinder clamp (2 cylinders)
73092 Cylinder clamp (3 cylinders
1-20
Shipping Assembly
71683 Weigh rail support (single row)
71682 Weigh rail support (double row)
71684 Weigh rail support (back-to-back)
74241 Scale
69877 Lifting yoke
WEIGH RAIL
SUPPORT
UPRIGHT
WEIGH RAIL
BACK FRAME
CYLINDER
CLAMP
CARRIAGE BOLT
WITH NUT
RIGHT
BRACKET FOOT
LEFT BRACKET FOOT
0001838
ANSUL 
Nameplate – MAIN
Description
The ‘‘MAIN’’ nameplate is available for labeling compo-
Shipping Assembly
nents and/or remote pull stations to distinguish them from
reserve system components. The nameplate is furnished Part No. Description
with four mounting holes for ease of installation. 41942 Nameplate – MAIN
Component Material Mounting Hole Size Approvals

Nameplate Aluminum 13/64 in. (.52 cm) U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
5 1/2 IN.
(13.9 cm)
5/16 IN.
4 7/8 IN. (.8 cm)
(12.4 cm)
MAIN
2 1/2 IN.
(6.4 cm)
1 7/8 IN.
(4.7 cm)
PART NO. 41942
4 – 13/64 IN. (.5 cm)

DIAMETER HOLES
000723
1-21
ANSUL 
Nameplate – RESERVE
Description
The “RESERVE’’ nameplate is available for labeling com-
Shipping Assembly
ponents and/or remote pull stations to distinguish them
from main system components. The nameplate is fur- Part No. Description
nished with four mounting holes for ease of installation. 41943 Nameplate – RESERVE

UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
5 1/2 IN.
(13.9 cm)
5/16 IN.
4 7/8 IN. (.8 cm)
(12.4 cm)
RESERVE
2 1/2 IN.
(6.4 cm)
1 7/8 IN.
(4.8 cm)
PART NO. 41943
4 – 13/64 IN. (.52 cm)

DIAMETER HOLES
000723
1-22
ANSUL 
Nameplate – Maintenance
Description
The maintenance nameplate is available for mounting
Shipping Assembly
near the system cylinders. This plate gives instructions for
performing the semi-annual cylinder weighing require- Part No. Description
ments. The nameplate is furnished with four mounting 70449 Nameplate – maintenance
holes for ease of installation.

UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
5 3/4 IN.
(14.6 cm)
3/16 IN.
5 3/8 IN. (.5 cm)
(13.7 cm)
ANSUL CARBON DIOXIDE FIRE

SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
WEIGH CYLINDERS EVERY SIX MONTHS AND RECORD ON
CYLINDER RECORD TAG. IF WEIGHT OF CYLINDER IS
LBS. ( kg) LESS THAN FULL WEIGHT 4 7/8 IN.
STAMPED ON THE BODY OF CYLINDER VALVE OR ON NECK (12.4 cm)
OF CYLINDER, RECHARGE. WHEN SHIPPING CYLINDER, BE
SURE THAT OUTLET PLUG IS SCREWED INTO TOP OF 4 1/2 IN.
CYLINDER VALVE AND SHIPPING CAP IS SCREWED ON TOP (11.4 cm)
OF CYLINDER. BEFORE WEIGHING CYLINDERS, REMOVE
RELEASE ATTACHMENTS FROM THE CONTROL CYLINDERS
AND DISCONNECT THE FLEXIBLE DISCHARGE BEND FROM
ALL CYLINDERS BEING WEIGHED. BE SURE THAT RELEASE
ATTACHMENT IS IN SET POSITION WHEN REPLACING
VALVE.
CARBON DIOXIDE GAS HMIS 1-0-0/VERY COLD DISCHARGE.
CONTENTS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE.
FOR DETAILS SEE INSTRUCTION BOOK. LISTED
295S ®
ANSUL FIRE PROTECTION
ANSUL ®
ONE STANTON STREET
MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542
715-735-7411 Part No. 70449
000725
1-23
ANSUL 
Warning Plate – Outside Room Without Alarm
Description
The warning plate is available for mounting outside the
Shipping Assembly
hazard area to warn personnel that the space is protected
by a carbon dioxide system and no one should enter after Part No. Description
a discharge without being properly protected. The warn- 41905 Warning plate – outside room
ing plate is furnished with four mounting holes for ease of without alarm
installation.

Warning Plate Stainless 7/32 in. (.56 cm) U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Steel UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
8 IN.
(20.3 cm)
1/4 IN.
7 1/2 IN.
(.63 cm)
(19 cm)
WARNING
THIS SPACE IS PROTECTED BY A
CARBON DIOXIDE FIRE SUPPRESSION
SYSTEM. WHEN SYSTEM IS 5 IN.
DISCHARGED, DO NOT ENTER WITHOUT (12.7 cm)
APPROVED SELF-CONTAINED 4 1/2 IN.

BREATHING APPARATUS OR UNTIL (11.4 cm)
VENTILATION HAS BEEN OPERATED FOR

AT LEAST 15 MINUTES.
Part No. 41905
000724
1-24
ANSUL 
Pressure Bleeder Plug – 1/4 in.
Description
The pressure bleeder plug can be used to relieve the
pressure in closed actuation lines. The plug relieves the 1/64 IN. (0.4 mm) ORIFICE
pressure through a small 1/64 in. (0.4 mm) orifice. This
slow relief of pressure does not affect the function of the
actuation line.
Shipping Assembly
1/4 IN. NPT
42175 Pressure bleeder plug
001839b

Bleeder Plug Brass 1/4 in. NPT Male UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
1-25
ANSUL 
Warning Plate – Outside Room With Alarm
Description
The warning plate is available for mounting outside the
Shipping Assembly
hazard area to warn personnel not to enter the room
when the alarm is sounding. The warning plate is fur- Part No. Description
nished with four mounting holes for ease of installation. 41927 Warning plate – outside room
The plate is constructed of BAKELITE engraving stock with alarm
with a red finish.

Warning Plate BAKELITE 7/32 in. (.56 cm) U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Molded UL (EX-2968)
Plastic FM Approved
8 IN.
(2 cm)
WARNING
DO NOT ENTER ROOM
WHEN ALARM SOUNDS.
5 IN.
(12.7 cm)
CARBON DIOXIDE
BEING RELEASED.
Part No. 41927
000727
ANSUL is a registered trademark and BAKELITE is a trademark of Union Carbide Corp.
1-26
ANSUL 
Warning Plate – Inside Room With Alarm
Description
The warning plate is available for mounting inside the
Shipping Assembly
hazard area to warn the personnel to vacate the hazard
area when the alarm sounds. The warning plate is fur- Part No. Description
nished with four mounting holes for ease of installation. 41925 Warning plate – inside room
The plate is constructed of BAKELITE engraving stock with alarm
with a red finish.

Warning Plate BAKELITE 1/4 in. (.64 cm) U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Molded UL (EX-2968)
Plastic FM Approved
15 1/2 IN.
(39.3 cm)
1/4 IN.
15 IN. (.63 cm)
(38.1 cm)
WHEN ALARM SOUNDS

VACATE AT ONCE 5 IN.
(12.7 cm)
4 1/2 IN.
CARBON DIOXIDE BEING (11.4 cm)
RELEASED Part No. 41925
000726
1-27
ANSUL 
Connecting Link
Description
The connecting link is used to connect the lever releases
Shipping Assembly
located on the pilot cylinders together. When cable or
manual actuation is required, all cylinders will actuate Part No. Description
simultaneously. The connecting link can be used on 42514 Connecting link
CV90, MAX, or AP-8 Ansul carbon dioxide valves.
One size connecting link is available for all size cylinders.

Connecting Link Steel U.S. Coast Guard
(162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
000661a
PIVOT PIN FLEXLOCK HEX NUT
15/16 IN.
(24 mm)
14 1/4 IN. (36.2 cm)
3/4 IN.
(19 mm)
000661c
001840
1-28
ANSUL 
Lever Release Actuator AP-8 Valve/Selector Valve
Description
Lever Release Actuator: The manual lever release actua- system must provide the components necessary to meet
tor can provide a manual means of agent cylinder actuation the actuator lever traveling requirements of 7 in. (17.8 cm).
by direct manual actuation of its pull lever or cable actua- Manual actuation for electric or pneumatic selector valves
tion when used in conjunction with a remote manual pull can be accomplished using these lever actuators.
station.
In three or more cylinder systems, a connecting link is Component Material Approvals
required to provide simultaneous actuation of both lever
release actuators. Lever Release Brass U.S. Coast Guard
Manual actuation is accomplished by pulling the valve hand Actuator With (162.038/7/0)
lever. The lever design contains a forged mechanical detent Stainless UL (EX-2968)
which secures the lever in the open position when actuated. Steel FM Approved
Stem
Cable pull actuation is accomplished by using a remote
manual pull station. The remote manual pull station
Shipping Assembly
42484 Lever release actuator (with handle and pin; for local control)
42485 Lever release actuator (with handle, no pin; for remote control)
42486 Lever release actuator (with no handle, no pin; for use with three or more cylinders)
HANDLE HANDLE
ON R
SE TO
R U LEC LY476 ON R
O
F /SE ON. 70 SE TO
-8 S NO R U LEC LY 476
AP ALVEBEL O
F /S E N 70
V LA -8 S OL NO.
AP ALVELA
BE
V
3 7/8 IN. 3 7/8 IN.

PIN (9.8 cm) (9.8 cm)
3 7/8 IN. 3 7/8 IN.

(9.8 cm) (9.8 cm)
DEPTH: 3 IN. (7.6 cm) DEPTH: 2 13/16 IN. (7.1 cm)
000897 001393b
1-29
ON R
SE TO
R U EC LY 76
FO /SEL ON . 704
-8 S L NO
AP ALVELA
BE
V
3 7/8 IN.
(9.8 cm)
3 7/8 IN.
(9.8 cm)
DEPTH: 1 13/16 IN. (4.6 cm)
Part No. 42486
001393b
ANSUL 
Selector Valves
Description
Selector valves are used to direct the flow of carbon dioxide The Selector Valve Electric Actuation Kit, Part No. 426893,
into a single hazard of a multiple hazard system. This must be purchased separately to provide electric actuation
series of valves comes equipped with a pressure actuator to the selector valve.
attached to the top of the valve. The selector valve can also be operated manually, by the
To this actuator, a 1/4 in. pressure line can be connected use of a hand lever attached to the top of the CV-98 electric
from a cartridge receiver in the detection panel which will actuator or by means of a remote manual pull which will
supply the required pressure to operate the selector valve. operate the hand lever remotely.
Or, to this actuator, an adaptor, Part No. 426674, can be The valves are available in sizes ranging from 1/2 in. to 4
attached to accommodate a CV-98 electric actuator, Part in.
No. 423684. The adaptor and electric actuator are part of For manual actuation, three types of lever actuators are
the selector valve electric actuation kit, Part No. 426893. available.
NOTE: Pneumatic actuation cannot be used if the selector valve has an electric actuator attached.
Component Material Thread Size/Type Approvals Equivalent Length
Selector Valve Brass 1/2 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0) 9.0 ft. (2.7 m) Sch. 40
(1/2 in.) UL (EX-2968) 5.0 ft. (1.5 m) Sch. 80
FM Approved
Selector Valve Brass 3/4 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0) 23.0 ft. (7.0 m) Sch. 40
(3/4 in.) UL (EX-2968) 14.0 ft. (4.3 m) Sch. 80
FM Approved
Selector Valve Brass 1 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0) 18 ft. (5.5 m) Sch. 80
(1 in.) UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Selector Valve Brass 1 1/4 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0) 27.0 ft. (8.3 m) Sch. 80
(1 1/4 in.) UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Selector Valve Brass 1 1/2 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0) 61.0 ft. (18.6 m) Sch. 80
(1 1/2 in.) UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Selector Valve Ductile 3 in. Flange – 600 lb. U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0) 2 in. – 10 ft. (3.1 m) Sch. 80
(2 in., 2 1/2 in., Iron American Standard UL (EX-2968) 2 1/2 in. – 25 ft. (7.6 m) Sch. 80
3 in.) Raised Face FM Approved 3 in. – 72 ft. (21.9 m) Sch. 80
Selector Valve Ductile 4 in. Flange – 600 lb. U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0) 111 ft. (33.8 m) Sch. 80
(4 in.) Iron American Standard UL (EX-2968)
Raised Face FM Approved
NOTE: These selector valves latch open upon actuation. They must be manually reset by pulling out the reset knob on the
side of the pressure actuator. If the valve is not reset, it will not operate properly the next time it is used.
1-30
Shipping
Assembly
57428 1/2 in. selector valve
57430 1 in. selector valve
57431 1 1/4 in. selector valve
57433 2 in., 2 1/2 in., 3 in. selector valve
42484 Lever release (with handle and pin for local control for attaching directly to selector valve) –
order separately
42486 Lever release (no handle, no pin for remote control for attaching directly to selector valve) –
order separately
423309 Manual cable-pull actuator (handle and pin; for local control on electric actuator) – order separately
423311 Manual cable-pull actuator (no handle, no pin; for remote control of electric actuator) – order separately
423310 Manual cable-pull actuator (handle, no pin; for remote control of electric actuator) – order separately
426893 Electric actuator kit
42402 Brass Cap
NOTE: A lever actuator, brass cap, or CV-98 1 1/4 – 18 THREAD

electric actuator, must be used with each selector
valve. Valve will not operate properly without one
of these on top of pressure actuator assembly.
PRESSURE
ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
003549
A
IF FLANGED
A
A B C D
Valve Size Body in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
1/2 in. Threaded 4 3/4 (12) 6 15/16 (17.6) 2 3/4 (6.9) 11.63 (29.5)
3/4 in. Threaded 4 3/4 (12) 6 15/16 (17.6) 2 3/4 (6.9) 11.63 (29.5)
1 in. Threaded 4 3/4 (12) 6 15/16 (17.6) 2 3/4 (6.9) 11.63 (29.5)
1 1/4 in. Threaded 5 3/4 (14.6) 6 15/16 (17.6) 3 1/8 (7.9) 12.50 (31.8)
1 1/2 in. Threaded 5 3/4 (14.6) 6 15/16 (17.6) 3 1/8 (7.9) 12.50 (31.8)
2 in. Flanged 13 (33) 5 3/4 (14.6) 6 1/8 (15.5) 16.25 (41.3)
2 1/2 in. Flanged 13 (33) 5 3/4 (14.6) 6 1/8 (15.5) 16.25 (41.3)
3 in. Flanged 13 (33) 5 3/4 (14.6) 6 1/8 (15.5) 16.25 (41.3)
4 in. Flanged 16 (40.6) 5 3/4 (14.6) 8 3/4 (22.2) 19.88 (50.5)
ANSUL 
Selector Valves with Electric Solenoid Actuator
Description
Selector valves are used to direct the flow of carbon dioxide located on top of the valve or by means of a remote manual
into a single hazard of a multiple hazard system. This pull box which will operate the hand lever remotely. The
series of valves come equipped with an electric solenoid valves are available in sizes ranging from 1/2 in. to 4 in. For
actuator attached to the valve. Electrical actuation of the local manual actuation, lever release Part No. 42484, is
selector valve is accomplished by the electric solenoid available with a locking pin which must be disengaged prior
valve interfaced through an AUTOPULSE Control System. to the valve being operated manually.
The selector valve can also be operated manually, either by
the use of the hand lever attached to the pressure actuator
Selector Valve Brass 1/2 in. NPT Female UL (EX-2968), FMRC

(1/2 in.)
Selector Valve Brass 3/4 in. NPT Female UL (EX-2968), FMRC

(3/4 in.)
Selector Valve Brass 1 in. NPT Female UL (EX-2968), FMRC

(1 in.)
Selector Valve Brass 1 1/4 in. NPT Female UL (EX-2968), FMRC

(1 1/4 in.)
Selector Valve Brass 1 1/2 in. NPT Female UL (EX-2968), FMRC

(1 1/2 in.)
Selector Valve Ductile 3 in. Flange – 600 lb. UL (EX-2968), FMRC

(2 in., 2 1/2 in., Iron American Standard
3 in.) Raised Face
Selector Valve Ductile 4 in. Flange – 600 lb. UL (EX-2968), FMRC

(4 in.) Iron American Standard
Raised Face
1-30.1
Shipping Assembly
415221 1/2 in. selector valve with electric solenoid actuator

415222 3/4 in. selector valve with electric solenoid actuator
415223 1 in. selector valve with electric solenoid actuator
415224 1 1/4 in. selector valve with electric solenoid actuator
415225 1 1/2 in. selector valve with electric solenoid actuator
415226 2 in., 2 1/2 in., 3 in. selector valve with electric solenoid actuator
415227 4 in. selector valve with electric solenoid actuator
42484 Lever release (with handle and pin for local control)
42486 Lever release (no handle, no pin for remote control)
CLOSED POSITION
OPEN POSITION
HAND LEVER
LOCKING PIN
ACTUATOR NAMEPLATE
RESET KNOB
E
D
AIR VENT
SOLENOID
VALVE
A
A
IF FLANGED
B
001431
A B C D E
Valve Size Body in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
1/2 in. Threaded 4 3/4 (12) 6 15/16 (17.6) 2 3/4 (6.9) 15 (38.1) 16 9/16 (42)
3/4 in. Threaded 4 3/4 (12) 6 15/16 (17.6) 2 3/4 (6.9) 15 (38.1) 16 9/16 (42)
1 in. Threaded 4 3/4 (12) 6 15/16 (17.6) 2 3/4 (6.9) 15 (38.1) 16 9/16 (42)
1 1/4 in. Threaded 5 3/4 (14.6) 6 15/16 (17.6) 3 1/8 (7.9) 15 7/8 (40.3) 17 7/16 (44.2)
1 1/2 in . Threaded 5 3/4 (14.6) 6 15/16 (17.6) 3 1/8 (7.9) 15 7/8 (40.3) 17 7/16 (44.2)
2 in. Flanged 13 (33) 5 3/4 (14.6) 6 1/8 (15.5) 19 5/8 (49.8) 21 1/4 (53.9)
2 1/2 in. Flanged 13 (33) 5 3/4 (14.6) 6 1/8 (15.5) 19 5/8 (49.8) 21 1/4 (53.9)
3 in. Flanged 13 (33) 5 3/4 (14 6) 6 1/8 (15.5) 19 5/8 (49.8) 21 1/4 (53.9)
4 in. Flanged 16 (40.6) 5 3/4 (14.6) 8 1/4 (20.9) 22 5/8 (57.4) 24 1/4 (61.5)
ANSUL 
Selector Valves with Lever Actuator
Description
Selector valves with manual lever actuators are used to are available in sizes ranging from 1/2 in. to 4 in. Lever
direct the flow of carbon dioxide into a single hazard of a releases, Part Nos. 45650 and 45667, are the only actua-
multiple hazard system. The valve can be operated manu- tors approved for use with these valves. For strictly local
ally, either by the use of the hand lever attached directly to manual actuation, lever release Part No. 45650, is available
the top of the valve or by means of a remote manual pull with a locking pin which must be disengaged prior to valve
box which will operate the hand lever remotely. The valves operating.
Selector Valve Brass 1/2 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
(1/2 in.) UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Selector Valve Brass 3/4 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
(3/4 in.) UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Selector Valve Brass 1 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
(1 in.) UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Selector Valve Brass 1 1/4 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
(1 1/4 in.) UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Selector Valve Brass 1 1/2 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
(1 1/2 in.) UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Selector Valve Ductile 3 in. Flange – 600 lb. U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
(2 in., 2 1/2 in., Iron American Standard UL (EX-2968)
3 in.) Raised Face FM Approved
Selector Valve Ductile 4 in. Flange – 600 lb. U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
(4 in.) Iron American Standard UL (EX-2968)
Raised Face FM Approved
Shipping Assembly
46194 2 in., 2 1/2 in., 3 in. selector valve
45650 Lever release (with handle and pin for local control)
45667 Lever release (no handle, no pin for remote control)
1-32
OPEN POSITION CLOSED POSITION
HAND LEVER
PART NO. 45650 OR
PART NO. 45667
LOCKING PIN
CHAIN
E
B
D
AIR VENT
PIPE
A
A
IF FLANGED
001429
A B C D E
Valve Size Body in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
1/2 in. Threaded 4 3/4 (12) 6 11/16 (16.9) 2 3/4 (6.9) 12 11/16 (32.2) 14 11/16 (37.3)
3/4 in. Threaded 4 3/4 (12) 6 11/16 (16.9) 2 3/4 (6.9) 12 11/16 (32.2) 14 11/16 (37.3)
1 in. Threaded 4 3/4 (12) 6 11/16 (16.9) 2 3/4 (6.9) 12 11/16 (32.2) 14 11/16 (37.3)
1 1/4 in. Threaded 5 3/4 (14.6) 6 15/16 (17.6) 3 1/8 (7.9) 13 11/16 (34.7) 15 1/16 (38.2)
1 1/2 in . Threaded 5 3/4 (14.6) 6 15/16 (17.6) 3 1/8 (7.9) 13 11/16 (34.7) 15 1/16 (38.2)
2 in. Flanged 13 (33) 5 3/4 (14.6) 6 1/8 (15.5) 19 5/8 (49.8) 21 1/4 (53.9)
2 1/2 in. Flanged 13 (33) 5 3/4 (14.6) 6 1/8 (15.5) 19 5/8 (49.8) 21 1/4 (53.9)
3 in. Flanged 13 (33) 5 3/4 (14.6) 6 1/8 (15.5) 19 5/8 (49.8) 21 1/4 (53.9)
4 in. Flanged 16 (40.6) 5 3/4 (14.6) 8 1/4 (20.9) 22 5/8 (57.4) 24 1/4 (61.5)
ANSUL 
Direction/Stop Valves
Description
Direction/stop valves are used to either manually control attached to the valve. Direction/stop valves can be used
the flow of carbon dioxide into a hazard area or to manu- as a safety feature, keeping the flow of carbon dioxide
ally control the flow into one of several hazards being pro- from entering a hazard area, either because of a false dis-
tected by a common bank of carbon dioxide cylinders. charge or to allow the occupants enough time to exit the
These valves are operated manually, either by the use of area prior to the valve being manually opened. The valves
a hand lever attached directly to the valve or by means are available in sizes ranging from 1/2 in. to 1 1/2 in. Each
of a remote manual pull box which will operate a sector size can be used with a hand lever or a sector.
Direction/Stop Forged 1/2 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Valve Brass UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Direction/Stop Forged 3/4 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
FM Approved
Direction/Stop Forged 1 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)

FM Approved
Direction/Stop Forged 1 1/4 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
FM Approved
Direction/Stop Forged 1 1/2 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
FM Approved
Shipping Assembly
41451 1/2 in. direction/stop valve (valve only)
41102 3/4 in. direction/stop valve (valve only)
41354 1 in. direction/stop valve (valve only)
41338 1 1/4 in. direction/stop valve (valve only)
41424 1 1/2 in. direction/stop valve (valve only)
40248 Handle – normally open (for use with 1/2 in. valve)
40267 Handle – normally open (for use with 3/4 in. and 1 in. valves)
46393 Handle – normally open (for use with 1 1/4 in. and 1 1/2 in. valves)
40238 Handle – normally closed (for use with 1/2 in. valve)
40239 Handle – normally closed (for use with 3/4 in. and 1 in. valves)
40259 Handle – normally closed (for use with 1 1/4 in. and 1 1/2 in. valves)
40276 Sector (for use with 1/2 in. valve)
40279 Sector (for use with 3/4 in. and 1 in. valves)
40281 Sector (For use with 1 1/4 in. and 1 1/2 in. valves)
1-33
C
PIPE
HANDLE IN
B
HANDLE NORMALLY
IN OPEN CLOSED E
POSITION POSITION
*THIS DIMENSION WITH

A VALVE IN OPEN POSITION
001427a 001427b
A B C D E
Valve Size in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
1/2 in. 10 (25.4) 9 3/8 (23.8) 4 3/4 (12) 7/8 (2.2) 2 15/16 (7.4)
3/4 in. 14 (35.5) 12 3/4 (32.3) 5 5/8 (14.2) 1 1/8 (2.8) 3 5/8 (9.2)
1 in. 14 (35.5) 12 3/4 (32.3) 6 3/8 (16.1) 1 7/16 (3.6) 4 1/8 (10.4)
1 1/4 in. 17 (43.1) 15 5/8 (39.6) 7 7/8 (20) 1 11/16 (4.2) 5 (12.7)
1 1/2 in. 17 (43.1) 15 5/8 (39.6) 8 1/4 (20.9) 1 7/8 (4.7) 5 1/2 (13.9)
4 3/4 IN.
(12 cm) 1/2 IN. STAINLESS STEEL OR
A
MONEL CABLE TO PULL BOX
3/4 IN. FLARED
END FITTING
CABLE TO HAVE A SLIGHT
SLACK WHEN VALVE IS IN ATTACH
CLOSED POSITION CABLE IN
B C “FIGURE 8
(LOOP)”
3 3/8 IN. BEFORE
CABLE
(8.5 cm) FASTENING
CLAMP
CLAMP
IN. D
7 11/16 )
m
(19.5 c
6 13/16 IN.
(17.3 cm)
30°
PROVIDE A STOP FOR

SECTOR AT THIS POINT
000674a 000674b
A B C D
Valve Size in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
1/2 in. 4 3/4 (12) 3 (7.6) 7/8 (2.2) 2 15/16 (7.4)
3/4 in. 5 5/8 (14.2) 3 5/8 (9.3) 1 1/8 (2.8) 3 5/8 (9.2)
1 in. 6 5/16 (16) 4 1/8 (10.4) 1 7/16 (3.6) 4 1/8 (10.4)
1 1/4 in. 8 1/8 (20.6) 5 1/4 (13.3) 1 11/16 (4.2) 5 (12.7)
1 1/2 in. 8 1/4 (20.9) 5 3/8 (13.6) 1 7/8 (4.7) 5 1/2 (13.9)
ANSUL 
Lock Handle Stop Valve
The lock handle stop valve is a manually operated valve in the closed position. Each valve is equipped with a
located in various locations of the piping system. The monitoring switch to provide constant supervision of the
valve is used to inhibit the discharge of CO2 into an entire valve at the control panel with contacts for the open and
system or specific area of a system. The valve is closed positions. Install warning sign, Part No. 428974, in
equipped with a slide locking device to padlock the valve easily visible location near valve.
B E D
000649
FLOW
Dimensions
A B C D E Weight
Size Part No. in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) lbs. (kg)
1/2” 428153 2.36 (60) 7.07 (179) 6.56 (167) 4.19 (106) 2.3 (58) 6 (2.7)
3/4” 428154 2.80 (71) 7.25 (184) 6.56 (167) 5.75 (146) 2.3 (58) 7 (3.2)
1” 428155 3.23 (82) 7.41 (188) 6.56 (167) 5.75 (146) 2.3 (58) 7 (3.2)
1 1/4” 428156 3.62 (92) 7.55 (192) 6.56 (167) 7.63 (194) 2.3 (58) 8 (3.6)
1 1/2” 428157 4.06 (103) 7.75 (197) 6.56 (167) 7.63 (194) 2.3 (58) 9 (4.1)
2” 428158 4.65 (118) 8.02 (204) 6.56 (167) 7.63 (194) 2.3 (58) 11 (5.0)
Depth: 6” (152 mm)
1-33.1
SWITCH 2 – OFF NORMAL INDICATES RED
SWITCH 1 – OFF NORMAL INDICATES VALVE FULLY CLOSED
N.C. N.C.
VALVE NOT FULLY OPENED
N.O.
C.
C.
N.O.
WHITE
BLACK
SYSTEM (THIS CIRCUIT REQUIRED BY CODE) RED

CONTROL
PANEL SUPERVISORY
RESISTOR
BLACK
(THIS CIRCUIT NOT REQUIRED BY CODE, BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY CUSTOMER) WHITE
004894
SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2
WHITE RED
RED BLACK
BLACK WHITE
BLACK RED BLACK WHITE
TERMINAL BLOCK
FACTORY WIRING
FIELD WIRING
SUPERVISORY SUPERVISORY
RESISTOR RESISTOR
SUPERVISORY
CIRCUIT {
CONNECTS TO
SYSTEM
CONTROL PANEL
004895
CARBON DIOXIDE SYSTEM

LOCK-OUT VALVE
VALVE MUST BE CLOSED AND LOCKED PRIOR TO ENTRY OF
PROTECTED SPACE
NOTIFY PROPER PERSONNEL PRIOR TO CLOSING VALVE
(TROUBLE ALARM WILL SOUND)
ALTERNATE FIRE PROTECTION MUST BE PROVIDED WHILE THIS VALVE
IS CLOSED
VALVE MUST BE RESET AFTER EXIT FROM PROTECTED SPACE TO
RETURN PROTECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS TO STAND-BY STATUS
WARNING
CARBON DIOXIDE DOES NOT SUPPORT LIFE. FAILURE
TO LOCK-OUT THE CARBON DIOXIDE SYSTEM BY
CLOSING AND LOCKING THIS VALVE BEFORE ENTRY
INTO THE PROTECTED SPACE MAY CAUSE INJURY OR
DEATH IF THE SYSTEM ACTUATES.
ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542 LABEL NO. 428974
ANSUL 
Manual Pull Box
Description
The pull box on a carbon dioxide system is used to provide
mechanical release of the system or directional valve from Component Material Approvals
a manually operated remote station. Two types of pull
boxes are available. The latched door type has a solid cast Latch door pull box Brass U.S. Coast Guard
brass door which must be opened to reach the pull handle. (162.038/7/0)
The second type has a break glass window and a spring UL (EX-2968)
mounted handle which rotates forward for use when the FM Approved
glass is broken. A 3/8 in. female NPT opening is provided Break glass window Brass U.S. Coast Guard
at the back of each enclosure for connection of the cable pull box (162.038/7/0)
housing. Both types are painted red. UL (EX-2968)
A pulley elbow may be attached directly to the back of the FM Approved
pull box, if necessary, to provide immediate changes in pull
cable direction. With this option, the pull box can be extend-
ed an additional 3 1/2 in. from the mounting surface by Shipping Assembly
using support legs attached to the back of the pull box (one Part No. Description
set for latched door type, two sets for break-glass type).
45062 Latch door type pull box
41527 Break-glass window pull box
41542 Support legs
Manual Pull Box Latched Door Type
LEAD AND KNOB TO

WIRE SEAL – OPEN PULL
BROKEN BOX DOOR
SIMULTANEOUSLY
4 3/16 IN.
WHEN KNOB IS
(10.6 cm)
PULLED
HINGED
MOISTURE-PROOF DOOR (CAST
JOINT BRONZE –
3/4 IN. NPT PAINTED RED)
PULL
HANDLE
STAINLESS (BRASS)
STEEL PULL
CABLE FOR FIRE 4 1/8 IN.
(10.4 cm)
3/8 IN. PIPE OPEN DOOR
FOR ENCLOSING
PULL CABLE PULL HANDLE HARD
1 7/16 IN.
(3.7 cm)
BODY (CAST 1 15/16 IN.

BRONZE – (4.9 cm)
PAINTED RED)
000684a 000684b
1-34
Manual Pull Box Break Glass Type “A”
PROTECTED HAZARD
ENGRAVED IN
4 7/16 IN. NAMEPLATE (SPECIFY)
2 13/16 IN. (11.2 cm)
(7.1 cm) 4 – 3/16 IN.
MOUNTING
3 1/4 IN. HOLES
(8.2 cm)
SPRING FORCES MOISTURE

HANDLE OUT INTO PROOF JOINT
OPERATING
POSITION WHEN
GLASS IS BROKEN PULL
HANDLE
3/8 IN. PIPE TO
ENCLOSE PULL CABLE 4 7/8 IN.
(12.3 cm)
GLASS FRONT
3 IN.
(7.6 cm)
IN CASE OF FIRE
BREAK GLASS AND
CAST BRASS PULL HANDLE HARD
3/8 IN. STAINLESS HINGED COVER
STEEL PULL CABLE UNTIL RED PAINT
(PAINTED RED) MARK ON CABLE
SHOWS
STOWAGE SPACE
FOR SPARE DISC
AND WASHERS
CAST BRASS BODY BRASS HAMMER

(PAINTED RED) AND CHAIN
SECURED
TO BOX
000676a 000676b
ANSUL 
Corner Pulley
Description
The corner pulley is required on a carbon dioxide system type is made of forged brass and is threaded for 3/8 in.
whenever a mechanical release pull cable run involves a NPT pipe. Two styles of forged brass corner pulleys are
change in direction. Corner pulleys are installed as part of available: one with a brass wheel and one with a nylon
the cable housing (pipe or conduit) and provide 90° direc- wheel. Both styles of brass pulleys are watertight. The
tion changes with minimal force loss and no induced kink- brass wheel corner pulley is designed for location inside or
ing. outside the protected space. The nylon wheel corner pulley
is designed for location only outside the hazard space.
Two types of corner pulleys are available. One is made of
Thread adaptors are available to simplify the installation.
die cast aluminum, has a ball bearing roller, and uses com-
pression fittings for 1/2 in. EMT connections. The second
Corner Pulley Body: 1/2 in. EMT U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Aluminum UL (EX-2968)
Roller: FM Approved
Stainless
Steel
Corner Pulley Body: 3/8 in. NPT U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Brass UL (EX-2968)
Wheel: FM Approved
Brass
Corner Pulley Body: 3/8 in. NPT U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Brass UL (EX-2968)
Wheel: FM Approved
Nylon
Shipping Assembly
45771 Aluminum corner pulley

42678 Brass corner pulley (nylon wheel)
45515 Brass corner pulley (brass wheel)
40696 Thread adaptor – Right/left hand (brass pulley only)
40696 Thread adaptor – Right/left hand (brass pulley only)
1-35
Forged Brass Watertight Corner Pulley, Sheave Corner Pulley For 1/2” EMT Aluminum,
Type, Part No. 42678 and 45515 Part No. 45771
SELF TAPPING SCREW
2 11/16 IN. 1 5/32 IN.
(2.9 cm) COVER
(1.7 cm) 1 1/8 IN.
3/8 IN. NPT (2.8 cm)
BALL BEARING SHEAVE
3/8 IN. PIPE

BODY
REMOVABLE 2 7/8 IN.
4 3/16 IN. GLAND
FACE FOR (7.3 cm)
RUNNING CABLE (10.6 cm)
LEAD-CLAD
COPPER
GASKET A A
2 7/8 IN.
(7.3 cm)
RIGHT AND LEFT HAND ADAPTOR
SUPPLIED WHEN REQUIRED
000690a 000690b 001815b 001815a 001815c
ANSUL 
Check Valves
Description
Check valves are used in main/reserve systems and on cylinders required for protecting a larger hazard. Only the
systems protecting multiple hazards of different volumes cylinders needed for the particular hazard are activated.
using selector valves to control the direction of agent flow. The check valves are available in sizes from 1/2 in. through
On main/reserve systems the check valve prevents pres- 3 in. Three body styles are available: threaded, weld neck
surization of the reserve system manifold by blocking the flange, and threaded flange. The weld neck flange style
flow of carbon dioxide from the main system. The check valves are supplied with two (2) 600 lb. weld neck, flat
valve allows gas flow from the reserve (if actuated) to pass faced, forged steel flanges, complete with bolts, nuts and
through into the distribution piping. On selector valve sys- gaskets.
tems, the check valve prevents the cylinders from the
selected hazard from pressurizing the manifold of the
Component Material Thread Size/Type Body Type Approvals
Check Valve Bronze 1/2 in. NPT Female Threaded U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Check Valve Bronze 3/4 in. NPT Female Threaded U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Check Valve Bronze 1 in. NPT Female Threaded U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Check Valve Bronze 1 1/4 in. NPT Female Threaded U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Check Valve Bronze 2 in. NPT Female Threaded U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
1-36
Component Material Thread Size/Type Body Type Approvals
Check Valve Body: N/A 2 in. Weld U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Bronze Neck Flange UL (EX-2968)
Flange: FM Approved
Steel
Check Valve Body: N/A 2 1/2 in. U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Bronze Weld Neck UL (EX-2968)
Flange: Flange FM Approved
Steel
Check Valve Body: N/A 3 in. Weld U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Bronze Neck Flange UL (EX-2968)
Flange: FM Approved
Steel
Check Valve Body: 3 in. NPT Threaded U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Bronze Flange UL (EX-2968)
Flange: FM Approved
Steel
Shipping Assembly
40860 1/2 in. check valve – threaded

40852 3/4 in. check valve – threaded
41470 1 in. check valve – threaded
41549 1 1/4 in. check valve – threaded
40649 2 in. check valve – threaded
40794 2 in. check valve – weld neck flange
46095 2 1/2 in. check valve – weld neck flange
40672 3 in. check valve – weld neck flange
40665 3 in. check valve – threaded flange
Check Valve - Threaded

Dimension A Dimension B
Valve Size in. (cm) in. (cm)
A
1/2 in. 3 (7.6) 2 5/8 (6.6)
3/4 in. 3 5/8 (9.2) 3 1/8 (7.9)
1 in. 4 1/8 (10.4) 3 3/4 (9.5)
1 1/4 in. 5 (12.7) 4 1/2 (11.4)
BONNET 1 1/2 in. 5 1/2 (13.9) 5 1/8 (13)
SPRING
2 in. 6 1/2 (16.5) 5 3/4 (14.6)
B
CHECK
2 1/2 in. 8 (20.3) 6 3/4 (17.1)
BODY
000679a
Check Valve - Flanged
Dimension A Dimension B
Valve Size in. (cm) in. (cm)
A
2 in. 10 1/4 (26) 7 1/2 (19)
2 1/2 in. 10 3/4 (27.3) 8 11/16 (22.1)
3 in. 11 1/2 (29.2) 9 1/2 (24.1)
000683
Check Valve - Threaded Flange

B
Valve Dimension A Dimension B Dimension C
A Size in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
SPRING
BONNET
3 in. 11 1/2 (29.2) 15 (38.1) 9 1/2 (24.1)
CHECK
BODY
001817
ANSUL 
Cable with Swaged End Fitting
Description
The 1/16 in. diameter cable is used to attach remote man-
ual pull boxes to cylinder valves, pull equalizers, control
boxes and selector valves. The cable is constructed of Cable Assembly Cable: U.S. Coast Guard
stranded, stainless steel wire. The cable is available in Stainless (162.038/7/0)
lengths of 50, 100, 150, and 200 ft. (15.2, 30.5, 45.7, and Steel UL (EX-2968)
60.9 m). The cable assemblies include a brass swaged Swaged FM Approved
end fitting for attaching to the remote pull box. Fitting:
Brass
Shipping Assembly
42104 50 ft. (15.2 m) 1/16 in. (.16 cm) cable with swaged end fitting
HANDLE
SLOT IN COUPLING FOR INSTALLATION

OF CABLE END FITTING
CABLE END
(BRASS)
COUPLING
STAINLESS STEEL CABLE WITH SWAGED CABLE END FOR
PULL BOX, CABLE END HAVING RED PAINT MARK
000689a 000689b
NOTE: The strength of the end fitting exceeds the breaking point of the cable.
1-37
ANSUL 
Dual/Triple Control Boxes
Description
The dual/triple control boxes allow manual actuation of a
cylinder valve or a sector valve from two or three remote Shipping Assembly
pull boxes. Two styles of control boxes are available. Part Part No. Description
No. 42784 is 13 3/4 in. (34.9 cm) and Part No. 43166 is 20
42784 Dual/triple control box (short)
3/4 in. (52.7 cm) long. Both styles can be used for cylinder
43166 Dual/triple control box (long)
valve actuation but only Part No. 43166 can be used for
sector valve operation. The sector valve operation requires
a longer cable travel which can only be accomplished by
the longer control box. The inlet and outlet connections are
threaded for 3/8 in. pipe. If 1/2 in. EMT conduit connections
are required, adaptor Part No. 45780 is available.
Control Box Steel 3/8 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
(short) UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Control Box Steel 3/8 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
(long) UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Part No. 42784
13 3/4 IN. (34.9 cm)

(OVERALL) Part No. 42784 Junction Box
12 1/4 IN.
(Shown Without Cover)
(31.1 cm) REMOVEABLE COVER
CABLE – PULL CABLE CLAMP
TO CYLINDER DIRECTION OF PULL
RELEASE 5/8 IN.
(1.5 cm)
1 7/8 IN.
(4.7 cm)
3/8 IN. PIPE OR

1/2 IN. E.M.T.*
CABLE PULL FROM 1/2 IN.
PULL-BOXES (1.2 cm) 11/16 IN.
4 – 9/32 IN. (.71 cm)
FLEXIBLE TRANSPARENT 1 IN. (1.7 cm)
MOUNTING HOLES
PROTECTION RING (2.5 cm)
2 3/4 IN. (6.9 cm)
3 1/4 IN.
(8.2 cm)
End View
000685a 000685b
* Adaptors furnished for use with 1/2 in. EMT – Part No. 45780
1-38
Part No. 43166
20 3/4 IN. (52.7 cm)

(OVERALL) Part No. 43166 Junction Box
19 1/4 IN.
(48.8 cm) REMOVEABLE COVER
CABLE – PULL CABLE CLAMP
TO CYLINDER DIRECTION OF PULL
RELEASE 5/8 IN.
(1.5 cm)
1 7/8 IN.
(4.7 cm)
3/8 IN. PIPE OR

1/2 IN. E.M.T.*
CABLE – PULL FROM 1/2 IN.
PULL-BOXES (1.2 cm) 11/16 IN.
4 – 9/32 IN. (.71 cm)
FLEXIBLE TRANSPARENT 1 IN. (1.7 cm)
MOUNTING HOLES
PROTECTION RING (2.5 cm)
2 3/4 IN. (6.9 cm)
3 1/4 IN.
(8.2 cm)
End View
000685a 000685b
* Adaptors furnished for use with 1/2 in. EMT – Part No. 45780
ANSUL 
Remote Cable Pull Equalizer
Description
The remote cable pull equalizer is used in systems where sectors. The inlet and outlet connections are threaded for
manual actuation of the cylinder valve and operation of a 3/8 in. pipe. If 1/2 in. EMT conduit connections are
selector valve must be accomplished at the same time. required, adaptor Part No. 45780 is available.
The pull equalizer is mounted in the remote pull station
cable line. By pulling the remote pull box, the cable Shipping Assembly
attached to the pull equalizer will pull the internal cable Part No. Description
clamp in the pull equalizer which in turn will pull the
cables attached to the cylinder valve and selector valve, 42791 Remote cable pull equalizer
causing them to operate. Two styles of pull equalizers are (short)
available. Part No. 42791 is 13 3/4 in. (34.9 cm) long and 43168 Remote cable pull equalizer
Part No. 43168 is 20 3/4 in. (52.7 cm). Only the longest (long)
equalizer, Part No. 43168, can be used for valves utilizing
Pull Equalizer Steel 3/8 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
(short) UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Pull Equalizer Steel 3/8 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
(long) UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Part No. 42791
13 3/4 IN. (34.9 cm)

(OVERALL)
12 1/4 IN.
(31.1 cm)
CABLE CLAMP
DIRECTION Part No. 42791 Equalizer Box
OF PULL
REMOVABLE COVER
CABLE FROM
3/8 IN. PIPE OR
CYLINDER AND 1 7/8 IN.
FLEXIBLE TRANSPARENT 1/2 IN. E.M.T.*
VALVE RELEASES (4.7 cm)
PROTECTION RING 11/16 IN.
CABLE TO (1.7 cm)
PULL BOX
4 – 9/32 IN. (.71 cm)
MOUNTING HOLES 1 IN.
(2.5 cm)
2 3/4 IN.
(6.9 cm)
3 1/4 IN.
(8.2 cm)
End View
000688a 000688b
* Adaptors furnished for use with 1/2 in. E.M.T. – Part No. 45780
1-39
Part No. 43168
20 3/4 IN. (52.7 cm)

(OVERALL) Part No. 43168 Equalizer Box
19 1/4 IN.
(48.8 cm)
CABLE CLAMP DIRECTION
OF PULL
REMOVABLE COVER
1 7/8 IN.
CABLE FROM 3/8 IN. PIPE OR (4.7 cm)
CYLINDER AND 1/2 IN. E.M.T.* 11/16 IN.
FLEXIBLE TRANSPARENT (1.7 cm)
VALVE RELEASES PROTECTION RING
CABLE TO 1 IN.
4 – 9/32 IN. (.71 cm) PULL BOX (2.5 cm)
MOUNTING HOLES
2 3/4 IN.
(6.9 cm)
3 1/4 IN.
(8.2 cm)
End View
001844a 001844b
* Adaptors furnished for use with 1/2 in. E.M.T. – Part No. 45780
ANSUL 
Quartzoid Bulb Actuator
Description
The Quartzoid Bulb Actuator (QBA-5) is a self-contained of 100 ft. (30.5 m) of 1/8 in. pipe. The QBA-5 is available
actuating device designed to be mounted directly in the temperature ratings of 135, 175, and 250 °F (57, 79, and
hazard area. 121 °C).
It actuates the system pilot cylinder valves by releasing The QBA-5 is a rugged, completely self-contained actuating
pressure when the hazard temperature reaches the fixed device, well suited for rough environments.
rating of the quartzoid bulb and causes it to break, releas- The QBA-5 is available with or without a mounting bracket.
ing the pressure in the actuator. The pressure is routed to
the carbon dioxide cylinders through a maximum

QBA-5 Cylinder: 1/4 in. NPT Male U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
(135 °F) (57 °C) Steel UL (EX-2968)
Valve: FM Approved
Brass
(175 °F) (79 °C) Steel UL (EX-2968)
Valve: FM Approved
Brass
(250° F) (121 °C) Steel UL (EX-2968)
Valve: FM Approved
Brass
Shipping Assembly
42267 QBA-5 – 135 °F (57 °C) with bracket

41893 QBA-5 – 135 °F (57 °C) without bracket
1-40
Component Dimensions
Length: 10 in. (25.4 cm)
Width: 2 7/8 in. (7.3 cm)
Height: 3 3/4 in. (9.5 cm)
1/4 – 18 NPT OUTLET
RELEASE
MECHANISM
1/4 IN. X 1/8 IN.
SAFETY RELIEF
REDUCER NOT SUPPLIED
BURSTING DISC
BRACKET
NAMEPLATE
TEMPERATURE
RATING
STAMPED
HERE
QUARTZOID BULB
NAMEPLATE
CARBON DIOXIDE
CYLINDER
001400
ANSUL 
Pneumatic Time Delay
Description
In some applications the system discharge must be further along the piping. A manual release is incorporated
delayed for a short time following actuation. This is usual- on the time delay valve to allow instant override of the
ly in areas where it is necessary to evacuate personnel time delay. After the discharge is completed, pressure in
prior to carbon dioxide discharge. The time delay uses the the time delay slowly returns to normal and the time delay
carbon dioxide pressure to power the factory set delay valve again closes. The length of time delay is factory set
mechanism. The time delay is installed in the discharge and is not adjustable. The time delay is available in delay
piping, either directly after the control (pilot) cylinder or settings of 10, 30 and 60 seconds.

Time Delay Valve: 3/4 in. NPT Female UL (EX-2968)
(10 second) Brass FM Approved
Accumulator:
Steel
Time Delay Valve: 3/4 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
(30 second) Brass UL (EX-2968)
Accumulator: FM Approved
Steel
Time Delay Valve: 3/4 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
(60 second) Brass UL (EX-2968)
Accumulator: FM Approved
Steel
Shipping Assembly
54170 10 second pneumatic time delay

3/4 IN. – 14 NPT BOTH SIDES
5 7/8 IN.
(14.9 cm)
5 1/2 IN. 23 3/8 IN.

(14 cm) (59.4 cm)
000699a 000699b
NOTICE: Delay time listed are at 70 °F (21 °C). Actual delay times may vary with ambient conditions and installation variations.
1-41
ANSUL 
AP-8 Valve Enclosed Release Attachment

with Flexible Connector
Description
Enclosed Release Attachment: The enclosed release
attachment is used for local/remote manual actuation of
the AP-8 cylinder valve. The enclosed release is used in Enclosed Release Brass U.S. Coast Guard
areas where sealed actuation cable is preferred, i.e., cor- Attachment Housing (162.038/7/0)
rosive environments, areas subject to tampering. UL (EX-2968)
The enclosed release consists of a locking pin and a local FM Approved
manual control.
Flexible Connector Brass U.S. Coast Guard
Flexible Connector: When using the enclosed release (162.038/7/0)
attachment, flexible connectors are required between the UL (EX-2968)
corner pulley and the first release and between the first FM Approved
release and the second release.
Two lengths of flexible connectors, for use between cylin-
ders, are available depending on cylinder size.
Shipping Assembly
42743 Enclosed release attachment (AP-8 cylinder valve only)
42788 12 in. (30.5 cm) flexible connector
45507 7 15/16 in. (20.2 cm) flexible connector
45500 6 3/16 (8.1 cm) flexible connector
Dual Cylinder Release – 3 or More Cylinders Single Cylinder Release – 1 or More Cylinders
LOCAL MANUAL
CONTROL
FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR ENCLOSED RELEASE
PART NO. 42788 ATTACHMENT
LOCKING
PIN
FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR

(50 – 75 LB., PART NO. 45500) PART NO. 42788
(100 LB., PART NO. 45507)
001825 001826
1-42
ANSUL 
Hose Reels
Description
The carbon dioxide hose reel can be used in areas that On small systems, 75 lbs. (34 kg) or less of carbon diox-
normally do not require fixed pipe systems, or as a back ide, discharge nozzle, Part No. 42842, should be used.
up to a fixed pipe system. When used as a back up, provi- On systes larger that 75 lbs. (34 kg), discharge nozzle,
sions must be made to have self-contained breathing Part No. 42303 (for 1/2 in. hose) or Part No. 42312 (for
apparatus available for anyone entering the hazard area 3/4 in. hose) should be used.
immediately after the fixed system discharge. Hose reels The complete hose reel is finished in red enamel.
are available with hose lengths ranging from 25 ft. to
100 ft. (7.6 m to 30.5 m).
Component Material Thread Approvals
Hose Reel Steel With 3/4 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Brass UL (EX-2968)
Fittings FM Approved
Shipping Assembly
41518 Hose reel with 25 ft. (7.6 m) of 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) hose
42842 Projector horn - 75 lb. (34 kg) systems and less
42303 Volume discharge horn for 1/2 in. hose - 75 lb. (34 kg) systems and larger
42312 Volume discharge horn for 3/4 in. hose - 75 lb. (34 kg) systems and larger
40237 Upper bracket (one required)
41807 Lower bracket (Use two per projector horn and one per volume discharge horn)
41924 Operating instructions - for systems less than 100 lbs. (45.4 kg)
41923 Operating instructions - for systems 100 lbs. (45.4 kg) or larger
42227 1/2 in. hose assembly - 25 ft. (7.6 m) (replacement)
1-43
Hose Reel – Sectional View
A
BRASS COUPLING WITH RIGHT BRASS ELBOW
AND LEFT HAND THREAD
(FURNISHED WITH 1/2 IN. HOSE ONLY) STEEL DRUM
STAMPED STEEL SIDE FLANGES
BRASS PIPE NIPPLE (EXTRA HEAVY) Hose Reel – Side View

BRASS THRUST BUSHING BRASS SHAFT
BRASS HUB BUSHING FOR BRACKET
ASBESTOS GRAPHITE PACKING BRASS WASHER
C
BRASS GLAND
THREE (3) STEEL ALLEN

HEAD CAP SCREWS
BRASS COTTER PIN
BRASS
BRASS HUB BUSHING FOR FLANGE ACORN NUTS
BRASS TEE STAMPED

STEEL
BRACKET
BROILER STEEL D
BACK PLATE
3/16 IN. THICK
STEEL TIE ROD
001832a 001832b
Hose Reel Dimensions

A B C D
Hose Capacity in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
Up to 75 ft. (22.9 m) of 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) hose 8 (20) 12 3/8 (31) 20 (51) 21 1/2 (55)
Up to 50 ft. (15.2 m) of 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) hose 8 (20) 12 3/8 (31) 20 (51) 21 1/2 (55)
75 to 100 ft. (22.8 to 30.4 m) of 1/2 in. (1.2 cm) hose 12 (31) 16 3/8 (42) 20 (51) 21 1/2 (55)
50 to 75 ft. (15.2 to 22.8 m) of 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) hose 12 (31) 16 3/8 (42) 20 (51) 21 1/2 (55)
75 to 100 ft. (22.8 to 30.4 m) of 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) hose 14 (36) 20 1/4 (51) 23 1/2 (60) 25 3/4 (65)
Discharge Horn – Part No. 42842 Volume Discharge Horn – Part No. 42303 for
1/2 in. Hose, Part No. 42312 for 3/4 in. Hose
WOOD GRIP
CONTROL VALVE DISCHARGE

ASSEMBLY HOSE
9 7/8 IN.
(25 cm)
SQUEEZE-GRIP
CONTROL VALVE
WITH SMALL
CONNECTING WOOD GRIP
PIPE W/WOOD 18 IN.
GRIP 13 IN.
(45.7 cm)
(33 cm) WOOD HANDLE
46 1/2 IN. (FOR CARRYING
(118.1 cm) AND DIRECTING
DISCHARGE)
40 5/8 IN.
DISCHARGE (103.1 cm) DISCHARGE
HORN ORIFICES (7)
(NON- 17 3/4 IN.
CONDUCTOR) 17 3/8 IN.
(44.1 cm) (45 cm)
VOLUME
DISCHARGE
HORN –
NON-CONDUCTING
7 1/2 IN. 4 1/4 IN. 8 3/4 IN.

(19 cm) (10.7 cm) (22.2 cm)
DIAMETER
001833a 001833b 001852c 001852b
Extra Heavy Flexible Hose – O.D. I.D.
Wire Reinforced High Pressure Type Flexible Hose in. (cm) in. (cm)
1/2 in. Hose 1 (2.5) 1/2 (1.3)
O.D.
3/4 in. Hose 1 1/4 (3.2) 3/4 (1.9)
NEOPRENE COVER –
WINTERIZED –40 °F
(–40 °C)
FRICTION JACKET
WIRE BRAID
FRICTION JACKET
WIRE BRAID
SYNTHETIC
RUBBER
INNER TUBE –
WINTERIZED –40 °F
(–40 °C)
I.D.
001843
ANSUL 
Pressure Trip
Description
The pressure trip is connected to the actuation or discharge NOTE: Operating pressure must be a minimum of 75 psi
line of a carbon dioxide system. By either pneumatic or (5.2 bar) with a maximum load of 70 lbs. (31.8 kg).
manual actuation, the pressure trip can release spring or
weight powered devices to close doors and windows, open
fuel dump valves, close fire dampers or close fuel supply
valves. The pressure trip is constructed of brass with two
1/4 in. NPT fittings for connection to discharge or actuation Shipping Assembly
lines. The link on the pressure switch is released either Part No. Description
pneumatically, by agent discharge pressure; or manually, by 5156 Pressure trip
use of the pull ring. The link then releases the device which
performs the auxiliary functions.
Pressure Trip Brass 1/4 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
3 3/4 IN.
(9.5 cm)
1/4 IN. NPT
3 IN.
(7.6 cm)
000705
1-44
ANSUL 
Header Safety
Description
The header safety is a device used to relieve high pressure
build-up in a closed section of piping. If actuation pressure
should get inadvertently trapped and should an increase in
temperature cause the pressure to rise to a dangerous
SAFETY DISC NUT
level, the burst disc in the header safety will rupture, allow- SAFETY DISC
ing the pressure to escape. The header safety is available

with 1/2 in. or 3/4 in. NPT threads.
Shipping Assembly
Part No. Description SAFETY DISC
WASHER
40094 1/2 in. header safety 1/2 IN. OR
3/4 IN. NPT
40076 3/4 in. header safety
78756 Replacement burst disc
000706b
Header Safety Brass 1/2 or 3/4 in. NPT Male U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
1-45
ANSUL 
Header Vent Plug
Description
The header vent plug is used to release low pressure build
up that may occur in closed system utilizing time delays or Shipping Assembly
selector valves. The header vent plug should also be Part No. Description
installed on the cylinder sides of the check valves on both 40309 Header vent plug
main and reserve systems to relieve any pressure that may
leak past the check valve and accidentally actuate the
reserve system while the main system is discharging.
Vent Plug Body: 1/2 IN. NPT Male U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Brass UL (EX-2968)
Spring: FM Approved
Bronze
Seal:
Neoprene
STEM
BODY SPRING
CHECK SEAL
CHECK
WASHER CUP
1/2 IN. NPT
7/8 IN. 29/32 IN.

(2.2 cm) (2.3 cm)
000707a 000707b
1-46
ANSUL 
Pressure Operated Siren
Description
The pressure operated siren is used to warn personnel of a Shipping Assembly
system discharge. The siren is operated with the carbon
dioxide pressure from the system. The siren will operate at
the start of the carbon dioxide discharge and will continue 43118 Pressure operated siren
through most of the discharge time. The minimum decibel
level at 10 ft. (3 m) is 90 dB with a flow rate of 11 lb./minute
(5 kg/minute.) The siren is constructed of brass and fin-
ished with red, corrosion resistant paint.
Siren Body: 1/4 IN. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Brass UL (EX-2968)
Monel
4 1/2 IN.
1/4 IN. CONNECTION (11.4 cm)
FROM CO2 PIPING
4 1/2 IN.
(11.4 cm)
1 7/8 IN.
(4.8 cm)
3 3/4 IN.
5 1/8 IN. 5/16 IN. DIAMETER (9.5 cm)
(13 cm) MOUNTING HOLES
3 PLACES
000713a 000713b
1-47
ANSUL 
Discharge Indicator
Description
The system discharge indicator is used to visually indicate, Shipping Assembly
at a remote location, when the carbon dioxide system has
discharged. Pressure from the system is tapped off and run
to the discharge indicator by 1/4 in. piping. When the sys- 40765 Discharge indicator
tem discharges, pressure operates a piston in the indicator
which pushes off a cover plate and exposes the wording
‘‘System Discharged.’’
Discharge Indicator Housing: 1/4 in. NPT Female U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
Bronze UL (EX-2968)
Piston: FM Approved
Stainless
Steel
1 7/8 IN.
(4.8 cm)
3 3/4 IN. (9.5 cm)

FOR MOUNTING HOLES
PISTON
2 3/4 IN. (7 cm)
DIAMETER OF BODY
SPRING CLIP
OUTER
NAMEPLATE
9/32 IN.
DIAMETER
INNER NAMEPLATE HOLES
(.71 cm)
1/2 IN. PIPE FROM
SYSTEM PIPING
OUTER NAMEPLATE
11/16 IN.
(1.7 cm)
000710a 000710b
1-48
ANSUL 
Odorizer
Description
The odorizer is used to inject a small amount of winter-
green scent into the carbon dioxide while flowing through
the piping network. When the carbon dioxide discharges
into the hazard area, it will carry a scent of wintergreen
with it. This wintergreen scent is a warning to personnel
entering the hazard area that the area contains a concen-
tration of carbon dioxide and precautions must be taken,
either leave the area immediately or secure proper
breathing apparatus. The internal ampoule containing the
oil of wintergreen in the odorizer must be replaced after
each system discharge.
Shipping Assembly
42278 Odorizer
42284 Replacement ampoule
000698
Odorizer Steel 1 in. NPT Male U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)

UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
1-49
ANSUL 
Pressure Switch – DPST
Description
The pressure switch is operated off the carbon dioxide Shipping Assembly
pressure when the system is discharged. The pressure Part No. Description
switch can be used to open or close electrical circuits to
either shut down equipment or turn on lights or alarms. 46250 Pressure switch – DPST
The double pole, single throw (DPST) pressure switch is
constructed with a gasketed, water tight housing. The
housing is constructed of malleable iron, painted red. A
1/4 in. NPT pressure inlet is used to connect the 1/4 in.
pipe from the carbon dioxide system.
Component Material Thread Size/Type Electric Rating Approvals
Pressure Switch Switch: Conduit Inlet: 3/4 in. NPT Female 2 HP – 240 VAC/ Coast Guard
DPST BAKELITE Pressure Inlet: 1/4 in. NPT 480 VAC (162.038/7/0)
Housing: Female 2 HP – 250 VDC, UL (EX-2968)
Malleable 30A 250V AC/DC FM Approved
Iron 5A 480V AC/DC
Piston:
Brass
3 5/8 IN.
(9.2 cm)
BRASS RESET 2 7/8 IN.
MALLEABLE IRON PLUNGER (7.3 cm)
FINISH – RED PAINT
TO ELECTRICAL MOISTURE
EQUIPMENT TO PROOF JOINT
BE CONTROLLED
GASKET NUT
“O” RING GASKET

NAMEPLATE
DOUBLE POLE –
HEAVY DUTY
TOGGLE SWITCH
WITH FULLY
ENCLOSED 4 9/16 IN.
BAKELITE BASE (11.5 cm)
BRASS PISTON
PISTON “O”
RING GASKET
TO POWER
3/4 IN.
ELECTRICAL
CONDUIT
OUTLETS
1/4 IN. UNION
1/4 IN. PIPE

FROM CYLINDERS
000716a 000716b

1-50
ANSUL 
Pressure Switch – 3PST
Description
either shut down equipment or turn on lights or alarms. 42344 Pressure switch – 3PST
The three pole, single throw (3PST) pressure switch is
Pressure Switch Switch: Conduit Inlet: 3/4 in. NPT Female 30A – 240 VAC Coast Guard
3PST BAKELITE Pressure Inlet: 1/4 in. NPT Female 20A – 600 VAC (162.038/7/0)
Housing: 3 HP – 120 VAC UL (EX-2968)
Malleable 7.5 HP – 240 VAC FM Approved
Iron 15 HP – 600 VAC
Piston: 3 PHASE AC
Brass
4 IN.
(10.1 cm) 3 3/4 IN.
3 1/16 IN. (9.5 cm)
RESET KNOB
“A” (7.7 cm) MOISTURE-PROOF GASKET
3/4 IN. NPT

SNAP LOCK-RING
“O” RING GASKET
PISTON ROD
SPRING
5 3/16 IN. HALF ROUND ARM
(13.1 cm)
3 7/8 IN. TOGGLE SWITCH WITH FULLY
(9.8 cm) ENCLOSED BAKELITE BASE
SPACER
HALF ROUND ARM BRASS
SWITCH
SPRING HOUSING
NAMEPLATE
PISTON ROD
PISTON “O” RING GASKET
PISTON
4 – 9/32 IN.
MOUNTING PISTON-SPOT NUT
HOLES SWIVEL NUT
UNION 3/4 IN.

HEX BUSHING BRASS PLUG
3/8 IN. X 1/4 IN.
“A” SECTION “A” – “A”
000715a 000715b
1-51
ANSUL 
Pressure Switch – SPDT
Description
either shut down equipment or turn on lights or alarms. 46251 Pressure switch – SPDT
The single pole, double throw (SPDT) pressure switch is
Pressure Switch Switch: Conduit Inlet: 3/4 in. NPT Female 10A - 125V Coast Guard
SPDT BAKELITE Pressure Inlet: 1/4 in. NPT Female 5A - 250 VAC (162.038/7/0)
Housing: UL (EX-2968)
Malleable FM Approved
Iron
Piston:
Brass
3 5/8 IN.
(9.2 cm)
2 7/8 IN.
(7.3 cm)
MALLEABLE
IRON FINISH –
RED PAINT
BRASS RESET PLUNGER
MOISTURE PROOF JOINT
GASKET NUT
‘‘O’’ RING GASKET
NAMEPLATE
TOGGLE SWITCH
WITH FULLY 4 9/16 IN.
ENCLOSED (11.5 cm)
BAKELITE BASE
BRASS PISTON
CONTACT PISTON ‘‘O’’

ARRANGEMENT RING GASKET
000717b
3/4 IN. ELECTRIC
CONDUIT OUTLETS
1/4 IN. UNION

1/4 IN. PIPE FROM
CYLINDERS
000717a
1-52
ANSUL 
Pressure Switch DPDT – Explosion-Proof
Description Shipping Assembly

The pressure switch is operated off the carbon dioxide Part No. Description
pressure when the system is discharged. The pressure
43241 Pressure switch – DPDT
switch can be used to open or close elctrical circuits to
either shut down equipment or turn on lights or alarms.
The double pole, double throw (DPDT) pressure switch is
constructed with an explosion-proof housing suitable for
hazardous environments. A 1/4 in. NPT pressure inlet is
used to connect the 1/4 in. pipe from the carbon dioxide
system.
Component Material Thread Size/Type Electrical Rating Approvals
Pressure Switch Housing: Conduit Inlet: 3/4 in. NPT Female 10A 125 VAC Coast Guard
DPDT Malleable Pressure Inlet: 1/4 in. NPT Female 5A 250 VAC (162.038/7/0)
Iron UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
1/4 IN. PIPE CONNECTION

TO CARBON DIOXIDE
SYSTEM
1/4 IN. UNION

3/4 IN. CONDUIT
OUTLET
3/8 IN. X 1/4 IN. BUSHING
6 1/2 IN.
(16.5 cm)
7 7/8 IN.
(20 cm)
5 13/16 IN.
(14.7 cm)
NAMEPLATE
5 1/8 IN.
(13 cm)
2 11/32 IN.
2 5/8 IN. MOUNTING
(6.6 cm) HOLES 3/4 IN.
5 5/8 IN.
(14.2 cm) CONDUIT
3 9/16 IN.
OUTLET
(9 cm)
001842a 001842b
NOTE: SUITABLE FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS, CLASS I, DIVISION I, GROUPS C, D AND CLASS II, DIVISION I, GROUPS E, F, G.

1-53
ANSUL 
Marine Actuation Station – Two Step
Description
The marine actuation station is used to release the sys- The marine actuation station comes equipped with 1/4 in.
tem pilot cylinders by means of compressed nitrogen gas. stainless steel compression fittings for attaching 1/4 in.
This is accomplished by pulling the operating handle O.D. stainless steel tubing. The enclosure is rainproof,
marked CYLINDER RELEASE which punctures the nitro- constructed of 16 ga. galvanized steel and is equipped
gen cartridge, allowing the gas to flow to a Local/Manual with a draw pull catch.
Override located on the pilot cylinders, and pulling the The actuation pressure is achieved by means of an
operating handle marked VALVE RELEASE which punc- LT-20-L nitrogen cartridge. The two step actuation station
tures the nitrogen cartridge, allowing the gas to flow to a is generally used to actuate systems which are protecting
pressure operated selector valve. occupied spaces.
Component Material Tubing Connection Approvals
Actuation Station Galvanized Steel 1/4 in. Compression Fitting U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Shipping Assembly
418731 Marine Actuation Station (Includes 1/4 in. ball valve, rainproof cabinet, two LT-20-L
nitrogen cartridges and cartridge receiver with lever operator)
7012 Replacement LT-20-L nitrogen cartridge
6 IN.
C (152 mm)
V
Y
INSTRUCTION A L
CHART L I
V N
E D
E
R R 12 IN.
E PULL CATCH (305 mm)
L R
E
L
NITROGEN
CARTRIDGE
COMPRESSION
FITTING FOR 1/4 IN.
OD S.S. TUBE 10 IN.
(254 mm)
000694
1-54
MAXIMUM LENGTH RUN (FEET)
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
.020
58
.025
.028
67
.030
WALL THICKNESS (INCHES)
94
.035
150
.040
.049
.045
.050
.055
.060 1/4 IN. STAINLESS

STEEL TUBE
.065
.065
.070
MAXIMUM LENGTH OF ACTUATION TUBING FROM REMOTE STATION TO CYLINDERS

001382
Note: Vent Plug, Part No. 1732, must be utilized in actuation line near system actuator.
ANSUL 
Marine Actuation Station – One Step
Description
The marine actuation station is used to release the system enclosure is rainproof, constructed of 16 ga. galvanized
pilot cylinders by means of compressed nitrogen gas. This steel and is equipped with a draw pull catch.
is accomplished by opening the 1/4 in. valve and pulling the The actuation pressure is achieved by means of an LT-20-L
handle which punctures the nitrogen cartridge, allowing the nitrogen cartridge. The one step actuation station is gener-
gas to flow to a remote pressure attachment located on the ally used to actuate systems which are protecting unoccu-
pilot cylinders. The marine actuation station comes pied spaces.
equipped with a 1/4 in. stainless steel compression fitting
for attaching 1/4 in. O.D. stainless steel tubing.The
Component Material Tubing Connection Approvals

Actuation Station Galvanized Steel 1/4 in. Compression Fitting U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0)
UL (EX-2968)
FM Approved
Shipping Assembly
67686 Marine Actuation Station (Includes rainproof cabinet, LT-20-L nitrogen cartridge and
cartridge receiver with lever operator)
7012 Replacement LT-20-L nitrogen cartridge
6 IN.
(15.2 cm)
INSTRUCTION
CHART
TO ACTUATE
FIRE SUPPRESSION PULL CATCH
SYSTEM, PULL
HANDLE
12 IN.
(30.5 cm)
COMPRESSION
FITTING FOR 1/4 IN.
NITROGEN
O.D. S.S. TUBE 10 IN.
CARTRIDGE
(25.4 cm)
000695a 000695b
1-55
MAXIMUM LENGTH RUN (FEET)
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
.020
58
.025
.028
67
.030
WALL THICKNESS (INCHES)
94
.035
.035
150
.040
.049
.045
.050
.055
.060 1/4 IN. STAINLESS

STEEL TUBE
.065
.065
.070
MAXIMUM LENGTH OF ACTUATION TUBING FROM REMOTE STATION TO CYLINDERS
001382
Note: Vent Plug, Part No. 1732, must be utilized in actuation line near system actuator.
ANSUL 
Carbon Dioxide System Applications
Electronic Data Processing –

Computer Room and Subfloor
Hazard Description Electronic data processing involves storage, recall and use of information
via electronic equipment. Electronic data processing equipment is found in
almost every industry today. The equipment is very sensitive and operates
within minute tolerances. Additionally, many computer installations are
designed with a subfloor area containing data and power cable bundles.
Because of the high dollar value of the equipment, the data managed by that
equipment and the productivity provided by electronic data processing; rapid
detection and efficient fire protection are imperative. Time lost to cleanup
and ventilation of a computer room means lost time throughout the company;
so these areas require a clean, no residue gas agent that disperses easily.
The computer room and subfloor space can be protected with a carbon
dioxide suppression system, especially when the computer room is normally
unoccupied.
Sources of Ignition and Fires can occur as deep seated fires within the computer electrical insulation
Types of Fires and in the cable bundles in the subfloor. Paper debris that has been allowed
to accumulate in the subfloor is also a source for ignition.
Recommended Protection Computer room/subfloor protection can be accomplished by installation of a

total flood carbon dioxide system. The CO2 system is designed in accor-
dance with National Fire Protection Association Standard 12, 1989 Edition,
which states that a 30% concentration must be achieved within two minutes
and a design concentration of 50% must be reached within seven minutes.
Design concentration must be maintained for a period of not less that twenty
minutes.
Notice: Factory Mutual (FM) requires a 65% design concentration if the sub-
floor is constructed of combustible material, or has contents other
than cable. FM also requires the design concentration of 65% then
be held for a minimum of thirty minutes.
The figure below show the piping and nozzle arrangement for a CO2 system
protecting a typical computer room/subfloor space.
000937
The CO2 system consists of a cylinder bank, a piping arrangement and a set
of discharge nozzles located in the room and subfloor space.
Occasionally, drainage is installed in the subfloor area. Provisions must be
made for making the drain piping a closed system unless water is present to
assist in assuring the necessary concentration.
2-1
Protection Considerations When the computer room is normally occupied, personnel safety is of first
concern. Alarms or warning devices must be located in the room to provide
sufficient annunciation of CO2 discharge. In addition, a time delay device
should be incorporated in the CO2 system to allow sufficient time for per-
sonnel to evacuate the room prior to CO2 discharge. The room and subfloor
must be tight to prevent loss of CO2.
All air handling equipment must be shut down and dampered prior to system
discharge. Do not use the air handling system as a means of evacuating the
CO2 after discharge.
Smoke detectors are usually employed for early warning of fire to allow
manual release of the CO2 system.
Thermal detectors are used as a backup automatic system.
The authority having jurisdiction may have additional requirements.
ANSUL 
Electronic Data Processing – Subfloor
Hazard Description Electronic data processing involves storage, recall and use of information
via electronic equipment. Electronic data processing equipment is found in
almost every industry today. The equipment is very sensitve and operates
within minute tolerances. Additionally, many computer installations are
designed with a subfloor area containing data and power cable bundles.
Because of the high dollar value of the equipment, the data managed by that
equipment and the productivity provided by electronic data processing, rapid
detection and efficient fire protection are imperative. Time lost to cleanup
and ventilation of a computer room means lost time throughout the company;
so these areas require a clean, no residue gas agent that disperses easily.
Common practice is to protect the computer room with a Halon 1301 sup-
pression system and a carbon dioxide total flood system for protection of the
cable bundles in the subfloor space.
The following information pertains only to protection of subfloor space with a
fixed CO2 fire suppression system.
Sources of Ignition and Subfloor fires can occur as deep-seated fires in electrical insulation, in com-
Types of Fires bustible debris accumulated due to poor maintenance, or in the construction
material of the subfloor itself.
Recommended Protection Protection of data processing subfloor spaces can be accomplished with a
total flood system. The CO2 system is designed in accordance with National
Fire Protection Association Standard No. 12, 1989 Edition.
The figure below shows the piping and nozzle arrangement of a CO2 fire
suppression system protecting a typical data processing subfloor area.
000938
The CO2 system consists of a cylinder bank and a piping arrangement with a
set of low velocity nozzles.
Some CO2 loss will occur through cable openings into equipment and
through perforated tile. Make a complete evaluation of possible leakage
sources and add CO2 to compensate. If leakage is excessive, an extended
discharge system must be considered.
2-2
Recommended Protection Subfloor airspaces are often used as a plenum for the air handling system. If
(Continued) the space is used as a plenum, the air handling system MUST be shut down,
tightly dampered and the air handling equipment at full rest BEFORE CO2
system discharge or the CO2 will be rapidly exhausted.
A 50% design concentration is required for dry electrical fires by
NFPA 12. A 30% concentration must be achieved within two minutes and
design concentration must be reached within seven minutes. Design con-
centration must be maintained for a minimum of twenty minutes. Factory
Mutual (FM) requires a 65% design concentration if the subfloor is con-
structed of combustible material or has contents other than cable. FM also
requires the design concentration to be held for a minimum of
30 minutes.
Occasionally, drainage is installed in a subfloor area. Provisions must be
made for making the drain piping a closed system unless water is present.
This will assist in assuring the necessary CO2 concentrations.
Protection Considerations CO2, being heavier than air, will settle into low-lying areas possibly creating
a hazard to personnel. Do not use the air handling system as a means of
evacuating CO2 after discharge.
Often, the data processing equipment cannot be shut down. Since most of
this equipment has cooling fans, some CO2 will be drawn from the protected
space. Because of this agent loss, a higher CO2 initial concentration or a
greater volume of release may be required.
Smoke detectors are usually employed for early warning of fire to allow
manual release of the CO2 system with thermal detectors used as a backup
to allow automatic system release.
ANSUL 
Recirculating Turbine Generators
Hazard Description Found both in heavy industry and power companies, turbine generators are
usually enclosed recirculating devices. Steam is passed over the turbine
blades, spinning the turbine which is attached to a generating device.
Sources of Ignition and If an electrical fault occurs in the generator, a deep-seated electrical insula-
Types of Fires tion fire can result. In addition, the generator bearings can overheat, igniting
their lubricants.
Recommended Protection Protection of enclosed recirculating generators can be accomplished with a

total flood system. The design of this system should be in accordance with
National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 12, 1989 Edition, which
addresses the fire protection of rotating electrical equipment.
The figure below shows the piping and nozzle arrangement of a carbon
dioxide fire suppression system protecting a typical enclosed recirculating
generator.
000939
The CO2 system consists of two cylinder banks and two separate piping
arrangements. One bank of cylinders is piped to a set of nozzles which give a
high initial rate of discharge upon receiving a signal from the detectors.
(Note: The detectors must be located in the hot air stream ahead of all
coolers.) This discharge rate shall be sufficient to achieve 30% concentra-
tion of CO2 within two minutes and design concentration within seven min-
utes. (Note: Factory Mutual (FM) requires an even higher discharge rate,
sufficient to reach 30% concentration in one minute.)
The second bank of cylinders is designed to discharge simultaneously at a
much slower rate through a separate network of pipe and nozzles. This net-
work provides an extended discharge of CO2 for the generator deceleration
period in order to compensate for leakage and maintain an inert atmosphere
within the enclosure. A minimum concentration of 30% must be maintained
for at least twenty minutes.
Multiple generators can be protected by the use of selector valves on
common banks of CO2 cylinders. Reserve banks of cylinders are generally
required as a common back-up.
2-3
Protection Considerations Personnel safety is of first concern. Alarms or warning devices must be
located in and/or around the hazard area to provide sufficient annuncia-
tion of CO2 discharge. A pre-discharge alarm or time delay device may
be required to allow personnel time to leave the area.
Provisions must be made for venting the CO2 and determining the safety
of the atmosphere prior to reoccupation of the hazard area after dis-
charge.
Normal leakage from the enclosure should relieve any CO2 pressure
build-up. However, in the case of air-tight enclosures, pressure relief
venting may be required.
Location of nozzles must be in the cold air stream leading to the gener-
ator. Incoming air will carry the CO2 to the hazard.
Automatic discharge of the CO2 system might be achieved by a tie-in
with the customer’s differential relays which could act as additional
detection/actuation sources.
ANSUL 
Non-Recirculating Turbine Generators
Hazard Description Found both in heavy industry and power companies, turbine generators are
sometime dampered, non-recirculating type devices. Steam is passed over
the turbine blades, spinning the turbine which is attached to a generating
device.
Sources of Ignition and If an electrical fault occurs in the generator, a deep-seated electrical insula-
Types of Fires tion fire can result. In addition, the generator bearings can overheat, igniting
their lubricants.
Recommended Protection Protection of dampered non-recirculating generators can be accomplished

with a total flood system. The design of this system should be in accordance
with National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 12, 1989 Edition,
which addresses the fire protection of rotating electrical equipment.
dioxide fire suppression system protecting a typical dampered non-recircu-
lating generator.
000939
The CO2 system consists of two cylinder banks and two separate piping
arrangements. One bank of cylinders is piped to a set of nozzles which give a
high initial rate of discharge upon receiving a signal from the detectors.
(Note: The detectors must be located in the hot air stream ahead of all
coolers.) This discharge rate shall be sufficient to achieve 30% concentra-
tion of CO2 within two minutes and design concentration within seven min-
utes. (Note: Factory Mutual (FM) requires an even higher discharge rate,
sufficient to reach 30% concentration in one minute.)
The second bank of cylinders is designed to discharge simultaneously at a
much slower rate through a separate network of pipe and nozzles. This net-
work provides an extended discharge of CO2 for the generator deceleration
period in order to compensate for leakage and maintain an inert atmosphere
within the enclosure. 35% additional CO2 must be added after the minimum
design concentration of 30% has been calculated. This minimum design
concentration must be maintained for at least twenty minutes.
Multiple generators can be protected by the use of selector valves on
common banks of CO2 cylinders. Reserve banks of cylinders are generally
required as a common back-up.
2-4
Protection Considerations Personnel safety is the first concern. Alarms or warning devices must be
located in and/or around the hazard area to provide sufficient annunciation
of CO2 discharge. A pre-discharge alarm or time delay device may be
required to allow personnel time to leave the area.
Provisions must be made for venting the CO2 and determining the safety of
the atmosphere prior to reoccupation of the hazard area after discharge.
Normal leakage from the enclosure should relieve any CO2 pressure build-
up. However, in the case of air-tight enclosures, pressure relief venting may
be required.
Location of nozzles must be in the cold air stream leading to the generator.
Incoming air will carry the CO2 to the hazard.
Thermal detection is normally provided for automatic system release.
Automatic discharge of the CO2 system might also be achieved by a tie-in
with the customer’s differential relays which could act an as additional detec-
tion/actuation source.
ANSUL 
Control Rooms
Hazard Description Control rooms are found in all types of industry, housing transformers,
motors, switch gear and other types of electronic devices necessary for
energizing the various types of equipment.
Sources of Ignition and If an electrical fault occurs in wiring or an electric motor overheats, a deep-
Types of Fires seated electrical insulation fire can result.
Recommended Protection Protection of control rooms can be accomplished by treating it as a deep-

seated total flood hazard in accordance with requirements of National Fire
Protection Association Standard 12, 1989 Edition.
dioxide fire suppression system protecting a control room.
000941
The CO2 system would consist of a single cylinder bank along with a single
piping arrangement and discharge nozzles.
The design of the CO2 system should be in accordance with NFPA 12, 1989
Edition, which states that a 50% concentration of CO2 is required for dry
electrical hazards and that a 30% concentration shall be achieved within two
minutes. Design concentration must be achieved within seven minutes and
maintained for an additional twenty minutes.
Protection Considerations
Personnel safety is the first concern. The CO2 system must incorporate a
discharge alarm and/or pre-discharge alarm with a time delay depending on
personnel evacuation time.
Electrical power and ventilation must be shut down prior to system actuation.
Common A/C duct may require dampering to prevent CO2 loss.
Smoke detection is recommended.
2-5
ANSUL 
Record Storage Rooms
Hazard Description Typical document storage rooms contain records stored on shelves, in file
cabinets and cartons, and are usually quite tightly packed within the room.
Sources of Ignition and Room heaters, careless smoking, and overheating of ventilating fan could all
Types of Fires cause ignition of paper material.
Recommended Protection Protection of record storage rooms can be accomplished by treating the
hazard as deep-seated total flood type, designed in accordance with
National Fire Protection Association Standard 12, 1989 Edition.
The figure below illustrates the piping and nozzle arrangement of a carbon
dioxide suppression system protecting a record storage room.
000942
The CO2 system would consist of a bank of cylinders with a piping network
and nozzles.
The system design shall be in accordance with NFPA 12, 1989 Edition,
which states that a 65% concentration of CO2 is required for record storage
rooms, and that a 30% concentration shall be achieved within two minutes.
The 65% design concentration must be achieved within seven minutes and
maintained for an additional twenty minutes.
Protection Considerations Personnel safety is of primary concern. The CO2 system should incorporate
a discharge alarm and/or pre-discharge alarm with a time delay.
Electrical power and ventilation must be shut down. Common A/C ductwork
may require dampering to prevent CO2 loss.
2-6
ANSUL 
Battery Storage
Hazard Description Any industry requiring a large number of vehicles, such as the trucking
industry, would have a room or vault for storing and charging acid type bat-
teries. These rooms would have adequate ventilation so that large amounts
of hydrogen could not collect.
Sources of Ignition and If paper cardboard cartons, cleaning rags and the like are allowed to collect
Types of Fires in the battery room, these could be ignited by overheated equipment such as
ventilating fans or charging devices.
Recommended Protection Notice: The carbon dioxide system is not an explosion suppression system.
The CO2 will suppress fires in extraneous material within the room
and inert a possible explosive atmosphere.
The figure below illustrates a typical CO2 system protecting a battery
storage room.
000943
The CO2 system design must be in accordance with National Fire Protection
Association Standard 12, 1989 Edition, which states that a concentration of
75% CO2 is required for hazards where hydrogen is present.
The CO2 system would consist of a group of cylinders, a piping arrangement
and discharge nozzles. The design concentration shall be achieved within
one minute.
The CO2 system must be properly grounded to eliminate any possibility of a
spark in a potentially explosive atmosphere. Objects exposed to the CO2
discharge must also be grounded to dissipate possible electrostatic charges
(NFPA 77). Ventilation fans must be shut down prior to CO2 system dis-
charge. Pre-discharge alarm and a time delay may be required for personnel
safety.
Photoelectric smoke detection is recommended.
2-7
ANSUL 
Open Top Lube Oil Pits
Hazard Description Lube oil pits can be open with a depth up to four feet; open pits can also
exceed four feet in depth, but the depth must not exceed one quarter of its
width, and open pits can be partially covered with solid plate.
Sources of Ignition and Oil within the pit can be ignited by overheated pumps or equipment within the
Types of Fires pit.
Recommended Protection All open pits can be protected with a carbon dioxide suppression system in
accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard 12, 1989
Edition, which states that the CO2 discharge time shall be a minimum of 30
seconds.
The figure below shows the single bank of cylinders, piping and nozzle
arrangements for a CO2 system protecting an open lube oil pit.
000944
The figure below shows the piping and nozzle arrangement for a CO2
system protecting a partially covered lube oil pit. NFPA 12 states that if the
top of the pit is partially covered, so that the open area is less than 3% of the
cubic foot volume expressed in square feet, the CO2 requirement may be
determined on a total flooding basis. A 34% concentration would be required
within one minute.
000952
2-8
Protection Considerations Personnel safety must be considered during and after a CO2 system dis-
charge. A pre-alarm and time delay period should be considered to allow
personnel time to evacuate the space. Adequate ventilating of the pit must
be accomplished, and consideration given to low lying areas within the plant
where CO2 may tend to settle.
Thermal detection with automatic system release is recommended.
ANSUL 
Electrical Cabinets
Hazard Description Found in almost any large structure, including hospitals, heavy industry and
high rise buildings, electrical cabinets present a hazard particularly well
suited for carbon dioxide protection.
A typical electrical cabinet is the focal point of the electrical service for a
large building or plant. Virtually all of the incoming service enters at the cab-
inet and is dispersed, stepped up, stepped down or otherwise controlled at
that point. An electrical cabinet may contain fuses, switches, transformers
and other electrical equipment along with a large network of cable and
wiring.
Downtime for the electrical cabinet means downtime for the entire facility.
Dry powder or liquid agents can damage sensitive equipment, or require
meticulous clean-up causing additional delays in getting the facility back
‘‘on-line.’’ An air-dispersed gas, carbon dioxide eliminates these problems.
Sources of Ignition and Electrical fault is the most common source of ignition in the electrical cabinet.
Types of Fires Energized equipment overheats or shorts and ignites insulation causing a
‘‘deep seated’’ type fire.
Recommended Protection Protection of electrical cabinets can be accomplished with a total flood
system. By injecting a sufficient amount of CO2 to suppress the fire and
maintaining the CO2 laden atmosphere to allow a ‘‘soaking period,’’ even
deep-seated insulation fires can be suppressed.
The design of this system should be in accordance with National Fire
Protection Association Standard No. 12, 1989 Edition, which addresses the
fire protection of electrical equipment. NFPA 12 states that a 50% concentra-
tion of CO2 is required for dry electrical hazards and that a 30% concentra-
tion shall be achieved within two minutes. Design concentration must be
achieved within seven minutes and maintained for an additional twenty min-
utes.
Depending on the type of doors the cabinet has, the CO2 system could be
designed as either a normal total flood or extended discharge system.
Cabinets with loose fitting doors or louver openings will have considerable
CO2 leakage. Leakage from a weatherproof cabinet will be much slower.
In a reasonably ‘‘tight’’ cabinet, such as a weatherproof enclosure, the
extended discharge may not be necessary as the sealed enclosure allows
little leakage and the inert atmosphere will remain until the cabinet is opened
and ventilated.
2-9
Recommended Protection The figure below shows the piping and nozzle arrangement of a CO2 fire
(Continued) suppression system protecting a typical electrical cabinet of reasonable
tightness.
000945
The extended-discharge CO2 system consists of two cylinder banks and two
piping arrangements. Upon receiving a signal from the detectors, one bank
of cylinders which are piped to a set of nozzles give a high initial rate of dis-
charge, meeting the requirements for reaching design concentration within
seven minutes. The second bank of cylinders is piped to a set of smaller noz-
zles which provide an extended discharge period, maintaining the inert
atmosphere for the required twenty minutes.
Personnel safety is the first concern. Discharge alarms should be located in
the area of the electrical cabinet to warn nearby personnel of the CO2 dis-
charge. Due to the possibility of CO2 leaking from the cabinet and settling
into low lying surrounding areas, all personnel should leave the immediate
cabinet area until the space can be completely ventilated.
Normal leakage from the cabinet should relieve any CO2 pressure build-up.
However, in the case of an air-tight enclosure, pressure relief venting may be
required.
Electrical power and any ventilation must be shut down prior to discharge.
Also, many electrical cabinets have cooling fans to draw air into or out of the
enclosure. These must be shut down and an extended discharge system
should be considered to allow for the spin-down time and unclosable open-
ings.
Electrical cabinets may have completely open interiors or may be compart-
mentalized. If the construction of the cabinet is a series of compartments, at
least one CO2 nozzle and detector must be installed in each compartment.
In exceptionally large electrical cabinets, selector valves could be included
in the system which could direct the discharge to only the section involved.
ANSUL 
Transformers
Hazard Description Transformers are found in heavy industry and may sit in the open or in vaults.
Transformers located in the open, where it is impractical to flood the room,
are protected by locally applying carbon dioxide over the surfaces using the
rate by area method. Transformers within a vault are treated as a surface
type total flood hazard. There is a possibility that a heated transformer core
in either a transformer located in a vault or in the open could produce a ‘‘deep
seated’’ fire in the insulation.
Sources of Ignition and Leakage of oil could be ignited by an electrical fault or insulation within the
Types of Fires transformer could ignite due to an overheated core.
Recommended Protection Transformers within an enclosure or vault can be protected by total flooding
the enclosure with CO2 in accordance with National Fire Protection
Association Standard 12, 1989 Edition, which states that a 50% concentra-
tion is required for deep seated dry electrical fires and that a 30% concentra-
tion shall be achieved within two minutes. The 50% design concentration
must be achieved within seven minutes and held for an additional twenty
minute period.
The carbon dioxide system would consist of a bank of cylinders, a piping net-
work and discharge nozzles, as shown in the figure below.
000946
2-10
Recommended Protection Transformers in an open room are treated as a local application type hazard
(Continued) where CO2 is directly applied to the transformer surfaces.
The CO2 system would be designed in accordance with NFPA 12 which
states that the CO2 discharge shall be for a minimum of 30 seconds.
The figure below illustrates a typical transformer protected with CO2.
000947
The CO2 system would consist of a group of cylinders, a piping arrangement

and a set of discharge nozzles.
Any floor drain located under the transformer should be provided with a nor-
mally closed valve which only opens by oil pressure during an oil spill.
Electrical clearances should be maintained in accordance with NFPA 12.
The room or area must be ventilated after CO2 discharge with consideration
given to areas where CO2 might tend to settle.
ANSUL 
Wave Solder Machines
Hazard Description Employed in the manufacture of electronics and cans, the wave solder
machine presents a multi-faceted hazard to the fire protection professional.
The wave solder device consists of an enclosure housing flux tubs, pre-
heaters and solder pots; along with a motorized conveyor which transports
parts through the machine. Attached to this enclosure is a fume exhaust
system which must also be protected.
Sources of Ignition and The most common fire in a wave solder machine is a wetted surface fire,
Types of Fires which can quickly ignite the flux tubs, resulting in the addition of a liquid-in-
depth fire. Ignition occurs when an excess amount of flux on the parts is
ignited by the preheaters or molten solder.
Recommended Protection The wave solder machine enclosure can be treated as a total flood hazard if
the conveyor openings on either end of the wave solder machine are small.
Access doors along the sides of the machine, however, must always be in
the closed position if total flood is to be considered. In cases where access
doors are left open, or are opened on a regular basis, the hazard should be
protected on a local application basis.
Regardless of the machine enclosure situation, the exhaust system is con-
sidered a total flood hazard. The design of the protection systems should be
in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 12,
1989 Edition.
The figure below shows the piping and nozzle arrangement of a total flood
carbon dioxide fire suppression system protecting a typical wave solder
machine which normally operates with the access doors closed.
000948
The total flood system consists of a single cylinder bank and a single piping
arrangement. The piping is external to the enclosure to avoid interference
with the conveyor system and to allow easy maintenance inside the wave
solder machine. Nozzles are sealed flanged type which attach to the outside
of a bulkhead or duct and direct CO2 into the hazard through a small
opening.
The total flood system for the enclosure shall achieve a 34% CO2 concentra-
tion within one minute. The duct system shall achieve a 65% concentration
within one minute.
2-11
Recommended Protection The figure below shows a typical local application CO2 system for a wave
(Continued) solder machine which normally operates with the access doors open. The
piping network runs inside the enclosure with nozzles applying CO2 directly
to the flux tubs, preheaters and solder pots. CO2 discharge shall be a min-
imum of 30 seconds.
000949
In either the total flood or the local application systems, consideration must
be given to personnel safety. CO2 discharge should be coupled to an alarm
system to warn workers in the immediate area of system activation. While
the CO2 is being released in a confined space, CO2 escaping from the
enclosure and settling into low-lying areas could be a hazard to personnel.
All heating sources, pumps, conveyors and exhaust systems involved must
be shut down before CO2 system discharge. In addition, any exhaust ducts
must be dampered upon system discharge. Electrical or pneumatic provi-
sions should be made for these operations.
Thermal detection for automatic system release is recommended.
If the conveyor system carries parts to another room or other machines, fire
doors or shutters should be installed to prevent transmission of fire from
machine to machine or room to room via burning parts on a conveyor.
ANSUL 
Industrial Fryers
Hazard Description The food industry prepares many types of foods by frying in heated cooking
oil. Several types of food that lend themselves to deep fat frying are potato
chips, pizza, nutmeats, doughnuts, poultry and fish products. The heated oil
is often contained in a vat that is covered by a hood with an associated
exhaust system. A conveyor belt usually transports the product through the
heated oil where it exits the fryer onto a drain area.
Sources of Ignition and A fire condition exists when the thermostatic control used to maintain a pre-
Types of Fires determined cooking oil temperature fails. This allows the temperature of the
oil to rise above its auto-ignition point, causing ignition.
Recommended Protection Protection of a fryer can be accomplished with a combination total flood/local
application suppression system. The design of the system shall be in accor-
dance with National Fire Protection Association Standard 12, 1989 Edition,
which states that the fryer vat with its hood in the lowered position requires a
34% concentration which shall be achieved within one minute.
In addition, Ansul recommends the carbon dioxide discharge to continue for
a period of not less than three minutes due to the possibility of the oil
reflashing before the temperature drops below the auto-ignition point.
The exhaust duct is protected by the total flood method, achieving a 65%
concentration within one minute. The drainboard portion, including related
pumps, are treated as a local application type hazard, with the CO2 dis-
charge continuing for a minimum of 30 seconds. The figure below illustrates
a carbon dioxide suppression system protecting a typical potato chip fryer.
000950
The CO2 system consists of a bank of cylinders along with a piping network
feeding discharge nozzles installed in the fryer/hood enclosure, the exhaust
duct, and nozzles installed over the drain area and pumps.
All pumps, fuel supply, motorized conveyor and exhaust fans must be shut
down prior to CO2 system discharge. The exhaust duct must be dampered to
prevent loss of CO2.
2-12
Protection Considerations Personal safety must be provided using alarms or warning devices located in
and around the hazard area. Uncloseable openings must be held to a min-
imum.
the atmosphere prior to reoccupation of the hazard area after CO2 dis-
charge.
Thermal detection for automatic release is recommended.
ANSUL 
Dip Tanks
Hazard Description Many manufacturers use dip tanks for various processes in their plants.
Metal fabrication, electronics, automotive and railway operations may use
dip tanks in their daily work.
A dip tank may be a simple hand-held operation or may involve a complex
overhead monorail or hoist. Some tanks are enclosed by a hinged lid, some
are open. Most have a drain board or drip area which may or may not be
enclosed.
Sources of Ignition and Overheated circulating pumps, flammable liquids heated beyond flashpoint,
Types of Fires or sparks from machinery are all common sources of ignition for dip tanks.
Two types of fires can result: liquid in depth fires in the tank itself or wetted
surface fires on the dipped material and in the drain board/drip area.
Recommended Protection Protection of dip tanks and associated components can be accomplished by
a local application system. The design of this system should be in accor-
dance with National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 12, 1989
Edition. A typical dip tank carbon dioxide suppression system is shown in the
figure below.
000951
The carbon dioxide system consists of one cylinder bank and one piping
arrangement. Overhead protection is used in this instance. Local application
methods apply CO2 directly to the surface of the burning material, rather
than flooding an enclosure. The CO2 discharge time shall be a minimum of
30 seconds.
Essential to the success of the fire suppression system is the shutdown of all
pumps, motorized conveyors and ventilation fans. If the dip tank has an
exhaust duct, it must be dampered to allow sufficient CO2 concentration for
fire suppression.
In some situations, the dipped parts are carried through an oven for drying.
The authority having jurisdiction may require fire protection for the oven also.
The oven can be protected by a separate CO2 system or by the dip tank
system with a selector valve system.
2-13
Protection Considerations Personnel safety must be provided for with alarms or warning devices
located in and around the hazard area. A pre-discharge alarm or time delay
device may be required to allow personnel time to leave the hazard area.
the atmosphere prior to reoccupation of the hazard area after discharge, and
consideration given to low lying areas within the plant where CO2 may tend
to settle.
Thermal detection for automatic system release is recommended.
Protection of a dip tank requires applying CO2 to ALL wetted sections of the
hazard, including any conveyor system, drainboards and drip areas.
If cleaning tanks or flammable materials are stored in the vicinity of the dip
tank, they should also be protected.
If at all possible, enclose the hazard wherever production will permit.
OPEN FACE WET BENCH AND PROCESSING TOOL PROTECTION GUIDE
Page 1
Introduction
The information contained in this guide provide the guidelines for designing, installing and inspecting fixed high pressure CO2
fire suppression systems for the protection of wet benches and other processing tools used in the fabrication of semicon-
ductor devices. This guide contains specific design methods and guidelines that apply to surface and subsurface protection
of open face wet benches. General design information is also included for protection of other areas of the wet benches or pro-
cessing tools; however, for specific design methods of these areas, the designer should design in accordance with the latest
edition of the National Fire Protection Association Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems (NFPA 12), Ansul’s
Carbon Dioxide Systems Design Manual, the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), and customer specifi-
cation as applicable.
Acceptance of any system is subject to the review and requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
In open style tools, the application of these guidelines are limited to tools with air exhaust flow rates not exceeding 150
cfm/linear ft.
These guidelines apply to the fire suppression portion of the system only. To complete the system it is necessary to incor-
porate a fire detection and control system with the appropriate ancillary equipment and devices. Only listed equipment that
has been specifically evaluated for this application may be used. Factory Mutual has Approved for fire detection in either an
open face wet bench or process equipment, the Fire Sentry Corporations’ Model FS7-130-SX controller module, the S7-
2173-C flame detector using firmware version 3720-0006, and the FS7-2173 flame detector using firmware 3720-1001, also
Santa Barbara Dual Spectrums’ Model PM-5SX and PM-9SBE flame detectors. Use of the detection and control equipment
should be in accordance with the manufacturerís recommendations. Consult the Authority Having Jurisdiction for specific
detection and control requirements for the particular application. Note: An FMRC Approved Ansul control panel must be inter-
faced with the wet bench fire detection system to be used as a releasing device control unit for the fire suppression system.
Wet bench protection utilizing high pressure CO2 uses the same design requirements as stated in the Design section for total
flooding and local application with additional limitations and conditions stated in this guide.
General Protection Requirements
• The suppression system should be designed to discharge with the ventilation/exhaust system in continuous operation.
• Except for the electrical power necessary to maintain operation of the exhaust/ventilation system, the electrical power
supply to the tool must be interlocked to shut down upon system discharge.
• Total agent supply demand for each extinguishing system should be based on a one shot discharge of the system over the
entire tool. The method of determining agent quantity and recommended duration of discharge can be found in the appro-
priate section of this guide.
• It is recommended that each tool be protected by an individual fire extinguishing system; however, if acceptable to the AHJ,
a single system may protect a group of tools if the agent supply is sized for the largest hazard and an equally sized con-
nected reserve is provided.
• The AHJ should be consulted to determine connected reserve supply requirements.
• If acceptable to the AHJ, tools exceeding 8 ft. (2.4 m) in length may be zoned providing the working surface of a wet bench
or other processing tool is not subdivided into multiple zones of discharge. A physical barrier is required to separate each
zone, and each zone should be provided with a separate agent supply and connected reserve or the system should be
sized for the entire bench and provided with an equally sized connected reserve.
• If acceptable to the AHJ, a maximum 30 second time delay prior to discharge of the extinguishing system over the working
surface may be used.
• If acceptable to the AHJ, a maximum 30 second time delay prior to discharge may be used in other areas of a tool in a single
protection zone system.
• Materials used in the installation of the system must be suitable for the type of environment that they will be located in. All
equipment and materials of construction are subject to approval by the customer and the AHJ. For corrosive environments
(environments containing acids, solvents, etc.) only the Corrosion Resistant “D” nozzle should be used.* All pipe and
hangers should be protected against corrosion by an appropriate protective coating or sheath. All pipe joints, hangers, and
fasteners should be protected by an appropriate corrosion protected finish or covering. The protective coating or covering
should be suitable for the particular environments that they will be subjected to. All pipe and fittings must be cleaned of all
chips, oil, and dirt prior to installing.
General CO2 System Design Guidelines
The tool subsurface (plenum) area should be protected using total flooding application only, designed to achieve a minimum
concentration of 50 percent within 1 minute. The quantity of CO2 required should be adjusted to compensate for the air
exhaust flow rate of the processing equipment.
*FM APPROVAL OF THE (CR) “D” NOZZLE IS LIMITED TO NON-CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENTS.
2-14
Page 2
General CO2 System Design Guidelines (Continued)

If the CO2 system is arranged to protect the working surface area and plenum simultaneously, the discharge rate for the
plenum should be calculated in accordance with the 1998 Edition of NFPA 12 section 3-3.2.3.
For working surface open style tools, design the CO2 system on a local application basis, rate-by-volume method, for a
minimum discharge time of 30 seconds. The basic system discharge rate of 1 LB/min/cu. ft. of assumed volume may be pro-
portionately reduced to account for barriers that surround the working surface, such as: side panels, back walls, and
headcase, in accordance with the 1998 Edition of NFPA 12 section 3-5.3.1.
Use the Open Face Wet Bench CO2 System Design Guidelines in this guide in conjunction with the Ansul Carbon Dioxide
Systems Design Manual and the ANSCALC version 2 HYDRAULIC CALCULATION PROGRAM for total flooding application
design of wet bench subsurface (plenum areas and local application design of open face wet bench working surfaces.
For tools provided with mini-environment enclosures, use the Ansul Carbon Dioxide System Design Manual and the
ANSCALC program to design the CO2 system on a total flooding basis to achieve a minimum concentration of 50 percent
within 1 minute. The quantity of CO2 required should be adjusted to compensate for the air exhaust flow rate of the wet bench.
Always use the CR “D” Nozzle and corrosion protected pipe, fittings, and hardware in corrosive environments or where cont-
amination of the process is an issue.*
For protection of wet bench headcase and other compartments, use the Ansul Carbon Dioxide System Design Manual and
the ANSCALC program to design the CO2 system on a total flooding basis to achieve a minimum concentration of 50 percent
within 1 minute in each compartment.
Open Face Wet Bench CO2 Fire Protection System Design Guidelines
Open face wet bench protection utilizing high pressure CO2 uses the same design requirements as stated in the Design sec-
tion of the Ansul “Carbon Dioxide Systems” manual for total flooding and local application with the additional limitations stated
here:
• Surface area of open face wet bench to be protected by using local application – rate by volume method only. Use only
the CR “D” nozzle, Part Nos. 422647 through 422659.*
• Under bench area (Plenum) to be protected using total flooding application only. For non-corrosive environments, use
the standard “D” nozzle, Part Nos. 44651 through 44663. For corrosive environments, use the CR “D” nozzle, Part
Nos. 422647 through 422659. See component sheet F-96156 for chemical resistance guidelines.*
• 33 in. (84 cm) maximum height of surface area nozzle from lowest point of nozzle to working surface of wet bench.
• 8 ft. (2.4 m) maximum spacing between nozzles used for total flooding under bench (plenum). Nozzle to be mounted
against side wall of plenum and aimed to discharge horizontally. Additional nozzles, if necessary, are to be spaced
accordingly.
• 600 psi (41.4 bar) minimum nozzle pressure required for both the local application and total flooding.
• When designing the local application – rate by volume method system, always use 0.1 ft. (0.3 m) as hazard height.
• Design concentration must be a minimum of 50%.
• Minimum of 60° F (16 °C) to a maximum of 80 °F (27 °C) storage temperature range.
• Maximum air exhaust flow rate of the wet bench cannot exceed 150 CFM/linear ft.

Page 3
Open Face Wet Bench CO2 Fire Protection System Design Guidelines (Continued)
WET BENCH EXAMPLE:

1000 CFM THRU BENCH
1 FT.-8 IN.
(.5 m)
0 FT.-11 IN.
7 FT.-7 IN.
(.3 m)
(2.3 m)
1 FT.-11 IN. 000758
2 FT.-7 IN. (.6 m)
(.8 m)
A sample problem is included to help explain the design procedure.

Hazard: Open Face Wet Bench
Work Area:
Length: 7 ft. 7 in. (2.3 m)
Width: 2 ft. 7 in. (.8 m)
Plenum Area:
Length: 7 ft. 7 in. (2.3 m)
Width: 2 ft. 7 in (.8 m)
Height: 1 ft. 11 in. (.6 m)
First, determine the CO2 requirements for the work area. The design requirements will be calculated by the local application –
Rate by Volume Method.
Working Surface Protection – Local Application – Rate of Volume Method
Step No. 1 – Determine volume –Length 7.6 ft. (2.3 m) x Width 2.6 ft. (.8 m) x Height 0.1 ft. (2.5 cm) = 1.9 cu. ft.
(.05 cu. m).
Note: The height of 0.1 ft. (2.5 cm) is always used for calculation purposes.
Step No. 2 – Determine Assumed Volume –Based on standard design requirements, 2 ft. (.6 m) must be added to the
height of the hazard and 2 ft. (.6 m) must be added to the width. This is required because these are not enclosed by actual
walls.
Assumed Volume = Length 7.6 ft. (2.3 m) x Width 4.6 ft. (1.4 m) x Height 2.1 ft. (.6 m) = 73.4 cu. ft. (2.1 cu. m).
Step No. 3 – Determine % of closed perimeter –The % of closed perimeter is determined by dividing the actual closed
perimeter by the total perimeter and then multiplying by 100.
The actual closed perimeter is 7.6 ft. (2.3 m) + 1.7 ft. (.5 m) + 1.7 ft. (.5 m) =11.0 ft. (3.4 m).
The assumed volume total perimeter is 7.6 ft. (2.3 m) + 7.6 ft. (2.3 m) + 4.6 ft. (1.4 m) + 4.6 ft. (1.4 m) = 24.4 ft. (7.4 m).
11.0 ft. (3.4 m) divided by 24.4 ft. (7.4 m) = 0.46 x 100 = 46% closed perimeter.
Step No. 4 – Determine Nozzle Discharge Rate –Refer to the chart in Figure 16, Page 6-12 of this section. As determined in
Step No. 2, 46% closed perimeter requires a minimum flow rate of 0.66 #/min./CF.
Step No. 5 – Determine Total Agent Required –Based on the above steps, the total agent required for local application –
rate by volume, can now by determined.
Total agent required = Assumed Volume x Flow Rate per Minute Per Cu. Ft. x 1.4 (liquid factor) x .5 (minimum discharge time)
73.4 cu. ft. (assumed volume) x 0.66 (flow rate per min. per cu. ft.) = 48.4 lb./minute.
48.4 lb./min. x 1.4 (liquid factor) x .5 (minimum discharge time in minutes) = 33.9 lbs of agent required.
Step No. 6 – Determine Number of Nozzles Required –Based on the limitation listed above, the maximum height from the
face of the nozzle to the working surface of the wet bench is 33 in. (84 cm). In this example, the nozzle will be mounted at a
height of 30 in. (76 cm). Referring to Figure 9 on Page 6-6, at 30 in. (76 cm) height, the “D” nozzle has a FM flow rate of 20.0
lb./minute.
Page 4
Open Face Wet Bench CO2 Fire Protection System Design Guidelines (Continued)
Working Surface Protection – Local Application – Rate of Volume Method (Continued)
48.4 (lb./min) divided by 20.0 (flow rate per nozzle) = 2.4 nozzles required. This number must be rounded up to the next
whole number of 3.
Therefore, the surface protection requires 33.9 lbs. of agent and 3 nozzles. Nozzles are to be mounted and aimed per the
standard local application guidelines. See Section 6, Pages 6-5 – 6-6.
Now, determine the total flooding requirements for the plenum area (below bench).
Plenum Area Protection – Total Flooding

Step No. 1 – Determine Hazard Volume – The under bench volume is Length 7.6 ft. (2.3 m) x Width 2.6 ft.
(.8 m)) x Height 1.9 ft. (.6 m) = 37.5 cu. ft. (1.1 cu m).
Step No. 2 – Determine Initial Quantity of Agent Required –Refer to Volume Factors Chart on Page 6-2, Figure 2. For
volumes up to 140 cu. ft. (3.9 cu. m), the volume factor of 0.072 must be used.
37.5 cu. ft. x 0.072 (volume factor) = 2.7 lbs. of agent
The next step is to increase the amount of agent if the minimum design concentration is greater than 34%. Referring to the lim-
itations stated above, the minimum design concentration must be 50%.
Step No. 3 – Determine Adjusted Quantity of Agent Required – It is determined that a 50% design concentration is
required. Based on the “Material Conversion Factors Chart” on Page 6-2, Figure 3, the conversion factor for 50% design con-
centration is 1.6.
The adjusted quantity of agent required is determined by:
2.7 lbs. (agent quantity) x 1.6 (conversion factor) = 4.3 lbs. of agent required
Step No. 4 – Ventilation Requirements –This wet bench has 1000 CFM of air moving through it. The additional ventilation
adjustment quantity is determined by:
Ventilation Adjustment Quantity = CFM x Volume Factor x Conversion Factor x Discharge Time in Minutes
1000 (CFM) x 0.072 (volume factor) x 1.6 (conversion factor) x .5 (discharge time) = 57.6 additional lbs. of agent required
Step No. 5 – Amount of Total Flooding Agent Required –Add the quantity of agent determined in Step Nos. 3 and 4.
4.3 lbs. + 57.6 lbs. = 61.9 lbs. required for total flooding system.
Step No. 6 – Determine Number of Nozzles Required –Based on the limitations stated above, the maximum spacing for
total flooding wet bench nozzles is 8 ft.. This example hazard is 7.6 ft. (2.3 m) long, therefore one (1) nozzle is required. Based
on FM approval testing, the total flooding “D” nozzle should be mounted at the sidewall in the under bench area to discharge
horizontally. Additional nozzles are to be spaced no greater than 8 ft. (2.4 m) apart.
Total Wet Bench System Requirements

The total quantity of agent required = 33.9 lbs. (local application) + 61.9 lbs. (total flooding) = 95.8 lbs. total.
Standard hydraulic calculations can now be performed to determine pipe sizes and nozzle orifice sizes.
NOTE: Verification shall be made from the hydraulic calculations that the minimum discharge nozzle pressure of 600 psi and
the flowrate as calculated for the specific height is achieved. A flowrate in excess of that calculated for the discharge nozzle
height may cause a splash hazard upon discharge of the carbon dioxide fire extinguishing system.
Installation Guidelines
• Always use the “CR” D nozzle in corrosive type areas.*
• Make certain blow off cap is in place on the installed nozzle. Use installation tool, Part No. 426206, for proper blow off cap
installation.
• All piping joints (fittings) and piping located in the corrosive environment must be protected using extruded Teflon tubing
(TFE) or heat shrink tubing (TFE).
• When using heat shrink tubing, make certain all exposed threads are covered.
• If extruded Teflon or heat shrink tubing are not used, the recommended piping is stainless steel.
• Follow all other installation piping requirements as stated in the Installation section of the Ansul Carbon Dioxide System
Design Manual. NOTE: Make certain all pipe and fittings are clean of any chips, oil, or dirt prior to installing.
Inspection
Inspection should be performed in accordance with the Ansul Carbon Dioxide System Design Manual and NFPA 12.
DATA
SPEC
This Spec-Data sheet conforms
to editorial style prescribed by
The Construction Specifications
Institute. The manufacturer is
responsible for technical ac-
curacy.
®
Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems
1. PRODUCT NAME manual operation as needed. bon dioxide systems:

Ansul Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Fire Accessories are used to provide • Printing presses
Suppression System alarms, delay discharge, ventilation • Vaults
control, door closures, or other aux- • Open pits
ANSUL®
2. MANUFACTURER iliary shutdown or functions. • Dip tanks
Ansul Incorporated Due to the method of extinguish- • Spray booths
One Stanton Street ment, personnel occupying areas • Ovens
FIRE PROTECTION
Marinette, WI 54143-2542 protected by carbon dioxide sys- • Engine rooms

Phone: (715) 735-7411 tems must be evacuated prior to sys- • Coating machines
FAX: (715) 732-3479 tem discharge. For this reason, dis- • Process equipment
charge time delays and alarms are • Hoods and ducts
3. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION mandatory for occupied hazards. • Flammable gas or liquid storage
The Ansul Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Two or more hazard areas can be areas
protected with a single group of • Generators
Fire Suppression System is an engi-
agent storage containers (cylinders) Composition and Materials: The
neered system utilizing either a
by means of directional or selector basic system consists of agent (CO2)
fixed nozzle agent distribution net-
valves. stored in high strength alloy steel
Ansul Incorporated
15
work, hose reel(s), or a combination

A system installation and mainte- cylinders. Various types of actuators,
of both. The system is Underwriters
February 1991
nance manual is available contain- either manual or automatic, are
Laboratories, Inc. (UL) listed,
ing information on system compo- available for release of the agent
Factory Mutual (FM) approved, and
nents and procedures concerning into the hazard area. The agent is
designed in accordance with the lat-
design, maintenance, and recharge. distributed and discharged into the
est revision of the National Fire
The system is installed and ser- hazard area through a network of
Protection Association (NFPA)
viced by authorized distributors that piping and nozzles. Each nozzle is
Standard 12, ‘‘Carbon Dioxide
are trained by the manufacturer. equipped with a fixed orifice
Extinguishing Systems.’’ When prop-
Basic Use: The Ansul Carbon designed to deliver a uniform dis-
Ansul Incorporated
February 1991
erly designed, the carbon dioxide

system will extinguish fire in Class Dioxide system is particularly useful charge to the protected area. On
A, B, and C hazards by displacing for suppressing fires in hazards large hazards, where three or more
15
the air containing oxygen which where an electrically non-conduc- cylinders are required, a screwed or
supports combustion. tive medium is essential or desir- welded pipe manifold assembly is
The system can be actuated by able; where clean-up of other agents employed. The manifold assembly is
presents a problem; or where the connected to each cylinder by
detection and control equipment for
hazard obstructions require the use means of a flexible discharge bend
automatic system operation along

FIRE PROTECTION
of a gaseous agent. The following and check valve assembly.
with providing local and remote
are typical hazards protected by car- Additional equipment includes:
remote manual pull stations, corner
pulleys, door closures, pressure
trips, bells and sirens, transfer
ANSUL®
switches, time delays, pneumatic

switches, and weighing devices. All
or some are required when design-
ing a total system.
CO2 Agent – Carbon dioxide is an
effective fire extinguishing agent
that can be used on many types of
fires. It is effective for surface fires,
such as flammable liquids and most
solid combustible materials. It
expands at a ratio of 450 to 1 by vol-
The ten-point Spec-Data® format has been reproduced
from publications copyrighted by CSI, 1964, 1965, 1966,
1967, and used by permission of The Construction
Specifications Institute, Alexandria, VA 22314.
002690
15300
ume. For fire suppression purposes valve. Manual actuation is accom- tions. All AUTOPULSE Control
the discharge is designed to raise the plished by pulling the hand lever on Systems are designed for indoor
carbon dioxide concentration in the the actuator. The lever design con- applications and for temperature
hazard. This displaces the air contains a forged mechanical detent ranges between 32 °F and 120 °F (0
taining oxygen which supports com- which secures the lever in the open °C and 49 °C).
bustion, and results in fire extin- position when actuated. A manual-
guishment. Other attributes are its local actuator is available to provide 4. TECHNICAL DATA
high degree of effectiveness, its either a manual or pneumatic Applicable Standards: UL listed
excellent thermal stability, and free- means for a remote pressure release under EX-2968; USCG approved
dom from deterioration. It has a low from a remote pressure device. under Approval No. 162.038/7/0;
toxicity classification by Under- Direct manual actuation of this meets requirements of NFPA
writers Laboratories (Group 5a). actuator is accomplished by pulling Standard 12 ‘‘Carbon Dioxide
Cylinders – The cylinders are con- the ring pin and depressing the red Extinguishing Systems;’’ approved
structed, tested, and marked in palm button on top of the actuator. by Factory Mutual Research
accordance with applicable Dept. Detection System – The Corporation; AUTOPULSE Control
of Transportation (DOT) and the AUTOPULSE Control System is used System meets requirements of NFPA
U.S. Bureau of Explosives specifica- where an automatic electronic con- 70 (Standard for National Electrical
tions. trol system is required to actuate a Code) and NFPA 72 (Standard for
Cylinder Assembly – The cylinder fixed carbon dioxide system. This Protective Signaling Systems).
assembly is of steel construction control system is used to control a
with a red enamel or epoxy finish. single fixed fire suppression or 5. INSTALLATION
Five sizes are available to meet spe- alarm system based on inputs All system components and
cific needs. Each is equipped with a received from fire detection devices. accessories must be installed by per-
pressure seat-type CV90 valve. The The detection circuits can be config- sonnel trained by the manufacturer.
valve is of forged brass and is ured using cross, counting, indepen- All installations must be performed
attached to the cylinder providing a dent or priority-zone (counting) according to the guidelines stated in
leak tight seal. The valve also concepts. The control system has the manufacturer’s design, installa-
includes a safety pressure relief been tested to the applicable FCC tion, recharge, and maintenance
device which provides relief at 2650 Rules and Regulations for Class A manual.
to 3000 psi (18269 to 20682 kPa). Computing devices.
Cylinder charging pressure is 850 Nozzles – Nozzles are designed 6. AVAILABILITY AND COST
psi at 70 °F (5861 kPa at 21 °C) with to direct the discharge of carbon Availability: The Ansul Carbon
a filling density of not more than dioxide in a liquid and gaseous state Dioxide Systems are sold and ser-
68% of its water capacity. The cylin- using the stored pressure from the viced through an international net-
ders are shipped with a mainte- cylinders. The system design speci- work of independent distributors
nance record card and shipping cap fies the orifice size to be used for located in most states and many for-
attached. The cap is attached to the proper flow rate and distribution eign countries.
threaded collar on the neck of each pattern. The nozzle selection Cost: Cost varies with type of sys-
cylinder to protect the valve while in depends on the hazard and location tem specified, size, and design.
transit. The cylinder serial number to be protected. Both low velocity
along with the full and empty and high velocity nozzles may be 7. WARRANTY
weight capacities are stamped near used for total flooding. Low velocity Warranty: The components of the
the neck of each cylinder. nozzles are generally used for direct fire suppression system supplied by
Electric Actuator – Electric actua- application to a flammable liquid Ansul Incorporated (‘‘Ansul’’) are
tion of an agent cylinder is accom- fire. Both types of nozzles can be warranted to you as the original pur-
plished by an electric actuator inter- adapted for a specific hazard by siz- chaser for one year from the date of
faced through an AUTOPULSE® ing the orifice to achieve the delivery against defects in work-
Control System. This actuator can be designed flow rate and concentra- manship and material. Ansul will
used in hazardous environments tion. Standard nozzles are painted replace or repair any Ansul-supplied
where the ambient temperature red or are natural brass, depending components, which, in its opinion,
range is between 0 °F and 130 °F on type. Optional chrome plating is are defective and has not been tam-
(–18 °C and 130 °C). In auxiliary or also available. All are corrosion pered with or subjected to misuse,
override applications, a manual resistant and, where the hazard war- abuse, or exposed to highly corro-
override valve actuator can be rants, are equipped with blow-off sive conditions provided that written
installed on top of the electric actu- caps or sealing discs. notice of the alleged defect shall
ator. An arming tool is required to Limitations: The carbon dioxide have been given to Ansul within 30
reset (arm) the electric actuator after system must be designed and days after discovery thereof and
operation. installed within the guidelines of the prior to the expiration of one year
Manual/Pneumatic Actuators – manufacturer’s design, installation, after delivery, and further provided
Several types of manual/pneumatic recharge, and maintenance manual. that if Ansul so instructs, such article
actuators are available for override The ambient temperature limitations or part thereof is promptly returned
manual/pneumatic actuation on the are 0 °F to 130 °F (–18 °C to 54 °C) to Ansul with shipping charges pre-
electric actuator or direct manual/ for total flooding and 32 °F to 120 °F paid.
pneumatic actuation on the cylinder (0 °C to 49 °C) for local applica- Disclaimer of Warranty and
Limitation of Damage: The warranty assume for it any additional liability 9. TECHNICAL SERVICES
described above is the only one in connection with the sale of this For information on the proper
given by Ansul concerning this sys- system. design and installation of the Ansul
tem. ANSUL MAKES NO OTHER For repairs, parts, and service of Carbon Dioxide System, contact a
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, the Ansul fire suppression system, local Ansul distributor. Ansul appli-
WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, contact a local Ansul representative, cation engineering department is
INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF or Ansul Fire Protection, Marinette, also available to answer design and
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS WI 54143-2542, (715) 735-7411. installation questions. Call Ansul at
FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE. (715) 735-7411.
ANSUL’S MAXIMUM RESPONSI- 8. MAINTENANCE
BILITY FOR ANY CLAIMS Maintenance is a vital step in the 10. FILING SYSTEMS
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, performance of a fire suppression Electronic SPEC-DATA®
NEGLIGENCE, BREACH OF WAR- system. As such, it must be per- SPEC-DATA® II
RANTY, OR STRICT LIABILITY formed by an authorized Ansul dis- Carbon Dioxide Systems Manual
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE PUR- tributor in accordance with NFPA Additional product information
CHASE PRICE OF THE SYSTEM. 12 and the manufacturer’s design, available upon request
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES installation, recharge, and mainte-
SHALL ANSUL BE RESPONSIBLE nance manual. When replacing
FOR SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, components on the Ansul system,
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OF use only Ansul approved parts.
ANY KIND. Ansul does not assume
or authorize any other person to
ANSUL INCORPORATED, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542 715-735-7411 Form No. F-90181 ©1991 Ansul Incorporated Litho in U.S.A.
2-91-2430
MANUFACTURER SPEC-DATA® PROGRAM
SPEC
Ansul Incorporated
One Stanton Street
Marinette, WI 54143-2542
Phone: (715) 735-7411
MANU
This Manu-Spec presents the manu-
FAX: (715) 732-3479 facturer’s suggested proprietary
specification in conformance with the
CSI 3-Part Section Format. The man-
ufacturer is solely responsible for
content and references.
ANSUL®
SECTION 15360
CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Carbon Dioxide Fire Suppression System.
Suitable for hazard areas such as printing presses, vaults, open pits, dip tanks, spray booths, ovens,
engine rooms, coating machines, process equipment, hoods and ducts, flammable gas or liquid
storage areas, computer rooms/subfloors, generators, and other similar areas.
Ansul Incorporated
15
B. Related Sections:
February 1991
1. Section 13900 – Fire Suppression and Supervisory Systems.
2. Section 16720 – Fire Alarm and Detection Systems.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 12 – Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems.
2. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.
Ansul Incorporated
February 1991
3. NFPA 72 – Standard For Protective Signaling Systems.

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) – Fire Protection Equipment Directory.
15
C. Factory Mutual Insurance (FM) Approval Guide.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements:
Systems
Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing
FIRE PROTECTION
1. Shall be the engineered type.
2. Shall utilize [fixed nozzle agent distribution network.] [hose reel(s).] [combination of both fixed
nozzle agent distribution network and hose reel(s).]
3. Shall be capable of automatic detection and [automatic] [remote manual] actuation.
ANSUL®
4. Additional equipment shall be available for fuel shut-off where required.

B. Performance Requirements:
1. Shall be capable of extinguishing fire in Class A, B, and C hazards.
2. CO2 agent shall dilute oxygen content of protected hazard to a point where it will not support
combustion.
3. Detection system shall be tested to applicable FCC Rules and Regulations for Class ‘‘A’’ com-
puting devices.
The Manu-Spec® format has been reproduced from publications

copyrighted by CSI and is herein used by permission of The
Construction Specifications Institute, Alexandria, VA 22314. 15300
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data under provisions of Section [01300.] [01340.]
B. Shop Drawing: Submit drawings under provisions of Section [01300.] [01340.]
C. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Design Data: Submit design calculations under provisions of Section [01300.] [01340.]
2. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s instructions for system maintenance and
recharge under provisions of Section [01300.] [01360.] [01700.] [01730.]
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer: The manufacturer of the system components shall have a minimum of 10 years
experience in the manufacture and design of carbon dioxide fire suppression systems and relat-
ed fire detection and control equipment.
2. Installer: The installer shall be authorized and trained by manufacturer to design, install, and
maintain carbon dioxide fire suppression systems.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Conform to [Applicable] [____________] building code for requirements specified herein.
2. Codes and Permits: Conform to the local code requirements applicable to this section. Obtain
and pay any necessary permits prior to beginning work involved in this section.
3. All system components must be UL listed as part of the manufacturer’s total system.
4. All system components must be approved by Factory Mutual Insurance (FM).
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Acceptance at Site:
1. Deliver materials to job site in sealed, original containers bearing the manufacturer’s labels.
2. Materials arriving at site without labels, opened, damaged, or containing less material than
specified shall not be accepted for use.
B. Storage and Protection:
1. Store, protect, and handle products at site under provisions of Section [01600.] [________.]
2. Materials shall be stored in a well ventilated area at temperatures between 0 °F and 130 °F
(–18 °C and 54 °C).
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Carbon Dioxide System:
a. Total Flood System: 0 °F to 130 °F (–18 °C to 54 °C) ambient temperature range of pro-
tected area.
b. Local Application: 32 °F to 120 °F (0 °C to 49 °C) ambient temperature range of protected
area.
2. AUTOPULSE® Control System:
a. Indoor application only with 32 °F to 120 °F (0 °C to 49 °C) ambient temperature range.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate work performed under this section with work specified in Section [13900.] [16720.]
[_____________.]
1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Service: Shall be provided by an authorized, factory trained representative in accor-
dance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ansul Incorporated, One Stanton Street, Marinette, WI 54143-2542.
2.02 SYSTEM
A. Ansul Carbon Dioxide Fire Suppression System.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. CO2 Agent:
1. A clean, dry, non-corrosive, non-damaging, non-deteriorating chemical.
B. Cylinder:
1. Constructed, tested, and marked in accordance with applicable Department of Transportation
(DOT) and U.S. Bureau of Explosives specifications.
C. Cylinder Assembly:
1. Steel construction with a red enamel or epoxy finish available in five sizes, and equipped with
a pressure seat-type CV90 valve.
2. Valve constructed of forged brass.
3. Valve contains safety pressure relief device which provides relief at 2650 to 3000 psi (18269
to 20682 kPa).
4. Cylinder charging pressure to be a minimum 850 psi at 70 °F (5861 kPa at 21 °C) with a filling
density of not more than 68% of its water capacity.
5. Cylinder shipped with maintenance record card and shipping cap attached.
6. Cylinder serial number, along with the full and empty weight capacities, stamped near neck of
cylinder.
D. Electric Actuator:
1. Electrical actuation of agent cylinder to be accomplished by an electric actuator interfaced
through compatible control panel by system manufacturer.
2. Actuator capable of being used in hazardous environments where ambient temperature range
is between 0 °F and 130 °F (–18 °C and 54 °C). An arming tool is required to reset the electric
actuator after operation.
E. Manual/Pneumatic Actuator:
1. Several types of manual/pneumatic actuators available for providing manual/pneumatic actua-
tion of cylinder valve. Manual actuation accomplished by pulling hand lever on the actuator.
Pneumatic actuation accomplished by a remote pressure device.
F. Detection System:
1. AUTOPULSE Control System used where an automatic electronic control system is required to
actuate a fixed carbon dioxide system.
2. Used to operate a single fixed fire suppression or alarm system based on inputs received from
fire detection devices.
3. Circuits to be configured using cross, counting, independent or priority-zone concepts.
G. Nozzles:
1. Designed to direct discharge of carbon dioxide in a liquid or gaseous state.
2. Orifice size determined by flow rate and system design required.
3. Standard nozzles to be natural brass or painted red.
4. Optional chrome plating available.
5. All nozzles to be corrosion resistant and, if needed, equipped with blow-off caps or sealing
discs.
H. Distribution Piping:
1. Meets requirements of ASTM [A53] [A106] specifications.
2. Distribution lines up to 3/4 in. diameter shall be Schedule 40 seamless steel pipe, [black iron.]
[galvanized.]
3. Distribution lines greater than 3/4 in. diameter shall be Schedule 80 seamless steel pipe, [black
iron.] [galvanized.]
4. For pipe sizes up to 2 in. diameter, Class 300 [malleable] [ductile] iron fittings shall be used.
For pipe larger than 2 in. diameter, IPS and forged steel fittings shall be used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: The contractor shall verify that area being protected by carbon dioxide
system meets requirements of NFPA 12.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. The contractor shall install system in accordance with manufacturer’s design, installation, recharge,
and maintenance manual.
Field testing can be waived by the authority having jurisdiction. Delete Article 3.03 if testing is
not required.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests: Field testing of system shall be conducted by personnel authorized and trained by the
manufacturer.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct owner’s personnel in the operation of [equipment] [system] under provisions of Section
[01670.] [____________.]
3.05 SCHEDULES
Consult with the authority having jurisdiction or other qualified person for a recommended
format.
A. System Component: Quality: Location:
________________________ ________________________ ________________________
________________________ ________________________ ________________________
________________________ ________________________ ________________________
END OF SECTION
ANSUL INCORPORATED, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542 715-735-7411 Form No. F-90230 ©1991 Ansul Incorporated Litho in U.S.A.
2-91-2354
ANSUL 
Section 4
6-19-98
REV. 1
General Information
CARBON DIOXIDE TYPES OF SYSTEMS

Carbon dioxide, as an extinguishing agent, has many desir- There are two basic types of systems: total flooding and
able properties. It will not damage equipment and leaves no local application.
residue to be cleaned up. Since it is a gas, carbon dioxide
will penetrate and spread to all parts of the protected Total Flooding
hazard. It does not conduct electricity and, therefore, can be A total flooding system normally consists of a fixed supply of
used on live electrical equipment. It can be effectively used carbon dioxide connected to fixed piping with nozzles to
on most combustible material. direct the agent into an enclosed space about the hazard. In
Carbon dioxide extinguishes fire by reducing the oxygen a total flooding system, the space around the hazard must
concentration to a point where the atmosphere will no be tight enough to hold the required percentage of carbon
longer support combustion. The carbon dioxide concentra- dioxide concentration long enough to extinguish the fire.
tion must be maintained for a sufficient period to allow the Local Application
maximum temperature to be reduced below the auto-igni-
tion temperature of the burning material. Carbon dioxide is A local application system consists of a fixed supply of
most effective against flammable liquid fires. For most flam- carbon dioxide, piping, and nozzles to direct the agent at the
mable liquids, reduction of the oxygen concentration to 15% hazard independent of any enclosure that may exist. The
(from the normal 21%) will be sufficient to extinguish the fire. nozzles are arranged to discharge the carbon dioxide
For Class A (wood, and paper) combustibles, a reduction to directly onto the burning material.
15% will control the fire. Some materials, such as acetylene
and ethylene oxide, require a greater reduction of oxygen
concentration for extinguishment. Still other materials, such TYPES OF ACTUATION
as cellulose nitrate and metal hydrides, which do not require There are four basic types of actuation for carbon dioxide
oxygen as they burn, cannot be extinguished by use of systems: pneumatic, mechanical, electrical, and rate of rise
carbon dioxide. (H.A.D.).
Pneumatic
PERSONNEL SAFETY Pneumatic actuation utilizes gas pressure from either a
remote cartridge actuator or from a cartridge located in a
! CAUTION control panel such as an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release. A
pneumatic actuator is installed on top of the CV-90 cylinder
The discharge of carbon dioxide into an enclosed space valve. The gas pressure forces the piston of the pneumatic
can create a dangerous oxygen deficiency. It can also actuator down, which in turn forces the cylinder valve to
reduce visibility to a point where exits are difficult to locate open, releasing the carbon dioxide from the cylinder,
by persons attempting to evacuate the area. through the piping and out the nozzles.
Any use of carbon dioxide in an occupied space should On a CV-98 valve, a 1/4 in. actuation line is attached to the
provide for the prompt evacuation of personnel and 1/4 in. port on the side of the valve. Pneumatic pressure
resuscitation of anyone trapped in the hazard area. Time from the ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C or pilot cylinder opens the
delays, training, signs, alarms, and breathing apparatus valve through this port.
should be provided to the personnel involved.
Mechanical
Mechanical actuation is accomplished by either a
local/manual override or a lever actuator mounted on top of
the cylinder valve. By manually depressing the strike button
on the local/manual override or rotating the lever on the
lever actuator, the cylinder valve can be opened, allowing
the carbon dioxide to discharge through the piping and
nozzles.
4-1
Section 4 – General Information
6-19-98
REV. 1
TYPES OF ACTUATION (Continued) Mechanical (Fusible Link)

Electrical The mechanical detection system consists of a mechanical
Electrical automatic actuation of the CV-90 cylinder valve, release enclosure which houses the release mechanism
through an approved control panel, can be accomplished by and a nitrogen cartridge. The release mechanism is actu-
using an HF electric actuator. Electrical automatic actuation ated when the fusible link wire rope network, normally under
of the CV-98 cylinder valve can be accomplished by using a tension, is relaxed, due to the link separating because of
CV-98 electrical actuator. NOTE: CV-98 and HF actuators heat in the hazard area. When the link separates, the
cannot be mixed on the same release circuit. Both styles of release operates, puncturing the seal in the nitrogen car-
actuator are energized by an electric signal from the detec- tridge. This nitrogen pressure will then operate the pneu-
tion control panel. When using either style of electric actu- matic actuator located on the cylinder valve. This will cause
ator, pneumatic or mechanical actuating devices can also the carbon dioxide to be released into the piping network
be attached as a secondary means of actuation. and discharged out the nozzles.
Rate of Rise (H.A.D.)

Another type of automatic actuation can be accomplished
by the use of a heat actuated device (H.A.D.). This device is
designed to sense abrupt changes in temperature caused
by fire. This temperature rise causes a small increase in
pressure in the pneumatic detection circuit which in turn
actuates a mechanical device mounted on top of the
cylinder valve.
TYPES OF DETECTION
There are three types of automatic detection available for
carbon dioxide systems. One type is pneumatic (H.A.D.),
one type is electric (control panel), and the other type is
mechanical (fusible link).
H.A.D. (Rate of Rise)

The H.A.D. detection system consists of a mechanical con-
trol head mounted on the cylinder valve. Pneumatic tubing
is run to a pneumatic detector. An increase in temperature of
the air surrounding the detector will cause an increase in
pressure in the pneumatic detection circuit, which in turn will
cause the control head located on the cylinder valve to
actuate the valve and release the carbon dioxide into the
piping network and out the discharge nozzles.
Electric
Electric operation of the carbon dioxide system is obtained
through the use of electronic control systems which monitor
and control various system functions. Detection devices
available are: ionization smoke detectors, photoelectric
smoke detectors, fixed temperature detectors, rate-of-rise
heat detectors, flame detectors, or combustible vapor
detectors. When a detector senses a fire, a signal is sent to
the control panel. The panel in turn sends an electric signal
to the actuator located on the cylinder valve. The actuator
opens the cylinder valve causing the carbon dioxide to be
released into the piping network and discharged out the
nozzles.
4-2
ANSUL 
Section 5
Planning
One of the key elements for fire protection is to correctly HAZARD ANALYSIS
define the hazard and choose the best application method. A thorough hazard analysis is required to determine the
This section is divided into two sub-sections: Application type and quantity of protection required. It is important to
Methods and Hazard Analysis. cover each element and accurately record the information.
This information will be used to determine the size and type
of carbon dioxide system required and also to determine at
APPLICATION METHODS a later date if any changes were made to the hazard after the
Two types of approved application methods are available system was installed. Record size of hazard, any obstruc-
with the carbon dioxide system: total flooding and local tions, unclosable openings, and anything else that would
application. concern system performance. Review each of the following
criteria:
Total Flooding
Total flooding is defined as a system consisting of a fixed Hazard Type
supply of carbon dioxide permanently connected to fixed Briefly describe the types of hazards being protected. If pro-
piping, with fixed nozzles arranged to discharge carbon tecting prefabricated booths or machines, record the manu-
dioxide into an enclosed space or enclosure about the facturer model number and anything unique about the
hazard. The enclosure must be adequate to contain the dis- hazard.
charge of agent to achieve the required carbon dioxide con-
Hazard Dimensions
centration. Examples of this type of enclosure include
rooms, vaults, and machine enclosures. Sketch hazard and record all pertinent dimensions
including all interior walls, location of doors and windows,
Local Application and any permanent structures which may interfere with
Local application is defined as a system consisting of a fixed piping or discharge pattern.
supply of carbon dioxide permanently connected to a Unclosable Openings
system of fixed piping with nozzles arranged so as to dis-
For enclosures that have unclosable openings, the fol-
charge the agent directly into the fire. Local application sys-
lowing rules must be observed when total flooding:
tems are used for the suppression of surface fires in flam-
mable liquids, gases, and shallow solids where the hazard For surface fires, such as occur with flammable liquids, the
is not enclosed or where the enclosure does not conform to total area of unclosable openings must not exceed 3% of
the requirements for total flooding. Examples of hazards the volume of the enclosure. These unclosable openings
that may be successfully protected by local application sys- must be compensated for by an additional quantity of
tems include dip tanks, quench tanks, oil-filled electric carbon dioxide equal to the anticipated loss during a one-
transformer, etc. Local application systems are divided into minute holding time.
two types: rate-by-area and rate-by-volume. Rate-by-area If the hazard could result in a deep-seated fire, any opening
method of system design is used where the fire hazard con- that cannot be closed at the time of extinguishment shall be
sists primarily of flat surfaces or low-level objects associ- compensated for by the addition of carbon dioxide equal in
ated with horizontal surfaces. The rate-by-volume method volume to the expected leakage volume during the extin-
of system design is used where the fire hazard consists of guishing period. If leakage is appreciable, consideration
three-dimensional irregular objects that cannot be easily shall be given to an extended discharge system.
reduced to equivalent surface areas.
5-1
Section 5 – Planning
HAZARD ANALYSIS (Continued) CLASS B – FLAMMABLE LIQUID AND GAS FIRES –

Unclosable Openings (Continued) These fires involve such materials as oils, greases, tars, oil-
based paints, lacquers, and gasoline. NOTE: Specific fuel
Openings leading to adjacent areas containing hazards can must be identified as it will determine total flood concentra-
be protected in several ways. The opening may be tion requirements.
equipped with automatic closures operated by pressure trip
devices which close the openings upon system actuation. CLASS C – ENERGIZED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Or, screening nozzles may be installed at the opening areas FIRES – Common Class C devices include control rooms,
to prevent fire from spreading through the opening to adja- transformers, oil switches, circuit breakers, rotating equip-
cent areas. Any additional carbon dioxide required for ment, pumps, and motors.
screening the opening must be adjusted if the temperatures Carbon dioxide is NOT effective on the following types of
are outside the normal design range. fires:
Types of Fires • Class D combustible metals such as sodium, potassium,

magnesium, titanium, and zirconium.
Types of fires which can be extinguished by total flooding
may be divided into two categories: surface fires involving • Chemicals containing their own oxygen supply, such as
flammable liquids, gases and solids, and deep-seated fires cellulose nitrate.
involving solids subject to smoldering. Local application • Metal hydrides
systems can be used only for surface fire protection.
Ventilation Considerations
SURFACE FIRES – Are the most common hazards particu-
larly adaptable to extinguishment by total flooding systems. The hazard ventilation system is very important when con-
They are subject to prompt extinguishment when carbon sidering total flooding application, but should also be con-
dioxide is quickly introduced into the enclosure in sufficient sidered for local application. If possible, the ventilation
quantity to overcome leakage and provide an extinguishing system should be shut down and/or dampered before or
concentration for the particular materials involved. simultaneously with the start of the carbon dioxide dis-
charge. If the ventilation system cannot be shut down, the
DEEP-SEATED – For deep-seated fires, the required extin- volume of air moved by the system during the discharge
guishing concentration shall be maintained for a sufficient period must be added to the enclosure volume if a total
period of time to allow the smoldering to be extinguished flooding designed system is required.
and the material to cool to a point at which reignition will not
occur. The hazard should be inspected immediately after to Consider installing dampers wherever possible to restrict
make certain extinguishment is complete. Cooking oils and the fire to the protected area and enhance the fire protec-
grease will require longer discharge. tion.
Hazard Atmosphere Electrical Considerations
The carbon dioxide system can be used in most industrial It is recommended that all electrical power sources associ-
environments. If the hazard is designed as explosion-proof, ated with the protected hazard be shut down before system
the control system, releasing devices and electric valve discharge. This eliminates the potential of a fire being elec-
actuators (if not approved for hazardous environments) trically-reignited.
must be located away from the hazard area and the system In addition to the above, review the following statements:
must be remotely piped to the area. Only the detectors, dis- LIVE UNINSULATED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRE – For min-
tribution piping, nozzles, or other nonelectrical parts may be imum clearances of live uninsulated high voltage wire, refer
located in the hazard. to NFPA 12 “Electrical Clearances.’’ Reduced clearance
Hazardous Material can result in line spikes being fed into the control system,
releasing devices, or field wiring circuits.
Carbon dioxide is an effective agent to suppress the fol-
lowing types of fires: 120 VAC PRIMARY POWER SOURCE – Determine if a
120 VAC primary power source is available for the control
CLASS A – SURFACE FIRES: These fires involve ordinary system or releasing device operation. The control system or
combustible materials such as cloth, paper, rubber, and releasing device requires an independent 120 VAC 50/60
many plastics. Hz circuit. System wiring must comply with all local codes
and applicable NFPA Standards.
5-2
HAZARD ANALYSIS (Continued) DISCHARGE TEST – Determine if a discharge test is

Temperature Range required. A discharge test will require proper preparation
and will affect your total cost estimate.
The following temperature ranges must be determined and
noted to ensure proper placement and operation of the AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION – Contact the end-
carbon dioxide and detection control components: user or authority having jurisdiction to establish the require-
ments for:
HAZARD AREA – Determine the minimum and maximum
temperature of the hazard to be protected. This tempera- • Minimum/maximum detector spacing;
ture may be any temperature that the distribution piping and • Type of detection and control system that is acceptable;
detectors can withstand only if the agent tank, control • Final inspection or discharge test required;
system, or accessories are located outside of the hazard
area. • If reserve system is required;
For extreme temperature conditions, the following compen- • What audible and/or visual alarm devices may be required.
sations must be made:
• If the enclosure temperature is above 200 °F (93 °C), the
quantity of agent must be increased by 1% for each five
degrees above 200° F (93 °C).
• If the temperature is below 0 °F (–18 °C), the agent quan-
tity must be increased by 1% for each one degree below
0 °F (–18 °C).
AGENT CYLINDER – The carbon dioxide cylinder must be
located in an area with a temperature range from 0 °F to
130 °F (–18 °C to 54 °C).
DETECTION/CONTROL SYSTEM –The detection/control
system must be located in an area with a temperature range
from 32 °F to 120 °F (0 °C to 49 °C).
Other Factors That Influence System Planning

The following additional factors require consideration to
perform a thorough hazard analysis:
HANDICAPPED PERSONNEL – Care should be taken that
proper signs and visual devices are placed so all personnel
are aware that the system has been activated.
RESPONSE TIME OF FIREFIGHTING SERVICE –
Establish the maximum time required for firefighting service
to respond to an alarm. This information can be used to
determine if a reserve system is required. The reserve
system can provide a second discharge in the event of a fire
reflash.
RESERVE SYSTEM – If a reserve carbon dioxide system is
required, determine if it should be permanently connected,
or unconnected and located on the premises. The addition
of a connected or unconnected reserve system will add to
your job cost estimate.
CYLINDER AND ACCESSORY LOCATION – Establish a
location that is acceptable with the end-user and verify the
following:
• Temperature range is acceptable;
• Piping limitations are not exceeded;
• Components are not subject to damage or vandalism.
5-3
NOTES:
5-4
ANSUL 
Section 6
Design
After completing the hazard analysis sub-section in Minimum Carbon Dioxide Concentrations For
Section 5, Planning, proceed with the following ele- Extinguishment
ments to work up a complete design and bill of materials.
Theoretical Minimum
APPLICATION METHOD Min. CO2 Design CO2
Concen- Concen-
Choose one of the following approved application Material tration (%) tration (%)
methods. Depending on the hazard, it may be nec-
essary to combine different application methods on the Acetylene 55 66
total system. Acetone 27* 34
Aviation Gas Grades 30 36
Total Flooding 115/145
Benzol, Benzene 31 37
HAZARD VOLUME – Determine the hazard volume by Butadiene 34 41
physically measuring the enclosure and calculating its Butane 28 34
volume. Make a sketch noting any permanent installa- Butane-1 31 37
Carbon Disulfide 60 72
tions that would affect the flow of the agent into the Carbon Monoxide 53 64
enclosure or affect piping installation. Note any partially Coal or Natural Gas 31* 37
enclosed areas that require special consideration to Cyclopropane 31 37
ensure complete flooding of the space. NFPA 12 states Diethyl Ether 33 40
“in figuring the net cubic capacity to be protected, due Dimethyl Ether 33 40
Dowtherm 38* 46
allowance may be made for permanent nonremovable Ethane 33 40
impermeable structures materially reducing the Ethyl Alcohol 36 43
volume.’’ Ethyl Ether 38* 46
Ethylene 41 49
CALCULATING % OF UNCLOSABLE OPENING – The Ethylene Dichloride 21 34
total area of unclosable openings must not exceed 3% of Ethylene Oxide 44 53
the total hazard area. To calculate the percent of Gasoline 28 34
unclosable opening, first total the surface area of the Hexane 29 35
hazard walls, floor, and ceiling. Then total the area of all Higher Paraffin 28 34
Hydrocarbons
the unclosable openings. Once both totals have been Cm H2m + 2m - 5
recorded, divide the total area of all openings by the total Hydrogen 62 75
area of the hazard and then multiply that number by 100. Hydrogen Sulfide 30 36
Isobutane 30* 36
Total Unclosable Opening Area divided by Total Hazard Isobutylene 26 34
Area x 100 = % of Unclosable Openings. Isobutyl Formate 26 34
The number arrived at will be the percentage of JP-4 30 36
Kerosene 28 34
unclosable openings. If the number is above 3%, Methane 25 34
arrangements must be made to close some of the Methyl Acetate 29 35
openings upon discharge of the system. Methyl Alcohol 33 40
Methyl Butene – I 30 36
AGENT QUANTITY – The quantity of agent required for Methyl Ethyl Ketone 33 40
extinguishment is dependent upon whether the fire is a Methyl Formate 32 39
surface-type or deep-seated. Pentane 29 35
Propane 30 36
• Surface Fires: It is assumed that extinguishment will Propylene 30 36
occur as soon as the necessary concentration is Quench Lube Oils 28 34
achieved. Minimum design concentration for many NOTE: The theoretical minimum extinguishing concentrations in air for the above materials
common flammable liquids are given in Figure 1. were obtained from a compilation of Bureau of Mines Limits of Flammability of Gases
and Vapors (Bulletins 503 and 627). Those marked with * were calculated from
For materials not listed in this table, values must be accepted residual oxygen values.
obtained from a recognized source or obtained by
testing. The minimum design concentration used for FIGURE 1
any hazard must not be less than 34%.
6-1
Section 6 – Design
REV. 1
APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) – For ventilating systems that cannot be shut down,
Total Flooding (Continued) additional carbon dioxide shall be added to the space
through the regular distribution system in an amount
Because some carbon dioxide escapes from the computed by dividing the volume moved during the
enclosure with the displaced air, the actual amount of liquid discharge period by the flooding factor. This
agent required is greater than the theoretical amount. shall be multiplied by the material conversion factor
For example, to achieve a carbon dioxide concentration when the design concentration is greater than 34
of 34% would ideally require about one pound of carbon percent.
dioxide per 26 cubic feet of space. However, in actual
practice, one pound of carbon dioxide is required per 22 – For extreme temperature conditions, the following
cubic feet of space to achieve 34% concentration. compensations must be made:
For enclosures of less than 50,000 cubic feet, the If the enclosure temperature is above 200 °F (93 °C),
minimum quantities of agent and volume factors given in the quantity of agent must be increased by 1% for
Figure 2 must be adhered to. each five degrees above 200 °F (93 °C).
Volume Factors If the temperature is below 0 °F (–17 °C), the agent
quantity must be increased by 1% for each one
Volume of Volume Factor Calculated
degree below 0 °F (–17 °C).
Space (cu. ft. (cu. ft. (lb. CO2 Quantity (lb.)
inclusive) lb. CO2) cu. ft.) Not Less Than To calculate the minimum agent quantity required for a
Up to 140 14 .072 – total flooding surface fire, complete the following steps:
141 - 500 15 .067 10 1. Refer to Figure 1 to determine the correct design
501 - 1600 16 .063 35 concentration for the type of hazard material.
1601 - 4500 18 .056 100 Example: A 4500 cubic ft. hazard contains barrels of
4501 - 50000 20 .050 250 JP-4 fuel. Referring to the table, JP-4 fuel requires a
Over 50000 22 .046 2500 carbon dioxide concentration of 36%.
FIGURE 2 2. Refer to the “Volume Factors” in Figure 2. Using the
previously calculated hazard volume, determine the
The higher concentration achieved from using this table required amount of carbon dioxide by dividing the
is based on the assumption that the leakage from a hazard volume (in cubic feet) by the Volume Factor
small enclosure will be greater on a volumetric basis, for cu. ft./lb. CO2 (or multiply by lb. CO2/cu. ft.) deter-
than from a large enclosure. If the minimum design con- mined in the table. Example: The sample hazard has
centration is greater than 34% for the hazard, the a volume of 4500 cubic feet. Dividing 4500 cubic feet
volume factor must be multiplied by the material con- by 18 (volume factor) equals 250 lbs. of carbon dio-
version factor listed in Figure 3 to achieve the required xide required. If the sample hazard material had re-
greater concentration. quired a design concentration of 34%, no additional
Material Conversion Factors calculation steps would be required to determine total
quantity of carbon dioxide. Because the example
hazard requires 36% design concentration, an addi-
tional step must be completed to determine amount of
carbon dioxide required. Continue with Step 3.
3. For materials requiring a design concentration
CONVERSION FACTOR
greater than 34%, refer to Figure 3. After determining

the amount of carbon dioxide required in Step 2, cal-
culate the new amount required by following the
graph in this figure. Example: The sample hazard
contains JP-4 fuel. This fuel requires a design con-
centration of 36%. Find 36% on the bottom of the
graph. Follow the line up until it intersects with the
curved line. At that point, read across to the left to
determine the conversion factor. In this case, the
MINIMUM DESIGN CO2 CONCENTRATION – % conversion factor is 1.1 on the left side of the graph.
FIGURE 3 To complete the calculation, multiply the quantity of
001858 carbon dioxide determined in Step 2 (250 lbs.) by the
Special conditions that may occur must be compen- conversion factor of 1.1 which equals 275. There-
sated for as follows: fore, 275 lbs. is the required amount of carbon
dioxide needed for this sample hazard.
6-2
REV. 1
100
APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) 90
80
Total Flooding (Continued) 70
0%
CO 2
60 10 90
After calculating the minimum amount of carbon dioxide 50 80
40 70
required, add to it any additional carbon dioxide needed 60
Leakage Rate in lbs. CO2/min./sq. ft.

to compensate for loss through openings, extreme tem- 30
50
perature ranges, etc., as stated in the beginning of this 40

20
section.
30
To determine the additional amount of CO2 required to

compensate for the loss through the unclosable 20
10
9
openings, refer to Figure 4. Determine the height from 8
7
the top of the hazard down to the center of the 6
unclosable opening. 5 10
4
Find this dimension on the bottom line of the chart. Read
3
up the chart to the diagonal line representing the % of
CO2 being designed for. At that intersect point, read to 2
the left to determine the leakage rate in lbs. of CO2 per For SI Units
1 ft. = 0.302 m
minute per sq. ft. of opening. 1 lb./min./ft.2 = 4.89 kg/min./m2
Finally, multiply this number by 1/2 of the sq. ft. area of 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100
the unclosable opening. This will now give the additional Feet Height of Atmosphere Above Center of Opening
amount of CO2 required which must be added to the
previous total. Remember, use only 1/2 of the total FIGURE 4
001859
opening area since it is presumed that fresh air will enter

•Deep-Seated Fires: For deep-seated fires, the con-
through one-half of the opening and the protective gas
centration of agent must be maintained for a sub-
will exit through the other half.
stantial period of time, but not less than 20 minutes, to
The following example will help understand this calcu- assure extinguishment. This consideration demands
lation: that the enclosure be relatively leak proof. Any leakage
– Based on the previous example requiring 275 lbs. of must be given careful consideration. The agent con-
CO2, now assume that the hazard has one unclosable centration is dependent upon the type of combustible
opening of 2 ft. x 3 ft. This is an area of 6 sq. ft. The material present. See Figure 5 to determine the correct
center of the opening is 8 ft. down from the ceiling of flooding factors for deep-seated fires.
the hazard. The JP-4 fuel requires a carbon dioxide Flooding Factors For Specific Hazards (Deep Seated)
concentration of 36%. Referring to the chart in Figure
4, find 8 ft. on the bottom line. Follow up the line until it Flooding Factor
intersects approximately 36% on the diagonal line. Design (cu. (lb.
Reading over to the left gives a leakage rate of approx- Concen- ft./lb. CO2/
imately 20 lbs. per min. per sq. ft. of opening. Now mul- trations % CO2 cu. ft.) Specific Hazard
tiply 20 lbs. x 3 sq. ft. (1/2 the total opening area) = 60 50 10 .100 Dry electric,wiring
lbs. 60 lbs. of additional CO2 must now be added to the insulation hazards
original amount of 275 lbs. for a new total of 335 lbs. in general. Spaces
0-2000 cu ft.
50 12 .083 Spaces greater

than 2000 cu ft.
65 8 .125 Record (bulk paper)

storage, ducts, and
covered trenches
75 6 .166 Fur storage vaults,

dust collectors
FIGURE 5
6-3
APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) When locating the nozzles, draw a sketch of the hazard
Total Flooding (Continued) and place the location of the nozzles on it. Dimension
the location of the nozzles from the walls or major com-
Special situations must be given the same considera- ponents in the hazard area. These locations and dimen-
tions previously mentioned under “special conditions,” sions will be used later to determine piping lengths and
Page 6-2. If the agent concentration must be maintained number of fittings.
for an extended period of time, the agent discharge time
must be increased accordingly to maintain the minimum NOZZLE TYPE – Again, there is no exact science when
concentration required. choosing a nozzle for total flooding. Some style nozzles
are better suited for certain type of hazards than others.
For unusually tight enclosures, venting may be required Listed below are the styles of available total flooding
to prevent a dangerous buildup of pressure within the nozzles and a short description of their discharge char-
enclosure. Small leaks in normal enclosures have been acteristics and possible usage:
found to provide adequate venting in most cases.
• A or D Type Nozzle – Produces a soft discharge.
To calculate the minimum agent quantity required for a Generally used in sub-floor areas where a too strong of
deep-seated fire, complete the following steps: discharge would drive the carbon dioxide out of the
1. Refer to Figure 5 to determine the correct design con- area.
centration for the type of material being protected. • Sealed Type Nozzle – Sealed to prevent dirt or vapors
Example: 4000 cubic foot fur storage vault is being from getting into the piping network. Generally used in
protected. This requires a concentration of 75%. ducts, hoods, or enclosed machinery spaces.
2. Again, referring to Figure 5, note the correct “Flooding • Regular Type Nozzle – Produces a high velocity spray
Factor” to use for the type of material being protected. type pattern. Generally used in ducts and small
In this example, the correct flooding factor for a fur enclosed hazards.
storage vault is 6.
• Baffle Type Nozzle – Fan shape pattern. Spreads
3. To determine the required amount of carbon dioxide agent rapidly. Most commonly used nozzle for rooms
needed, divide the total hazard volume by the flooding and enclosed spaces. Usually mounted near ceiling.
factor volume. Example: The total hazard volume of
this example is 4000 cubic feet. The required flooding EXTENDED RATE OF APPLICATION – Where leakage
factor is 6. Therefore, 4000 divided by 6 equals 667 is appreciable and the design concentration must be
lbs. of carbon dioxide required to protect this hazard. obtained quickly and maintained for an extended period
of time, carbon dioxide provided for leakage compen-
After calculating the minimum amount of carbon dioxide sation may be applied at a reduced rate using small
required, add to it any additional amount needed to com- orifice nozzles.
pensate for loss through openings, extreme tempera-
tures, ventilating systems, etc., as stated in the • This type of system is particularly applicable to
beginning of this section. enclosed rotating electrical apparatus, such as gener-
ators, motors, and convertors, but it may also be used
NUMBER OF NOZZLES – There is no exact science on ordinary total flooding applications where suitable.
when it comes to placing discharge nozzles in a hazard
area. Some of the rules that should be followed are: The minimum design concentration shall be obtained
within the limits specified below:
• 20 ft. maximum spacing between nozzles – total
flooding only • For surface fires, the design concentration shall be
achieved within 1 minute.
• Not more than 10 ft. from a wall or major obstruction –
total flooding only • If a part of the hazard is to be protected by total
flooding, the discharge rate for the total flooding
• Try not to locate the nozzle near an unclosable portion shall be computed by dividing the quantity
opening – unless using for screening required for total flooding by the factor 1.4 and by the
• Make certain nothing interferes with the discharge time of the local application discharge in minutes.
pattern of the nozzle • For deep-seated fires, the design concentration shall
• Make certain the nozzle is not located so that it causes be achieved within 7 minutes, but the rate shall be not
unduly splash of flammable liquids or creates dust less than that required to develop a concentration of 30
clouds that might extend the fire, create an explosion, percent in 2 minutes.
or otherwise adversely affect the contents of the
enclosure.
6-4
REV. 2
APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) DETERMINE NOZZLE PLACEMENT – Local appli-

Total Flooding (Continued) cation carbon dioxide fire suppression systems employ
overhead type nozzles. Each nozzle is rated for a spe-
The extended rate of discharge shall be sufficient to cific flow rate at a given height over the protected
maintain the minimum concentration. surface. The nozzle is also rated to protect a specific
For enclosed rotating electrical equipment, a minimum square area based on a side-of-square dimension at a
concentration of 30% shall be maintained for the decel- given height and flow rate. The overhead nozzles are
eration period, but not less than 20 minutes. not restricted to placement exactly perpendicular to the
HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS – For estimating pur- surface they are protecting. These nozzles may be
poses, see Figure 18 to approximately determine the installed at angles between 45° and 90° (perpendicular)
size of piping required for carbon dioxide discharge. from the plane of the hazard surface. See Figure 6 and
Consult your piping sketch and determine flow rate and 7. The following chart lists the aiming factors for angular
approximate pipe sizes. These pipe sizes are not to be placement of nozzles, based on a 6-inch freeboard.
used for final hydraulic system design. The designer
Discharge Angle (1) Aiming Factor (2)
must have knowledge of and access to the ANSUL
45° - 59° 1/4
ANSCALC Version 2.0 HYDRAULIC CALCULATION
60° - 74° 1/4 - 3/8
PROGRAM. See Appendix section of this manual.
75° - 89° 3/8 - 1/2
Local Application 90° (Perpendicular) 1/2 (Center)
DISCHARGE TIME – The discharge time for local appli- (1) Degrees from plane of hazard surface
cation systems is a minimum of 30 seconds. This (2) Fractional amount of nozzle coverage side-of-square
applies to normal fuels such as quench oil. When pro-
tecting fuels with an auto-ignition point below its boiling Local Application Nozzle Ranges
point, such as paraffin wax or cooking oils, the effective
discharge time is increased to 3 minutes. This increase
X IN.
is to permit cooling of the fuel to prevent reignition. X IN.
90° 60°
RATE OF DISCHARGE – Nozzle discharge rates shall
be determined by either the area method or the volume
method:
L L
• The area method of system design is used where the 2 4
fire hazard consists of flat surfaces or low level objects
associated with horizontal surfaces. L L
• The volume method of system design is used where

NOTE: Distance “X” and the flow rate are the same in both cases; only the aiming point for the
the fire hazard consists of three-dimensional irregular nozzle changes.
objects that cannot be easily reduced to equivalent FIGURE 6
001860
surface areas.
Local Application Nozzle Ranges
6MDL
MOST COMMONLY USED 6MD
144 IN.
CONE 132 IN. MAX.
MAX. (365.7 cm)
“D” (335.2 cm)
120 IN.
108 IN.
MAX.
MAX.
“A” (304.8 cm)
(274.3 cm)
91 1/2 IN.
MAX.
72 IN. (232.4 cm)
MAX.
(182.8 cm)
42 IN. MIN.
36 IN. MIN.
(106.6 cm)
18 IN. MIN. 15 IN. MIN. (91.4 cm)
(45.7 cm) (38.1 cm)
PROTECTED SURFACE
FIGURE 7
001861
6-5
APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) “D” Nozzle

Local Application (Continued) UL FM Side of Square
The nozzle height above the hazard will determine flow Height Flow Rate Liquid Wetted
rate and number of nozzles required, therefore, based (in.) (lb./min.) (ft.) (ft.)
on what the hazard configuration will allow, place the 15 11.0 11.0 1.58 1.87
nozzles as close to the hazard as possible. This will then 18 12.5 12.8 1.71 2.00
allow for the least number of nozzles and the least total 21 14.3 14.6 1.85 2.17
amount of agent. 24 16.0 16.4 1.97 2.32
27 17.5 18.2 2.11 2.51
DETERMINE NOZZLE TYPE – Figure 8 through Figure
30 19.0 20.0 2.24 2.65
12 show the overhead nozzle ratings for flow rate and
33 20.5 21.8 2.24 2.65
side-of-square for specific heights above the surface
36 22.0 23.6 2.24 2.65
being protected. For liquid or wetted surfaces, (rate by
39 23.3 25.4 2.24 2.65
area) 6 in. Multi-Discharge, Type "A", Type "D", or Cone
42 24.7 26.0 2.24 2.65
nozzles are normally used. For rate by volume, the 6 in.
45 26.0 26.6 2.24 2.65
Multi-Discharge is normally used. Be sure to compare
48 27.5 27.2 2.24 2.65
all nozzles and choose the most efficient one.
51 29.0 27.8 2.24 2.65
“A” Nozzle 54 30.5 28.4 2.24 2.65
UL FM
57 32.0 29.0 2.24 2.65
Flow Side of Flow Side of
60 33.5 30.7 2.24 2.65
Rate Square Rate Square
63 35.0 32.4 2.24 2.65
Height (lb./ Liquid Wetted (lb./ Liquid Wetted
66 36.5 34.1 2.24 2.65
(in.) min.) (ft.) (ft.) min.) (ft.) (ft.)
69 38.0 35.8 2.24 2.65
18 14.0 1.58 1.87 13.7 1.58 1.87 72 39.5 37.5 2.24 2.65
21 16.0 1.70 2.00 15.5 1.73 2.05 75 40.8 39.2 2.24 2.65
24 18.0 1.82 2.15 17.2 1.88 2.21 78 42.2 40.9 2.24 2.65
27 19.9 1.91 2.27 19.0 2.03 2.39 81 43.6 42.6 2.24 2.65
30 21.7 2.02 2.40 20.7 2.07 2.45 84 45.0 44.3 2.24 2.65
33 23.6 2.13 2.51 22.5 2.12 2.51 87 46.4 46.0 2.24 2.65
36 26.0 2.24 2.65 24.3 2.16 2.57 90 47.8 47.7 2.24 2.65
39 27.5 2.32 2.74 26.0 2.21 2.63 91 1/2 48.5 48.5 2.24 2.65
42 29.5 2.40 2.85 28.3 2.25 2.66
NOTE: These tables shall not be extrapolated beyond the upper or lower limits shower.
45 31.4 2.48 2.95 33.7 2.25 2.66
48 33.0 2.57 3.03 38.0 2.25 2.66 FIGURE 9
51 35.1 2.64 3.13 39.4 2.25 2.66
54 37.0 2.72 3.23 40.9 2.25 2.66
57 38.9 2.80 3.30 42.3 2.44 2.90
60 41.0 2.88 3.41 43.8 2.63 3.11
63 42.8 2.96 3.51 45.2 2.81 3.33
64 1/2 44.0 3.00 3.55 45.9 2.90 3.44
66 44.8 3.00 3.55 46.6 3.00 3.55
69 46.6 3.00 3.55 48.1 3.00 3.55
72 48.5 3.00 3.55 49.5 3.00 3.55
NOTE: These tables shall not be extrapolated beyond the upper or lower limits shown.
FIGURE 8
6-6
APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) 6MD Nozzle

Local Application (Continued) UL/FM Side of Square
CONE NOZZLE Height Flow Rate Liquid Wetted
(in.) (lb./min.) (ft.) (ft.)
UL/FM Side of Square
Height Flow Rate Liquid Wetted 36 28.5 2.26 2.66
(in.) (lb./min.) (ft.) (ft.) 39 31.0 2.32 2.74
42 21.0 2.47 2.91 42 33.0 2.38 2.81
45 35.5 2.43 2.88
45 26.5 2.67 3.16
48 38.0 2.49 2.95
48 31.5 2.86 3.39
51 40.0 2.55 3.02
51 37.0 3.03 3.59 54 42.5 2.61 3.08
54 41.5 3.20 3.78 57 45.0 2.66 3.15
57 46.5 3.36 3.97 60 47.0 2.72 3.21
60 51.5 3.51 4.14 63 49.5 2.77 3.28
63 57.0 3.65 4.31 66 52.0 2.83 3.35
66 62.0 3.80 4.48 69 54.0 2.88 3.41
69 67.0 3.92 4.63 72 56.5 2.93 3.46
72 72.0 4.05 4.78 75 58.5 2.98 3.52
75 77.0 4.17 4.94 78 61.0 3.03 3.59
78 82.0 4.29 5.08 81 63.5 3.08 3.65
84 66.0 3.13 3.70
81 87.0 4.41 5.23
87 68.0 3.18 3.76
84 92.0 4.53 5.36
90 70.5 3.23 3.81
87 97.0 4.64 5.49 93 73.0 3.27 3.87
90 102.0 4.75 5.61 96 75.5 3.32 3.92
93 107.0 4.85 5.75 99 77.0 3.36 3.97
96 112.5 4.96 5.86 102 79.5 3.40 4.02
99 117.0 4.98 5.89 105 82.0 3.43 4.06
102 122.0 5.00 5.91 108 84.5 3.47 4.11
105 127.0 5.00 5.91 111 86.5 3.53 4.18
108 132.0 5.00 5.91 114 89.0 3.53 4.18
117 91.5 3.53 4.18
Note: These tables shall not be extrapolated beyond the upper or lower limits shown.
120 94.0 3.53 4.18
FIGURE 10 123 96.0 3.53 4.18
126 98.0 3.53 4.18
129 100.5 3.53 4.18
132 103.0 3.53 4.18
FIGURE 11
6MDL Nozzle
UL/FM Side of Square

Height Flow Rate Liquid Wetted
(in.) (lb./min.) (ft.) (ft.)
120 86.0 3.39 4.01
123 89.0 3.48 4.11
126 91.5 3.56 4.22
129 94.0 3.64 4.31
132 97.0 3.71 4.39
135 100.0 3.80 4.48
138 102.5 3.88 4.58
141 105.0 3.95 4.67
144 108.0 4.02 4.76
FIGURE 12
6-7
REV. 1
APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) SAMPLE PROBLEMS –The following two sample

Local Application (Continued) problems, rate by area, and rate by volume, are struc-
tured to lead you, step by step, through each of the
DETERMINE NUMBER OF NOZZLES – The number of required areas for designing a local application system.
nozzles required is based on the length and width of the
hazard area. After the type of nozzle has been chosen • Rate by area: A typical dip tank (9 ft. long x 3 ft. wide)
and the height above the hazard has been determined, and drainboard (6 ft. long x 3 ft. wide) is to be pro-
refer to the appropriate figure (Figures 8-12) for that tected by means of a local application carbon dioxide
nozzle and record the listed “side-of-square.” Then, use system. The parts to be dipped are fed into the dip
the following formula to determine total number of tank by means of an overhead conveyor system.
nozzles required: Attached to the dip tank is a drainboard to reclaim any
excess from the dripping operation. To allow for main-
Number of tenance to the conveyor, tank, or drain, the customer
Nozzles Required = Linear Length x Linear Width requests that the overhead nozzles be placed no
Side-Of-Square Side-Of-Square closer than 30 inches from the surface being pro-
AGENT QUANTITY – In the case of local application tected. Since the conveyor system runs along the
type carbon dioxide fire suppression systems, only the center line of the dip tank and drain, the conveyor may
liquid portion of the discharge is considered effective. interfere with the effectiveness of overhead nozzles
The calculated quantity of agent, then, shall always be placed directly over the protected surface. The
increased by 40%. This is done through the use of a mul- solution to the problem, then, is to place overhead
tiplier with a value of 1.4 (140%). nozzles on either side of the conveyor and orientate
them by means of the Aiming Factor Chart, Figure 7.
The agent quantity formula is as follows:
This orientation of the nozzles will not affect the agent
Amount of quantity required, but merely provide an aiming point
Agent Required = Number of Nozzles x Flow Rate on the protected surface for installation purposes.
Per Nozzle x 1.4 x Discharge
Time Required Once the placement of the nozzles have been deter-
mined, the nozzle type and number is required.
The number of cylinders required is obtained by dividing
the total pounds of agent required by the size of the Referring to the Nozzle Range Table, Figure 8, it is
agent storage container to be used and then rounding noted that both the “A” Type and the “D” Type nozzle
the result up to the next whole number. will permit placement in a range that is acceptable for
the sample problem.
It should be noted that even though all the overhead
nozzles meet the criteria of the example problem, the
further the nozzle is from the hazard surface, the
higher the flow rate must be; and, therefore, more
agent is require.
The following table compares the “A” and “D” Type
nozzles for the liquid surface protection of the dip
tank:
Side-of Total
Nozzle Height Flow Rate Square Number Flow
Type (in.) (lb./min.) (ft.) Required* (lb./min.)
“A” 30 21.7 2.02 10 217
“D” 30 19.0 2.24 8 152
*Number Required = Linear Length x Linear Width
Side-Of-Square Side-Of-Square
6-8
REV. 1
APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) Wetted Surfaces = 6 “D” Nozzles x 19.0 lbs./min./

Local Application (Continued) Quantity nozzle x 1.4 x .05 minutes.
= 79.8 lbs. of carbon dioxide required
With this comparison, it can easily be seen that of the
two types of nozzles, the “D” type nozzle will provide the Total Agent = 106.4 lbs. + 79.8 lbs. = 186.2
protection required with the fewest number of nozzles Required Total lbs.
and the least amount of agent.
For the liquid surface of the dip tank, the “D” type Using 100 lb. cylinders.
nozzle at a height of 30 in. will protect an area having a
side-of-square of 2.24 feet. The number required to Number of = Agent Required = 186.2 lbs. = 2-100 lb.
protect the dip tank is: Cylinders Cylinder Size 100 lb./cyl. cylinders
Number Required = Linear Length x Linear Width Since the agent supply is larger than required, the dis-
Side-Of-Square Side-Of-Square charge time will be somewhat greater than 30 seconds.
= 9.0 ft. x 3.0 ft.
2.24 ft. 2.24 ft. NOTICE
= 4.0 x 1.34 Do not increase flow rate as this may
=4x2 cause splashing of fuel.
= 8 "D" Nozzles at 30 in. and
19.0 lb./min.flow rate each.
Another type of local application system is the rate by
For the wetted surface of the drainboard, the “D” type volume method. This type should be considered when
nozzle at a height of 30 in. will protect an area having a the fire hazard consists of three-dimensional irregular
side-of-square of 2.65 feet. The number required to objects that cannot be easily reduced to equivalent
protect the drainboard is: surface areas.
Number Required = Linear Length x Linear Width Rate by volume (assumed enclosure): When attempting
Side-Of-Square Side-Of-Square to design a system using this approach, several factors
= 6.0 ft. x 3.0 ft. most be considered:
2.65 ft. 2.65 ft. • The total discharge rate of the system shall be based
= 2.26 x 1.13 on the volume of an assumed enclosure entirely sur-
=3x2 rounding the hazard.
= 6 "D" Nozzles at 30 in. and
• The assumed enclosure shall be based on an actual
19.0 lb./min. flow rate each.
closed floor unless special provisions are made to
Now that the type, number and flow rate of each nozzle take care of bottom conditions, such as local appli-
has been determined, the quantity of agent may now be cation or rate by area design applied from underneath.
calculated.
• The assumed walls and ceiling of the enclosure shall
It should again be noted that only the liquid portion of be at least 2 ft. from the main hazard unless actual
the discharge is considered effective. The quantity of walls are involved and shall enclose all areas of pos-
agent must, therefore, be increased by 40%. To do this, sible leakage, splashing, or spillage.
the calculation includes a multiplier of 1.4 (140%).
• No reduction shall be made for solid objects within the
Also, the discharge time for local application systems volume.
protecting hazards containing normal fuels shall be a
• A minimum dimension of 4 ft. shall be used in calcu-
minimum of 30 second (0.5 minutes).
lating the volume of the assumed enclosure.
Given the above parameters the following calculations
• If the hazard may be subject to winds or forced drafts,
for agent quantity can be made:
the assumed volume shall be increased to com-
Quantity of Agent = Number of Nozzles x Flow Rate pensate for losses on the windward sides.
per Nozzle x 1.4 x Discharge Time
• The total discharge rate for the basic system shall be
equal to 1 lb./min./cu. ft. of assumed volume.
Liquid Surface = 8 “D” Nozzles x 19.0
Quantity lbs./min./nozzle x 1.4 x .05
minutes.
6-9
REV. 1
APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) The next step is to determine the total amount of carbon
Local Application (Continued) dioxide required. This is done by multiplying the total
volume x the flow rate per minute per cu. ft. x the liquid
• If the assumed enclosure has a closed floor and is carbon dioxide factor of 1.4 x the minimum discharge
partly defined by permanent continuous walls time of 30 seconds. In this example the total volume is
extending at least 2 ft. above the hazard (where the 420 cu. ft., the flow rate per minute per cu. ft. is 1 lb.
walls are not normally a part of the hazard), the dis- when no reduction is figured in for walls, therefore, the
charge rate may be proportionately reduced to not formula is:
less than 0.25 lb./min./cu. ft. actual walls completely
surrounding the enclosure. 420 (volume in cu. ft.) x 1 (flow rate per minute) x 1.4
(liquid factor) x .5 (minimum discharge time) = 294 lbs.
Rate by volume is normally a less cost efficient way to of agent required.
protect a hazard but this approach should be considered
if no other appropriate means of protection is available. The next step is to determine the number of cylinders
required. This is accomplished by dividing the total
The first approach to look at in designing a rate by amount of agent by the size of cylinder chosen and then
volume system is to design the system assuming there rounding up to the next whole number.
are no walls around or near the hazard. This approach
requires increasing the hazard size by 2 ft. all around 294 (total carbon dioxide) divided by 100 (size of
(assume volume) and designing the system for this cylinder chosen) = 2.94 or 3 cylinders required
increased size. (rounded up).
The following example will take you through the nec- Now, review the hazard to determine where to locate the
essary steps. nozzles and how many nozzles will be required. There is
no exact science for locating local application nozzles.
Example 1: The hazard in question is a back-up gen- Choose as many nozzles as you feel it may take to ade-
erator located in a corner of a warehouse. The generator quately cover the assumed volume. The nozzles should
itself is 6 ft. long x 3 ft. wide x 4 ft. high. When utilizing the be mounted around the perimeter of the assumed
first approach to designing a rate by volume system, add volume and pointed at the hazard. In this example, four
2 ft. completely around the hazard. This then gives a nozzles have been chosen. Nozzles should be placed to
total hazard size of 10 ft. long x 7 ft. wide x 6 ft. high. This keep agent in assumed enclosure.
increase in size now gives an assumed volume of
420 cu. ft. See Figure 13. Next step is to determine flow rate per nozzle by dividing
the total amount of agent by the number of nozzles:
294 (total lbs. of agent) divided by 4 (total number of
nozzles) = 73.5 lbs./min. flow rate.
If no other rate by volume designs were to be looked at,
6 FT.
then the next step would be to sketch the piping configu-
(1.82 m) ration and proceed to the hydraulic calculation program
4 FT.
(1.21 m) to determine pipe sizes. In this example though, we will
3 FT. 6 FT. continue on and look at additional types of rate by
(.91 m) (1.82 m) volume designs for this same hazard.
Example 2: The next approach to this hazard would be
10 FT.
7 FT. (3.04 m) to consider what the system requirements would be by
(2.13 m)
designing the system utilizing the actual walls which are
FIGURE 13 on two sides of the hazard.
001862
6-10
REV. 1
APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) Next, determine the % of closed perimeter (actual walls)
Local Application (Continued) compared to the total perimeter (total of assumed walls
and actual walls). This is done by adding the actual wall
The following steps detail this type of local application, lengths and dividing that number by the total of all walls
rate by volume, approach: (both actual and assumed). In this example, the actual
The first step is to determine the new assumed volume. walls total 25 ft. (14 + 11) and the total perimeter totals
This is done by adding two ft. to the sides of the hazard 50 ft. (14 + 14 + 11 + 11). See Figure 15.
which are not enclosed by actual walls and using the
actual distance that the hazard is from the actual walls.
Again, in determining volume, two ft. must also be
added to the height of the actual hazard. Determine the
assumed volume by multiplying the length, width, and
height together. See Figure 14.
14 ft. long x 11 ft. wide x 6 ft. high = 924 cu. ft.
14 FT.
11 FT.
(4.26 m)
(3.35 m)
2 FT.
(.61 m)
FIGURE 15
001864
6 FT.
(1.82 m) % of enclosure = 25 ft. divided by 50 ft. = .5
4 FT. .5 x 100 = 50% perimeter closed
(1.21m)
3 FT.
(.9 m) 6 FT.
6 FT. (1.82 m)
(1.82 m)
6 FT.
14 FT.
11 FT. (1.82 m)
(4.26 m)
(3.35 m)
2 FT. 2 FT.
(.61 m) (.61 m)
FIGURE 14
001863
6-11
REV. 1
APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) Example 3: Once again, we are dealing with the same
Local Application (Continued) volume as Example 2 (924 cu. ft.) but this time the
hazard has been enclosed on the two open sides by the
Now, knowing that 50% of the perimeter is closed, refer addition of a concrete block wall. See Figure 17. The
to the “Rate By Volume – Assumed Enclosure Chart,” only wall opening that exists now is a 3.5 ft. opening for
Figure 16, to determine the required nozzle discharge access to the generator. Remember, the additional wall
rate. must only be 2 ft. higher than the actual hazard.
Rate By Volume (Assumed Enclosure)
Perimeter Closed Discharge Rate
0% 1#/min./CF 3 FT. 6 IN.
10% .925#/min./CF (1.1 m)
15% .8875#/min./CF
20% .85#/min./CF 6 FT.
(1.82 m)
25% .8225#/min./CF
30% .775#/min./CF
14 FT.
35% .7375#/min./CF 11 FT. (4.26 m)
(3.35 m)
40% .70#/min./CF
45% .6625#/min./CF
FIGURE 17
50% .625#/min./CF 001865
55% .5875#/min./CF Now, determine the % of closed perimeter (actual walls)

60% .55#/min./CF compared to the total perimeter (total of assumed walls
65% .512#/min./CF and actual walls). This is accomplished by adding the
70% .475#/min./CF actual wall lengths and dividing that number by the total
75% .4375#/min./CF of all walls (both actual and assumed). In this example,
the actual walls total 46.5 ft. (14 + 11 + 14 + 7.5) and the
80% .40#/min./CF total perimeter totals 50 ft. (14 + 14 + 11 + 11).
85% .3625#/min./CF
90% .325#/min./CF % of enclosure = 46.5 ft. divided by 50 ft. = .93
93% .310#/min./CF .93 x 100 = 93% perimeter closed
95% .290#/min./CF Referring to the “Rate By Volume” – Assumed
100% .25#/min./CF Enclosure Chart,” Figure 16, 93% closed perimeter
FIGURE 16 allows a discharge rate of .31 lb./min./cu. ft. Knowing
this, the total amount of carbon dioxide required can
Referring to the chart, 50% closed perimeter allows a
now be calculated by the following formula:
discharge rate of .625 lb./min./cu. ft. Knowing this, the
total amount of carbon dioxide required can now be cal- Total agent required = Volume x Flow Rate per
culated by the following formula: Minute Per Cu. Ft. x 1.4 (liquid factor) x .5 (minimum
Total agent required = Volume x Flow Rate per minute discharge time)
per cu. ft. x 1.4 (liquid factor) x .5 (minimum discharge 924 cu. ft. x .31 lb./min./cu. ft. x 1.4 x .5 = 200 lb. of
time). carbon dioxide required.
924 cu. ft x .625 lb./min./cu. ft. x 1.4 x .5 = 404 lb. of As you can see, by having the customer install a fairly
carbon dioxide required. inexpensive wall, the hazard can be protected by 2-100
At this point, it appears that this approach is not as cost lb. cylinders instead of the next least amount of three as
effective as Example No. 1 using the assumed volume calculated in Example 1.
method with no walls. But, if the closed perimeter
approach is looked at by having the customer install
some inexpensive, non-combustible concrete block
walls around the open side of the hazard, the results
may be considerably different.
Assume that the customer will install 6 ft. high walls
around the open sides of the hazard, calculate the
amount of agent required by following the steps in
Example 3.
6-12
REV. 1
APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) The rate and duration of discharge and consequently
Local Application (Continued) the amount of carbon dioxide shall be determined by the
type and potential size of the hazard. A hand hose line
HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS – For estimating pur- shall have a sufficient quantity of carbon dioxide to
poses, the following Figure 18 can be used to approxi- permit its use for at least 1 minute.
mately determine the size of piping required for carbon
dioxide discharge. Consult your piping sketch and The carbon dioxide supply shall be located as close to
determine flow rate and approximate pipe sizes. These the hose reel as possible so that liquid carbon dioxide
pipe sizes are not to be used for final hydraulic system will be supplied to the hose line with a minimum of delay
design. after actuation.
Nominal Flow Refer to UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory, under
With Average Maximum Flow section titled Carbon Dioxide System Units, Hand Hose
Pipe Size Conditions With Short Runs Line (FYWZ) for equivalent lengths of hose line compo-
(in.) Schedule (lbs./min.) (lbs./min.) nents.
1/2 40 60 100
3/4 40 150 200 DETECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Refer to ANSUL AUTOPULSE Detection and Control
1 80 250 300 Installation, Programming, and Maintenance Manual.
1 1/4 80 500 600
1 1/2 80 800 900 Mechanical Detectors (Fusible Links)
The fusible link detection system can be used where a
2 80 1300 1600 self-contained, unsupervised, mechanical detection
2 1/2 80 2300 2500 system is desired or required. The detection system
allows for automatic detection by means of specific
3 80 3500 4000 rated fusible links, which, when the temperature
reaches the rating of the link, the link separates,
NOTE: This table is for estimating purposes only. Flow calculations are required for all
system installations. allowing the release mechanism to actuate.
Check valves or selector valves may be chosen through the use of this table.
Ansul’s recommendations for quantity and placement of
FIGURE 18 fusible link detectors are directly related to the hazard
The designer must have knowledge of and access to the type and application method used as followed:
ANSUL ANSCALC Version 2.0 HYDRAULIC CALCU- TOTAL FLOODING APPLICATION–Maximum spacing
LATION PROGRAM. See Appendix Section of this per detector is 100 sq. ft. and 5 ft. from a wall and 10 ft.
manual. between detectors with a maximum height (above
hazard) of 14 ft.
Hand Hose Lines
On ceiling heights above 14 ft. up to 20 ft. high, the
Hand hose line systems may be used to supplement maximum spacing per detector is 64 sq. ft. and 4 ft. from
fixed fire protection systems or to supplement first aid a wall and 8 ft. between detectors.
fire extinguishers for the protection of specific hazards
for which carbon dioxide is a suitable extinguishing NOTE: For sloped ceiling (peaked type or shed type)
agent. These systems shall not be used as a substitute installations, refer to NFPA-72, “National Fire Alarm
for other fixed carbon dioxide fire extinguishing systems Code” for detailed spacing requirements.
equipped with fixed nozzles, except where the hazard LOCAL APPLICATION – OVERHEAD (DETECTOR
cannot adequately or economically be provided with SPACING) – Maximum spacing per fusible link detector
fixed protection. The decision as to whether hose lines is 36 sq. ft. (3.3 sq. m or 3 ft. (.9 m) from edge of hazard
are applicable to the particular hazard shall rest with the and 6 ft. (1.8 m) between fusible link detectors.
authority having jurisdiction. When a detector(s) is mounted more than 1 ft. (.3 m)
Hand hose lines stations shall be placed such that they below ceiling or in an open area, heat trap(s) is recom-
are easily accessible and within reach of the most mended. Detectors should be mounted overhead at
distant hazard which they are expected to protect. In nozzle height or as close to the hazard as possible with-
general, they shall not be located such that they are out interference, not to exceed 10 ft. (3 m).
exposed to the hazard nor shall they be located inside Detectors should not be located where they will be sus-
any hazard area protected by a total flooding system. ceptible to damage during the normal work operation.
6-13
REV. 1
DETECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS (Continued) ACTUATION REQUIREMENTS
Mechanical Detectors (Fusible Links) (Continued) Three types of actuation are available for the Carbon
Dioxide system: manual, pneumatic, and electric.
LOCAL APPLICATION – TANKSIDE (DETECTOR
SPACING) – Detectors can be located either near the Manual Actuation
inner tank wall and flammable liquid surface or above Manual actuation can be used with or without automatic
the tank. If located above the tank, the rules for local detection. When no detection is required, the lever
application overhead would apply. If located on the tank actuator can be mounted on top of the carbon dioxide
wall, the detectors can be mounted horizontally or verti- cylinder valve. The manual lever release actuator pro-
cally in the freeboard area, but must be protected from vides a manual means of agent cylinder actuation by
damage during normal working operation. Detectors direct manual actuation of its pull lever or cable actu-
should be located at a maximum spacing per detector of ation when used in conjunction with a remote manual
3 ft. (.9 m) from edge of hazard and 6 ft. (1.8 m) pull station. In a two cylinder system, the remaining
between detectors on the long side of the tank. cylinder is actuated by the pressure generated within
FUSIBLE LINK SELECTION – In order to determine the the distribution manifold. In three or more cylinder
normal operating temperature at the fusible link systems, two lever actuators are required, and a con-
location, utilize a maximum registering thermometer, necting link is used to provide simultaneous actuation of
Part No. 15240. both manual cable-pull actuators. The maximum length
Select correct fusible link(s) for installation in detector(s) of actuator cable which may be used in the remote line is
according to the temperature condition chart below: 150 ft. The maximum number of corner pulley elbows is
10.
Temperature To Be Used Where
The second means of manual actuation can be accom-
Fusible Link Rating Temperature Does
plished by using a manual/pneumatic actuator. This
Part No. (See Figure 20) Not Exceed
actuator can be also used if pneumatic pressure or an
415739 165 °F (74 °C) 100 °F (38 °C)
electric signal is being supplied by the control panel of
415740 212 °F (100 °C) 150 °F (66 °C)
the automatic detection system. Manual actuation is
415741 280 °F (138 °C) 225 °F (107 °C)
accomplished by removing the ring pin and depressing
415742 360 °F (182 °C) 290 °F (143 °C)
the red palm button. One manual/pneumatic actuator is
415743 450 °F (232 °C) 360 °F (182 °C)
required in single or two cylinder systems.
56816 500 °F (260 °C) 400 °F (204 °C)
Pneumatic Actuation
Pneumatic actuation is used with pneumatic valve actu-
TEMPERATURE ators located on the carbon dioxide cylinder valves. The
RATING STAMPED
ON FUSIBLE pressure is supplied from an LT-30-R nitrogen cartridge
LINK BODY located in the ANSUL AUTOMAN and ANSUL
AUTOMAN II-C release. The pressure pneumatically
K STYLE
ML STYLE opens the cylinder valves. One pneumatic actuator is
500 °F (200 °C) ONLY
required in single or two cylinder systems and two actu-
000676b
FIGURE000171
19 ators are required in systems with three or more
cylinders. The maximum length of 1/4 in. Schedule 40
BEAMS AND CEILING OBSTRUCTIONS–Beams and pipe is 150 ft. If it is necessary to have an actuation pipe
ceiling obstructions may be present which could run which exceeds the maximum allowable 1/4 in. pipe
obstruct detector placement over the hazard. Additional requirements, 1/4 in. stainless steel tubing with a wall
detectors may be required to provide adequate pro- thickness of 0.065 can be used for the actuation line.
tection and to avoid obstructions. When this size tubing is used, a maximum of 300 ft., with
Lay Out the Detection and Control Components on no reductions for elbows or tees, is allowed.
the Hazard Sketch
Now that you have analyzed the hazard and selected
the detection and control hardware, you can complete a
sketch. The sketch should show the placement of the
accessories as well as the detection, control, and elec-
trical components.
6-14
REV. 1
ACTUATION REQUIREMENTS (Continued) ACCESSORIES
Electric Actuation Specific selection and placement of accessories that

may be used with the carbon dioxide are:
Electric actuation is used with the HF electric actuator
mounted on the carbon dioxide cylinder valve and an Electric or Mechanical Manual Pull
AUTOPULSE control system. See appropriate The electric or mechanical manual pull station allows
AUTOPULSE manual for detailed wiring information. the carbon dioxide system to be manually operated at
The AUTOPULSE control system also provides a super- some point distant from the control system or cylinders.
vised method of tank actuation without limits on the tank The pull station should be installed at a maximum height
location. In auxiliary or override applications, a manual- of 60 in. and located in the path of exit.
local override valve actuator or a lever actuator can be
installed on top of the HF actuator. The total length of wire rope used for each mechanical
manual pull station within a system must not exceed
A means of electric actuation of a selector valve is by the 150 ft.
use of a solenoid actuator assembly, Part No. 73111.
See appropriate AUTOPULSE manual for detailed The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be
wiring information. used per pull station is 10.
Parts that are required for installation of a remote
manual pull station, either electric or mechanical are:
Description Part No.
Latch Type Pull Box 45062
Type A Break Glass Pull Box 41527
Pair of Legs for Pull Box 41542
1/16 in. Cable W/Swaged End Fitting-50 ft. 42104
Aluminum Corner Pulley (Use With EMT) 45771
Brass Corner Pulley-Nylon Wheel-Watertight 42678
Brass Corner Pulley-Brass Wheel-Watertight 45515
Dual/Triple Control Box 42784
Pull Cable Equalizer 42791
Pull Cable Equalizer (Sector Valves) 43166
1/16 in. Cable Clamp 45333
Flared End Fitting 40060
Pulley Adaptor Right and Left Hand 40696
(Brass Pulley Only)
Electric Manual Pull Station, SPST–N.O. 78420
(Indoor Use Only)
Electric Manual Pull Station, SPST–N.O. 24741
(Indoor Use Only)
Electric Manual Pull Station, DPST–N.O. 24742
(Indoor Use Only)
Dual Action Electric Manual Pull Station, 78101
DPST–N.O. (Indoor Use Only)
Surface Mount Back Box 24871
(Fits Part No. 24741 and 24742)
Electric Manual Pull Station, Weatherproof, 34822
SPST–N.O. (Includes Surface Mount Back Box)
Selector Valves
Selector valves are used to direct the flow of carbon
dioxide into a single hazard of a multiple hazard system.
6-15
REV. 1
ACCESSORIES (Continued) Direction/Stop Valves

Selector valves can be operated by either pneumatic pres- Direction/stop valves are used to either manually control
sure, an electric signal to operate a solenoid valve attach- the flow of carbon dioxide into a hazard area or to man-
ment, remote cable pull, or manually at the valve. Selector ually control the flow into one of several hazards being
valves range in size from 1/2 in. to 4 in. When installing protected by a common bank of carbon dioxide
cable operated selector valves, the maximum length of cylinders. These valves are operated manually, either
1/16 in. cable that may be run to operate the selector valve by the use of a handle attached directly to the valve or by
is 150 ft. with a maximum of 10 pulley elbows. means of a remote pull box which operates a sector
All style of selector valves can be actuated manually or attached to the valve. Directional/stop valves can be
by remote cable when adding a lever actuator to the top used as a safety feature, keeping the flow of carbon
of the valve. dioxide from entering a hazard area, either because of a
false discharge or to allow the occupants enough time to
Parts that may be used for installation of selector valves
exit the area prior to the valve being manually opened.
are:
Description Part No. When installing a remote pull station to operate the
1/2 in. Electric Operated Selector Valve 42764 sector on a direction/stop valve, the maximum allowable
length of 1/16 in. cable is 150 ft. and the maximum
3/4 in. Electric Operated Selector Valve 42765
allowable number of pulley elbows is 10.
1 in. Electric Operated Selector Valve 42766
1 1/4 in. Electric Operated Selector Valve 42767 Parts that may be used with direction/stop valve instal-
1 1/2 in. Electric Operated Selector Valve 42768 lation are:
2, 2 1/2, 3 in. Electric Operated Selector Valve 46195 Description Part No.
4 in. Electric Operated Selector Valve 46202 1/2 in. Direction/Stop Valve (Valve Only) 41451
Electric Discharge Plug Connector 45535 3/4 in. Direction/Stop Valve (Valve Only) 41102
Electric Discharge Plug 77237 1 in. Direction/Stop Valve (Valve Only) 41354
1 1/4 in. Direction/Stop Valve (Valve Only) 41338
1/2 in. Pressure Operated Selector Valve 57428 1 1/2 in. Direction/Stop Valve (Valve Only) 41424
3/4 in. Pressure Operated Selector Valve 57429
1 in. Pressure Operated Selector Valve 57430 Handle–Normally Open (For Use With 40238
1 1/4 in. Pressure Operated Selector Valve 57431 1/2 in. Valve)
1 1/2 in. Pressure Operated Selector Valve 57432 Handle–Normally Open (For Use With 3/4 in. 40239
2, 2 1/2, 3 in. Pressure Operated 57433 and 1 in. Valves)
Selector Valve Handle–Normally Open (For Use With 1 1/4 in. 40259
4 in. Pressure Operated Selector Valve 57445 and 1 1/2 in. Valves)
1/2 in. Lever Operated Selector Valve 43348 Handle–Normally Closed (For Use With 40248
3/4 in. Lever Operated Selected Valve 46386 1/2 in. Valve)
1 in. Lever Operated Selector Valve 43349 Handle–Normally Closed (For Use With 40267
1 1/4 in. Lever Operated Selected Valve 43350 3/4 in. and 1 in. Valves)
1 1/2 in. Lever Operated Selector Valve 43351 Handle–Normally Closed (For Use With 46393
1 1/4 in. and 1 1/2 in. Valves)
2, 2 1/2, 3 in. Lever Operated Selector Valve 46194
4 in. Lever Operator Selector Valve 46201 Sector (For Use With 1/2 in. Valve) 40276
1/2 in. Solenoid Operated Selector Valve 415221 Sector (For Use With 3/4 in. and 1 in. Valves) 40279
3/4 in. Solenoid Operated Selector Valve 415222 Sector (For Use With 1 1/4 in. and 40281
1 in. Solenoid Operated Selector Valve 410223 1 1/2 in. Valves)
1 1/4 in. Solenoid Operated Selector Valve 415224
1 1/2 in. Solenoid Operated Selector Valve 415225
2, 2 1/2, 3 in. Solenoid Operated 415226
Selector Valve
4 in. Solenoid Operated Selector Valve 415227
Lever Release (With Handle and Pin, 42484
For Local Control)
Lever Release (No Handle, No Pin, 42486
For Remote Control)
6-16
REV. 1
ACCESSORIES (Continued) Pressure Trip

Siren The pressure trip is connected to the actuation or dis-
charge line of a carbon dioxide system. By either pneu-
The pressure operated siren is used to warn personnel matic or manual actuation, the pressure trip can release
of a system discharge. The siren is operated with the spring or weight powered devices to close doors and
carbon dioxide pressure from the system. The piping to windows, open fuel dump valves, close fire dampers or
the siren is normally run from the system distribution close fuel supply valves.
manifold. The minimum decibel level at 10 ft. is 90 dB.
The design requirements are as follows: The piping required to connect from the system manifold
to the pressure trip is 1/4 in. Schedule 40. This is no
Required Pipe: 1/4 in., Schedule 40 maximum length requirement for this piping as the
Flow Rate: 11 lb. per minute carbon dioxide will be drawn back through the distrib-
Maximum Sirens: 4 ution piping and out the nozzles.
Maximum Pipe Length: 200 ft. (61m) minus 1 ft. (.3m) for Pressure trip that may be used on system is:
every elbow used. Description Part No.
NOTICE Pressure Trip 5156

Design of system must include agent Pneumatic Time Delay
used through siren if siren is not located
in the hazard area. In some applications the system discharge must be
delayed for a short time following actuation. This is
usually in areas where it is necessary to evacuate per-
Pressure operated siren that may be use on the system
sonnel prior to carbon dioxide discharge. The time delay
is:
uses the carbon dioxide pressure to power the
Description Part No. factory-set delay mechanism. The time delay is installed
Pressure Operated Siren 43118 in the discharge piping either directly after the control
(pilot) cylinder or further along the piping. See Figure 22.
Pressure Switch A manual release is incorporated on the time delay
The pressure switch is operated off the carbon dioxide valve to allow instant override of the time delay. After the
pressure when the system is discharged. The piping to discharge is completed, pressure in the time delay
the pressure switch is normally run from the distribution slowly returns to normal and the time delay valve again
manifold. The pressure switch can be used to open or closes. The length of time delay is factory set and not
close electrical circuits to either shut down equipment or adjustable. The time delay is available in delay settings
turn on lights or alarms. of 10, 30, and 60 seconds.
The piping required to connect from the system manifold
to the pressure switch is 1/4 in. Schedule 40. There is no
maximum length requirement for this piping as the
carbon dioxide will be drawn back through the distrib-
ution piping and out the nozzles.
Pressure switches that may be used on system are:
Description Part No.
Pressure Switch–DPST 46250
Pressure Switch–DPDT (Explosion-Proof) 43241
Pressure Switch–3PST 42344
The pressure switches are rated as follows:
Part No. 46250 – 2 HP @ 240VAC/480 VAC or 2 HP
FIGURE 22
@ 250 VDC, 30A 250V AC/DC 5A 001867
480V AC/DC
Part No. 43241 – 10A @ 125 VAC, 5A @ 250 VAC NOTICE
Part No. 42344 – 30A @ 240 VAC, 20A@ 600 VAC, Delay time listed are at 70 °F (21 °C).
Actual delay times may vary with
3 HP @120 VAC, 7.5 HP @ 240 VAC,
ambient conditions and installation vari-
15 HP @ 600 VAC, 3 Phase AC ations.
6-17
REV. 1
ACCESSORIES (Continued) DEVELOP BILL OF MATERIALS

Pneumatic Time Delay (Continued) After completing the subsections of the design section,
Time delays used with the system are: finalize the system design by completing a bill of
material for each hazard area being protected. The bill
Description Part No. of material, hazard sketches, hydraulic calculations,
Pneumatic Time Delay – 60 Seconds 54168 and any notes, should be kept on file for future ref-
Pneumatic Time Delay – 30 Seconds 54169 erence.
Pneumatic Time Delay – 10 Seconds 54170
SAMPLE PROBLEM
Alarms
Refer to Section 12 for examples of typical applications.
Several types of electric alarms are available. Each of By reviewing these examples, it may help answer some
these operate on 24 VDC and must be used on the alarm questions concerning the total design process.
circuit of an AUTOPULSE Control System. Refer to
appropriate AUTOPULSE installation, maintenance,
and recharge manual for detailed design information.
RESERVE SYSTEM
Normally the authority having jurisdiction will determine
whether a hazard requires a back up reserve set of
carbon dioxide cylinders, either connected or spares.
IRI (Industrial Risk Insurers) requires the following:
“In high pressure systems an extra full complement of
charged cylinders (connected reserve) manifolded and
piped to feed into the automatic system should be pro-
vided on all installations. The reserve supply is
actuated by manual operation of the main/reserve
switch on either electrically operated or pneumatically
operated systems.
A connected reserve is desirable for four reasons:
–Protection should reflash occur.
–Reliability should the main bank malfunction.
–Protection during impairment when main tanks are
being replaced.
–Protection of other hazards if selector valves are
involved and multiple hazards are protected by the
same set of cylinders.
If a full complement of charged cylinders cannot be
obtained or the empty cylinders recharged, delivered
and reinstalled within 24 hours, a third complement of
fully charged spare cylinders should be maintained on
premises for emergency use. The need for spare
cylinders may depend upon whether or not the hazard
is under protection of automatic sprinklers.”
NFPA 12, Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing
Systems, 1989 Edition, states, “Both primary and
reserve supplies for fixed storage systems shall be per-
manently connected to the piping and arrange for easy
changeover, except where the authority having juris-
diction permits an unconnected reserve.”
When designing a system, always determine if, and
what kind of, reserve system is required.
6-18
ANSUL 
Section 7
Installation
All installations are to be performed in accordance with See Figures 1 thru 7 for detailed mounting height infor-
the parameters of this manual and all appropriate codes mation for all cylinder bracketing.
and standards from the local, state, and federal authority Clamp Installation – CV90 Cylinder Assembly
having jurisdiction.
Cylinder
Before the carbon dioxide system is installed, the qual- Size Dim. A Dim. B Dim. C Dim. D
ified installer should develop installation drawings in Ib. (kg) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
order to locate the equipment, to determine an actuation 25 (11.3) 6 (15) 12 (31) 9 3/4 (25) 12 3/4 (32)
and distribution piping routing, and to develop a bill of 35 (15.9) 9 (23) 18 (46) 9 3/4 (25) 12 3/4 (32)
material. 50 (22.7) 12 (31) 26 (66) 9 3/4 (25) 12 3/4 (32)
For successful system performance, the carbon dioxide 75 (34.0) 12 (31) 29 (74) 10 1/2 (27) 13 1/2 (34)
system components must be located within their 100 (45.4) 12 (31) 31 (79) 12 (31) 15 1/8 (38)
approved temperature ranges. The ambient temper-
ature ranges are 0 °F to 130 °F (–18 °C to 54 °C) for total
flooding and 32 °F to 120 °F (0 °C to 49 °C) for local Bracketing Without Uprights –
applications. All AUTOPULSE Control Systems are Single Cylinder
designed for indoor applications and for temperature
ranges between 32 °F to 120 °F (0 °C to 49 °C). MOUNTING HOLES – 2
HAVING 11/16 IN. DIAMETER
B
MOUNTING COMPONENTS D
2 IN. X1 IN. 3/16 IN.

Cylinder/Bracket Assembly STEEL CHANNELS
1/2 IN. X 1 1/4 IN.
Carbon dioxide cylinders may be located inside or BOLTS AND HUTS C
(BOLT HEADS WELDED A
outside the protected space, although it is preferable to TO CHANNELS)
locate them outside of the space. They must not be
located where they will be exposed to a fire or explosion 2 IN. X 3/16 IN. STEEL STRAPS
FIGURE 1
in the hazard. When they are installed within the space 001868a/001868b
they protect, a remote manual control must be installed Bracketing Installation – CV90 Cylinder Assembly
to release the system safely from outside the hazard
area. Cylinder Size Dimension A Dimension B
Ib. (kg) in. (cm) in. (cm)
The cylinders should be installed so that they can be
25 (11.3) 15 (38) 11 (28)
easily removed after use or for weighing and inspection.
35 (15.9) 21 (53) 11 (28)
Do not install the cylinders where they are exposed to
50 (22.7) 31 (79) 11 (28)
direct sun rays.
75 (34.0) 34 (86) 11 1/2 (29)
100 (45.4) 36 (91) 13 (33)
Bracketing Without Uprights –

Single Row
5 IN.
(13 cm) 12 IN.
(31 cm)
FIGURE 2
002260a/002260b
7-1
Section 7 – Installation
MOUNTING COMPONENTS (Continued) Bracketing Installation – CV90 Cylinder Assembly

Cylinder/Bracket Assembly (Continued) Cylinder
Size Dimension A Dimension B Dimension C
Bracketing Installation – CV90 Cylinder Assembly
Ib. (kg) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
Cylinder Size Dimension A Dimension B 25 (11.3) 15 (38) 25 (64) 80 (203)
Ib. (kg) in. (cm) in. (cm) 35 (15.9) 21 (53) 25 (64) 80 (203)
25 (11.3) 15 (38) 21 (53) 50 (22.7) 31 (79) 25 (64) 80 (203)
35 (15.9) 21 (53) 21 (53) 75 (34.0) 34 (86) 26 (66) 80 (203)
50 (22.7) 31 (79) 21 (53) 100 (45.4) 36 (91) 29 (74) 80 (203)
75 (34.0) 34 (86) 22 1/2 (57)
100 (45.4) 36 (91) 26 (66)
Back To Back
Double Row
7 IN.
5 IN. (19 cm) 12 IN. C
12 IN.
(13 cm) (31 cm)
(31 cm)
B A
B B
FIGURE 3 FIGURE 4
001869a/001869b 001870

Cylinder Size Dimension A Dimension B Dimension C Dimension D
Ib. (kg) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
25 (11.3) 15 (38) 14 (36) 46 (117) 8 (20)
35 (15.9) 21 (53) 14 (36) 56 (142) 8 (20)
50 (22.7) 31 (79) 14 (36) 72 (183) 8 (20)
75 (34.0) 34 (86) 14 1/2 (37) 77 (196) 8 (20)
100 (45.4) 36 (91) 16 (41) 79 1/2 (202) 8 (20)
Bracketing Without Uprights – Single Row

(DISTANCE TO D
WEIGH RAIL)
7 1/2 IN. 12 IN.

(19 cm) (31 cm)
C*
B
A
*Dimensions are based on using weigh scale, Part No. 74241, and Lifting Yoke, Part No. 69877.
FIGURE 5
002253
7-2
MOUNTING COMPONENTS (Continued)

Cylinder/Bracket Assembly (Continued)
Cylinder Size Dimension A Dimension B Dimension C Dimension D Dimension E
Ib. (kg) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in (cm)
25 (11.3) 15 (38) 24 (61) 46 (117) 8 (20) 11 (28)
35 (15.9) 21 (53) 24 (61) 56 (142) 8 (20) 11 (28)
50 (22.7) 31 (79) 24 (61) 72 (183) 8 (20) 11 (28)
75 (34.0) 34 (86) 25 1/2 (65) 77 (196) 8 (20) 11 (28)
100 (45.4) 36 (91) 29 (74) 79 1/2 (202) 8 (20) 11 (28)
E D
Bracketing With Uprights – Double Row
C*
7 1/2 IN. 12 IN.

(19 cm) (31 cm)
A
B
*Dimensions are based on using weigh scale, Part No. 74241, and Lifting Yoke, Part No. 69877. FIGURE 6
002271

Cylinder Size Dimension A Dimension B Dimension C Dimension D
Ib. (kg) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
25 (11.3) 15 (38) 25 (64) 46 (117) 8 (20)
35 (15.9) 21 (53) 25 (64) 56 (142) 8 (20)
50 (22.7) 31 (79) 25 (64) 72 (183) 8 (20)
75 (34.0) 34 (86) 26 (66) 77 (196) 8 (20)
100 (45.4) 36 (91) 29 (74) 79 1/2 (202) 8 (20)
Bracketing With Uprights – Double Row Back To Back
D D
C*
7 1/2 IN. 1/2 IN.
(19 cm) (31 cm)
A
B
*Dimensions are based on using weigh scale, Part No. 74241, and Lifting Yoke, Part No. 69877. FIGURE 7
001873
7-3
6-1-98
REV. 1
MOUNTING COMPONENTS (Continued)

Cylinder/Bracket Assembly (Continued) Releasing Devices
1. Mount each carbon dioxide cylinder by completing Different types of Releasing/Detection systems are
the following: available with the carbon dioxide system:
– ANSUL AUTOMAN mechanical release using fusible
! CAUTION link detectors with pneumatic actuation.
Do not remove the safety shipping caps at this – ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release using thermal
time. They are provided to prevent accidental detectors with pneumatic actuation.
actuation and discharge during shipping and – AUTOPULSE Control System using electric detection
handling. If valve assembly is accidentally with electric actuation.
operated, velocity of unrestricted escaping gas is – AUTOPULSE Control System with electric detection
forceful enough to cause injury, especially about utilizing an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release for pneu-
the face and head. matic actuation.
For detailed information on detection systems, refer to
a. Assemble bracket components. See Parts List, F- the following:
9127, F-9128, and F-9129, located in the
– Ansul Detection and Control Application Manual
Appendix Section, for details of cylinder brack-
eting and component assembly. – NFPA 12 Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems
b. If a reserve system is being installed, mount the – NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
reserve cylinder(s) directly next to the main
system cylinder(s). INSTALLING ACTUATION PIPING
Before installing any actuation piping, the piping design
! CAUTION must be determined. This will confirm that the lengths of
actuation piping does not exceed the maximum
Proper fasteners must be used when mounting allowable.
cylinder bracketing to wall or support. Failure
to mount properly could cause cylinder General Piping Requirements
movement upon discharge. 1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot-dipped
galvanized, chrome-plated, or stainless steel
c. Securely mount bracketing to rigid wall or pipe/braided hose and fittings conforming to ASTM
support. A120, A53, or A106.
d. Fasten cylinder(s) securely in bracketing. 2. Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make
certain all ends are carefully reamed and blown
e. The actuated pilot valves must be located in the
clear of chips and scale. Inside of pipe and fittings
distribution manifold as far from the manifold
must be free of oil and dirt.
outlet as possible.
3. The piping and fitting connections must be sealed
with pipe tape. When applying pipe tape, start at the
second male thread and wrap the tape (two turns
maximum) clockwise around the threads, away from
the pipe opening.
NOTICE
Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe
opening, as this could cause possible
blockage of the gas pressure. Thread
sealant or compound must not be used.
4. Cast iron pipe and fittings are not acceptable.

5. Actuation piping must be rigidly supported by UL
listed hangers as described on Page 7-6.
7-4
6-1-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING ACTUATION PIPING (Continued) INSTALLING DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Actuation Piping Installation Hanger Applications
1. Install 1/4 in. Schedule 40 pipe from gas outlet port Install the pipe hangers in accordance with good piping
on the ANSUL AUTOMAN release or ANSUL practice as well as the following:
AUTOMAN II-C release to cylinder location. Use one 1. The maximum spacing between hangers must not
of the 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) knockouts provided in the top, exceed those listed below.
bottom, or side of the enclosure to exit the piping.
Maximum Spacing
Pipe Size Between Hangers
NOTICE in. NPT ft. (m)
If system requires a manual pneumatic 1/4 4 (1.2)
actuator, install a 1/4 in. check valve,
1/2 6 (1.8)
Part 25627, in the 1/4 in. actuation
piping outside the release mechanism 3/4 8 (2.4)
and a 1/4 in. check valve near the pneu- 1 12 (3.7)
matic actuator. 11/4 12 (3.7)
2. Maximum length of all 1/4 in. actuation piping cannot 1 1/2 and larger 15 (4.6)
exceed 150 ft. (45.7 m).
2. A hanger should be installed between fittings when
3. If pneumatic operated accessories are required to the fittings are more than 2 ft. (.6 m) apart.
be operated from the actuation pressure, branch off
3. A hanger should be installed at a maximum of 1 ft.
the 1/4 in. actuation piping and run to each
(.3 m) from the nozzle.
accessory.
4. The hangers must be UL listed and rigidly sup-
4. Install 1/4 in. tee in the actuation piping approxi-
ported. The Hanger Application Table and Figure 9
mately 24 in. (61 cm) before first carbon dioxide
list some typical hangers used for different mounting
cylinder and install vent plug, Part No. 42175. See
surfaces.
Figure 8.
5. Install actuation hose, Part No. 31809, 32335, or
32336 (depending on length required) between
actuation piping and either the pneumatic actuator
or the CO2 valve. A 1/4 in. male connector, Part No.
32338, is required on each end of the actuation
hose. See Figure 8.
PRESSURE TRIP,
PART NO. 805156
APPROX. 24 IN. (61 cm)

PRESSURE SWITCH
12 IN.
(SEE COMPONENT
(30 cm)
SECTION)
1/4 IN.
VENT PLUG,
PART NO.
842175
CHECK
VALVE,
PART NO. 25627
FIGURE 8
001874
7-5
REV. 1
INSTALLING DISTRIBUTION PIPING (Continued) General Piping Requirements

Hanger Application Table 1. Pipe shall conform to ASTM specifications A53 or
A106.
Hanger
Type Application 2. A120 pipe SHALL NOT BE USED.
3. All pipe up to and including 3/4 in. size to be
No. 1 For attaching to wood beams
standard weight black, stainless, or galvanized steel
No. 2 On level ceilings of sufficient thickness to (Schedule 40).
permit proper fastening 4. All pipe over 3/4 in. size to be extra heavy black,
No. 3 For 2 in. and smaller pipe under sloping stainless, or galvanized steel (Schedule 80).
ceilings and roofs 5. Extra heavy galvanized malleable iron or ductile iron
No. 4 For special cases where punching is more fittings should be used through 2 in. size; and galva-
economical than using clamps nized forged steel fittings in all larger sizes.
No. 5 For sheathed ceilings of wood construction 6. Refer to NFPA 12, “Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing
with sufficient thickness Systems” for detailed piping requirements.
7. Cylinder and piping to be securely bracketed espe-
No. 6 For most cases except where plastering is
cially at the fittings and nozzles.
done after installation
8. Ream, clean, and blow out all pipe before installing.
No. 7 For attaching to concrete beams
9. All dead end pipe lines to be provided with a 1/2 in.
No. 8 For attaching to lower flange of beam or truss capped nipple, 2 in. long. See Figure 10.
No. 9 To keep piping closer to beam than is pos-
sible with clamp and ring
No. 10 Suitable for 3/4 to 2 in. pipe where necessary
to hang pipe at a distance from wall
No. 11 For attaching to channel iron
No. 12 For attaching to bottom of steel beams
FIGURE 10
001876
10. After assembly, blow out entire pipe system before

installing discharge nozzles.
NO. 1 NO. 2 NO. 3 NO. 4 NO. 5
NO. 6 NO. 7 NO. 8 NO. 9
NO. 10 NO. 11 NO. 12
FIGURE 9
001875/3 rows
7-6
REV. 2
INSTALLING DISTRIBUTION PIPING (Continued) 7. If accessory piping is required, see Installing Acces-
Distribution Manifold And Piping sories, for detailed piping information.
1. Starting with the cylinder manifold, securely mount MAIN/RESERVE SYSTEM

the manifold at the appropriate height as shown in NFPA 12, Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing
Figure 11. Make certain that if accessories piping is Systems, 1989 Edition, states, "Both primary and
to be done later that the end of the manifold contains reserve supplies for fixed storage systems shall be per-
a tee instead of an elbow. The outlet of the tee will manently connected to the piping and arranged for easy
later be reduced down to 1/4 in. for piping to the changeover, except where the authority having juris-
accessories. diction permits an unconnected reserve."
2. Continue piping remainder of the distribution piping,
When piping a connected reserve system, the reserve
following piping sketch and computer design com-
cylinders must be segregated from the pressure of the
pleted in System Design Section.
main system. This is accomplished by adding check
NOTICE valves in the distribution manifold. It is also necessary to
All piping shall be laid out to reduce install a header vent plug on each side of the manifold.
friction losses to a reasonable minimum This is required because of the addition of the check
and care shall be taken to avoid possible valves in the manifold. See Figure 12.
restrictions due to foreign matter or
SELECTOR
faulty fabrication. VALVES
3. Before installing nozzles, blow air through complete

piping system to determine there is no blockage.
4. Install discharge nozzles as specified on the com-
puter design piping output sheet.
5. Install male end of flexible discharge bend, Part No.
427082, into each manifold inlet. Wrench tighten.
HEADER
HEADER
6. With cylinders securely mounted in bracket, attach HEADER SAFETY
VENT
VENT
female end of flexible discharge bend unto cylinder
valve outlet. Wrench tighten.
! CAUTION
CHECK VALVES
Make certain flexible discharge bend is attached to
valve outlet and NOT the fill port inlet. The valve MAIN/RESERVE SYSTEM WITH SELECTOR VALVES
outlet port is the higher of the two threaded ports. FIGURE 12

004306
Header Installation – Cylinder Assembly

Cylinder Size Dimension A Dimension B Dimension C Dimension D Dimension E
Ib. (kg) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
25 (11.3) 38 1/2 (98) 39 (99) 12 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31)
35 (15.9) 48 1/2 (123) 49 (125) 12 (31) 15 (31) 12 (31)
50 (22.7) 64 1/2 (164) 65 (165) 12 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31)
75 (34.0) 69 1/2 (177) 70 (178) 12 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31)
100 (45.4) 72 (183) 72 1/2 (184) 12 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31)
100 (LC) (45.4) 72 1/2 (184) 73 (185) 12 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31)
1/2 IN. ELBOW SUPPLY PIPE
SUPPLY PIPE HEADER
D C
C
"Y" FITTING
FLEXIBLE FLEXIBLE
FLEXIBLE
SUPPLY PIPE DISCHARGE DISCHARGE
DISCHARGE
BEND, BEND,
BEND,
PART NO. PART NO.
PART NO. B A
CYLINDER 427082 427082
427082 A
VALVE
1 CYLINDER E E E
2 CYLINDERS 3 CYLINDERS
FIGURE 11
001878
7-7
6-19-98
REV. 2
INSTALLING DETECTION/ACTUATION SYSTEM AUTOPULSE Control System With ANSUL

Several types of detection systems are available for use AUTOMAN II-C With Pneumatic Actuation
with the Ansul carbon dioxide extinguishing system. In some cases it is advisable to have electric supervised
Some detection systems offer supervised input and detection with pneumatic valve actuation. This can be
output circuits and battery back-up while other types accomplished by incorporating an AUTOPULSE Control
offer unsupervised mechanical, electrical, or pneumatic System for the detection and an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C
detection. The type of hazard or the authority having release for the pneumatic actuation.
jurisdiction will determine the detection system require- 1. See the appropriate AUTOPULSE Control Manual
ments. for detailed installation instructions.
NFPA 12 states, “Supervision of automatic systems 2. Once the electrical portion of the detection system is
shall be provided unless specifically waived by the completed, mount the ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C
authority having jurisdiction. Interconnections between release in a convenient location to both the
the components that are necessary for the control of the AUTOPULSE panel and the carbon dioxide
system and life safety, such as detection, actuation, cylinders.
alarms, power sources, etc., shall be supervised. An 3. Complete wiring required between the
open circuit, ground fault condition, or loss of integrity in AUTOPULSE control panel and the ANSUL
the pneumatic control lines that would impair full system AUTOMAN II-C release. See Figure 13.
operation shall result in a trouble signal. The alarm and
trouble signals shall be transmitted by one of the fol- THESE SWITCH CONTACTS TRANSFER
UPON ACTUATION OF RELEASE
lowing methods:
"ANSUL AUTOMAN" II-C
a. Local alarm service which will cause an audio and HIGH
TB1
visual signal at a constantly attended location ACCESSORY
POWER
(NFPA 72) SOURCE S1
N.C.
b. Proprietary alarm service (NFPA 72) LOW
USE JUMPER D1
c. Remote alarm service (NFPA 72), or PART S2
NO.17761 N.C.
d. Central station alarm service (NFPA 71) (12.5--30VDC)
Rx
Exception: High pressure pneumatic operated slave AUTOPULSE
J1 D2 SOL1
cylinder connections immediately adjacent to pilot RELEASE

CIRCUIT***
cylinder need not be supervised.”

*AUXILIARY ALARMING DEVICES, SEE S1 RATINGS
AUTOPULSE Control System With Electric Actuator **FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE, BLOWER MOTOR, DOOR CLOSER, ETC., SEE S1 RATINGS
***POLARITY SHOWN IN THE ALARM CONDITIONS
The AUTOPULSE Control System is an electronic FIGURE 13
device incorporating an internal power supply, “on-line” 001879
emergency batteries, and solid-state electronics. The 4. See Actuation Piping Requirements listed on Page
system can incorporate either ionization, photoelectric, 7-4.
heat, flame, or combustible vapor detectors.
NOTICE
The AUTOPULSE Control System offers electric valve
It is only required to actuate two pilot
actuation by the use of the Ansul HF Actuator, Part No.
cylinders in the total system. The
73327 for the CV-90 valve cylinders and by the use of the
remainder of the cylinders will be
CV-98 electric actuator, Part No. 423684, for the
actuated by back-pressure from the pilot
CV-98 valve cylinder.
cylinders. In a connected reserve
For detailed installation instructions, refer to the appro- system, two pilot cylinders are required
priate AUTOPULSE Control Systems Manual and the on the main and two on the reserve.
HF Electric Actuator Application and Installation Sheet,
Part No. 73330, and CV-98 Electric Actuator Instruction
Sheet, Part No. 426003.
7-8
6-19-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING DETECTION/ACTUATION SYSTEM

(Continued)
H.A.D. Detection With Mechanical Actuation

This type of system is actuated automatically by means
of heat actuated detectors (H.A.D.) located in the pro-
tected space. Copper tubing connects the detectors to
the control head located on the cylinder valve. This
system may also be actuated from a remote pull station
connected by cable to the automatic control head or by
the local manual release located on the control head.
H.A.D. COMPONENT CONNECTION

1. Mount heat actuated detectors on ceiling of hazard
area in accordance with location determined in the
System Design Section.
2. Install 4 in. sq. junction boxes and 1/2 in. conduit as
required by system layout. Provide smooth, rounded
bends to allow pulling of 1/8 in. air tubing. Fasten
conduit securely at 6 ft. (1.8 m) intervals.
3. Feed 1/8 in. air tubing through conduit leaving
several inches surplus at each junction box and
detector to provide for expansion and contraction.
Runs of air tubing should not be pulled tight, but
looped as shown in Figure 14.
4. Terminate conduit at junction box mounted near
control head. Using union fitting, run 3/16 in. air
tubing to control head leaving a loop of tubing to
allow for removal of control head from cylinder
valve. See Figure 14.
THREE WAY FITTING

TWO WAY FITTING
TWO WAY FITTING
HEAT ACTUATOR PLAN VIEW OF

JUNCTION BOX
1/8 IN. AIR TUBING (COVER REMOVED)
JUNCTION BOX (COVER 1/2 IN. CONDUIT HEAT

REMOVED) MOUNTED ACTUATOR
ON WALL ABOVE
CONTROL HEADS 3/16 IN. X 1/8 IN. UNION
FITTING PART NO. 41397
3/16 IN. AIR TUBING
RATE-OF-RISE
CONTROL HEAD
TUBING TEE
HEAD WITHOUT VENT USED

ONLY ON SYSTEMS WITH 3
OR MORE CYLINDERS
HEAD WITH
VENT USED
ON ALL
SYSTEMS
FIGURE 14
001881
7-9
6-19-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING DETECTION/ACTUATION SYSTEM “CLIP-ON” STYLE LINKAGE INSTALLATION

(Continued) 1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using the
H.A.D. Detection With Mechanical Actuation (Continued) two 1/2 in. steel compression fittings on the series
detector bracket or the single 1/2 in. steel com-
MOUNTING THE CONTROL HEAD
pression fitting on the terminal detector bracket. See
1. Figure 15.
! CAUTION
Make certain control head is in the "SET" position
with ring pin in place before installing onto cylinder
valve. Failure to comply could result in an acci- COMPRESSION FITTING NUT
dental cylinder actuation.
1/2 IN. STEEL COMPRESSION
FITTING
Make certain control head is in the “SET” position FIGURE 15
000306
and ring pin is inserted through manual release lever
and secured with visual inspection seal. NOTICE
2. Remove actuation shipping cap from top threads of Do not use zinc die cast compression
cylinder valve. connectors on the detection conduit
lines as these will not withstand the nor-
3. Thread the control head onto top threads of cylinder
mally high temperatures experienced in
valve. Do not exceed 10 ft.lb. (13.6 Nm) torque.
the hazard area.
Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release With Fusible
2. For a terminal detector located in a duct or header
Link
opening, secure both sides of the detector bracket
When the system design allows for unsupervised, with conduit, as shown in Figure 16.
mechanical detection with pneumatic actuation, the
mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN release can be used.
The fusible link detection operates the release mech-
anism which in turn pneumatically operates the cylinder
valve.
To properly install the mechanical detection system:
1. Based on the requirements listed in the System
Design Section, mount the detectors in their prede-
termined locations.
2. Run 1/2 in. conduit from the release mechanism trip
hammer assembly knockout hole to locations
selected for mounting the detectors.
When changing the direction of conduit, use only
Ansul approved pulley elbows.
Ansul offers two styles of detector bracket assem- FIGURE 16
blies. Part No. 56837 and 56838 are the "clip on" 000307
style series and terminal detector assemblies.

These detector assemblies use a "clip on" style
linkage assembly and do not require the wire rope to
be threaded through the linkage assembly while it is
being fed through the detection system.
Part No. 15373 and 15375 are the "hinged" style
series and terminal detector assemblies. These
detector assemblies use a detector linkage
assembly which requires the wire rope to be
threaded through each linkage assembly while the
rope is being fed through the detection system.
7-10
6-19-98
REV. 1
2-3 IN. (5–8 cm)

(Continued)
Link (Continued)
“CLIP-ON” STYLE LINKAGE INSTALLATION (Continued)
FIGURE 20
3. Starting at the release assembly, feed the wire rope 000312
through the hole in the release mechanism locking 6. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during
clamp, allowing the excess wire rope to hang down. installation of the detector linkage, hang a vise grip
Do not tighten set screws in locking clamp at this or other weighted device on the excess stainless
time. See Figure 17. steel wire rope, leaving an adequate length of spare
wire rope between the locking clamp and the
LOCKING CLAMP weighted device.
NOTICE
When attaching the weighted device to
the excess wire rope, allow approxi-
mately 3 in. (8 cm) of wire rope for each
detector linkage for proper installation.
FIGURE 17 Example: If the system has six detectors, there

000309
should be approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of
4. From the release assembly, run the stainless steel excess wire rope between the locking
wire rope through the conduit, pulley elbows and clamp and the weighted device, which will
detector brackets to the terminal detector. be utilized when the linkage is put in place.
NOTICE 7. Start at the terminal detector, place the small tab of
If wire rope requires splicing, make the detector linkage onto the wire rope. See Figure
certain splice is at least 12 in. (30.5 cm) 21.
away from any pulley elbow or conduit
adaptor to avoid interference.
5. Feed the wire through the terminal detector bracket

as shown in Figure 18 or as shown in Figure 19 if the
terminal detector is mounted within a duct or header
opening, and install the stop sleeve approximately 2
to 3 in. (5 to 8 cm) from the end of the wire rope. See
Figure 20. Use the National Telephone Supply
Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool (Stock No. 51-C- FIGURE 21
887) or equal to properly crimp the stop sleeve. 000313
8. With the tab positioned on the wire rope, press and

snap the detector linkage onto the wire rope. See
Figure 22.
FIGURE 18
000310
FIGURE 22
000314
FIGURE 19
000311
7-11
Section 7– Installation
6-19-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING DETECTION/ACTUATION SYSTEM 12. Position the assembled linkage onto the detector
(Continued) bracket. See Figure 26. For optimum detection,
Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release With Fusible make certain the solder joint is in the down position.
Link (Continued)
BRACKET LINKS
“CLIP-ON” STYLE LINKAGE INSTALLATION (Continued)
9. Place the tab of the other half of the detector linkage
on the opposite side of the wire rope and press the
linkage until it snaps onto the rope. See Figure 23.
FIGURE 26
000318
NOTICE
When positioning the linkage in the
bracket, it is recommended to locate the
FIGURE 23 linkage slightly off center, toward the ter-
000315
minal detector side.
NOTICE
13. Install the linkage and the correct Ansul approved
The hook portions of the detector
fusible link in the remainder of the detector brackets.
linkage should now face away from each
other. 14. Insert cocking lever, Part No. 14995, on the left side
of the release mechanism, with the movable flange
resting securely against the corner of the cartridge
10. Next, rotate both halves of the detector linkage receiver and spring housing, and with the notched
upside down, with the detector linkage groove over lever portion engaging the cocking pin on both sides
the wire rope. See Figure 24. of the release mechanism. See Figure 27.
COCKING PIN
FIGURE 24 COCKING LEVER

000316
11. After fitting the pivot point of the two detector linkage
halves together, squeeze the two halves and place
the correctly rated Ansul approved fusible link over
both detector hooks. See Figure 25.
FIGURE 27
000319
FIGURE 25
000317
7-12
6-19-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING DETECTION/ACTUATION SYSTEM 18. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct
(Continued) fusible link, is in the detector bracket, located slightly
Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release With Fusible toward the terminal detector side.
Link (Continued) NOTICE
“CLIP-ON” STYLE LINKAGE INSTALLATION (Continued) Due to the close adjustment between
15. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise the triphammer and cable lever assem-
cocking pin until the trip lever indented surface blies, use only the particular fusible
moves underneath the pin and locks the pin in the up link(s) selected for installation in each
position. See Figure 28. detector, to ensure correct adjustment
when performing Steps 19 and 20.
19. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm),
pull all slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screws
on locking clamp.
20. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position and inspect
the base of the wire rope clamping device to make
certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) to
a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between
the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable
lever assembly. See Figure 31. If clearance is not
1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm)
FIGURE 28 maximum, raise tension lever, loosen set screws on
001882 locking clamp and repeat Steps 19 and 20.
16. Remove cocking lever and insert lock bar, Part No.
14985, on left side of the cable lever, over the two TRIP HAMMER
ASSEMBLY
shouldered projecting stud extensions, and slide bar
1/4 IN. MINIMUM
forward into locking position. The release mech- (6.4 mm)
anism cannot be actuated, nor can enclosure cover 1/2 IN. (12.7 mm)
MAXIMUM
be replaced until the lock bar is removed. See Figure
29. TRIP HAMMER
BASE
LOCK BAR PROPERLY

INSTALLED FIGURE 31
000323
FIGURE 29 ! CAUTION
000321
17. Make certain tension lever is in the “UP” position. Do not install cartridge at this time as an acci-
See Figure 30. dental actuation could cause system discharge.
21. Test detection system in accordance with the

Testing and Placing in Service Section of this
manual.
TENSION LEVER IN
22. When testing has been completed, cut off excess
“UP” POSITION wire rope in the release assembly, leaving approxi-
mately 2 in. (5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping
device.
FIGURE 30
000322
7-13
6-19-98
REV. 1

(Continued) 6. At the terminal detector, feed wire rope through the
Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release With Fusible terminal detector clamping device. Allow 2-3 in. (5-8
Link (Continued) cm) of wire rope to extend beyond the clamping
device and wrench tighten the set screws. See
“HINGED” STYLE LINKAGE INSTALLATION Figure 34.
1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using 1/2 2–3 IN.
(5–8 cm)
in. steel compression fittings. Thread the com-
pression fitting into the detector bracket and then
secure by using the lock nut supplied with the fitting.
See Figure 32.
1/2 IN. STEEL

COMPRESSION
FIGURE 34
000332
FITTINGS
7. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during
1/2 IN. COMPRESSION positioning of the detector linkage(s), hang a vise
FITTING NUT grip or other weighted device on the excess
stainless steel wire rope, leaving an adequate length
FIGURE 32 of spare wire rope between the locking clamp and
000330
the weighted device.
NOTICE
Do not use zinc die cast compression NOTICE
connectors on the detection conduit When attaching the weighted device to
lines as zinc will not withstand the nor- the excess wire rope, allow approxi-
mally high temperatures experienced in mately 3 in. (8 cm) of wire rope for each
the hazard area. detector linkage for proper installation.
2. Starting at the release assembly, feed wire rope up Example: If the system has six detectors, there
through hole in release mechanism locking clamp, should be approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of
allowing excess wire rope to hang down. Do not excess wire rope between the locking
tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time. See clamp and the weighted device, which will
Figure 33. be utilized when the linkage is put in place.
8. Starting at the terminal detector, squeeze the
LOCKING linkage together and place the correctly rated Ansul
CLAMP
approved fusible link over both detector hooks. For
optimum detection, make certain the solder joint is in
the down position. Locate the linkage in the center of
the detector bracket. See Figure 35.
FIGURE 33
000309
3. From the release assembly, run the stainless steel FIGURE 35

wire rope through the conduit, pulley elbows, and to 000333
the first detector.

4. Before continuing on past the detector bracket, feed
the wire rope through the detector linkage assembly.
See Figure 34.
5. Continue running the wire rope through the conduit
and pulley elbows and feed it through each detector
linkage assembly at each additional bracket.
7-14
6-19-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING DETECTION/ACTUATION (Continued)

Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release With Fusible 12. Remove the cocking lever and insert lock bar, Part
Link (Continued) No. 14985, on the left side of the cable lever, over
the two shouldered projecting stud extensions, and
“HINGED” STYLE LINKAGE INSTALLATION (Continued)
slide the bar forward into the locking position. The
9. Proceed to install the remainder of the Ansul release mechanism cannot be actuated, nor can
approved fusible links on the detector hooks and enclosure cover be replaced until the lock bar is
position the linkage in the center of each bracket. removed. See Figure 38.
10. Insert cocking lever, Part No. 14995, on left side of
release mechanism with the movable flange resting
securely against the corner of cartridge receiver and
spring housing, with the notched lever portion
engaging the cocking pin on both sides of the
release. See Figure 36.
LOCK BAR
PROPERLY INSTALLED
COCKING PIN FIGURE 38

000321
COCKING LEVER 13. Make certain tension lever is in the “UP” position.
See Figure 39.
FIGURE 36
000319
11. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise TENSION LEVER IN
the cocking pin until trip hammer indented surface “UP” POSITION
moves underneath the pin. See Figure 37.
FIGURE 39
000322
14. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct

fusible link, is approximately centered in the
detector bracket.
NOTICE
Due to the close adjustment between
FIGURE 37 the trip hammer and cable lever assem-
001882
blies, use only the particular fusible
link(s) selected for the installation in
each detector, including the terminal
detector, to ensure correct adjustment
when performing Steps 15 and 16.
15. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm),
pull all slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screw
on locking clamp.
7-15
6-19-98
REV. 1

(Continued)
Quartzoid Bulb Actuator (QBA-5)
Link (Continued) The Quartzoid Bulb Actuator (QBA-5) release actuates
the carbon dioxide system pilot cylinder by releasing the
“HINGED” STYLE LINKAGE INSTALLATION (Continued) carbon dioxide in its cylinder through 1/8 in. pipe. The
16. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position and inspect QBA-5 is available in three temperature ratings. The unit
the base of wire rope clamping device to make should be mounted directly above the hazard. The unit is
certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) to equipped with a mounting bracket. See Figure 41.
3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maximum clearance between the
1/4 – 18 NPT OUTLET
base of the trip hammer assembly and cable lever
RELEASE MECHANISM
assembly. See Figure 40. If clearance is not 1/4 in. 1/4 IN. X 1/8 IN. REDUCER
SAFETY RELIEF
(6.4 mm) minimum to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maximum, BURSTING DISC
(NOT SUPPLIED)
raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking BRACKET

TEMPERATURE
clamp and repeat Steps 15 and 16. RATING STAMPED
HERE NAMEPLATE
TRIP HAMMER ASSEMBLY QUARTZOID

BULB
1/4 IN. (6.4 mm)
MINIMUM NAMEPLATE
3/8 in. (9.5 mm)
MAXIMUM
CARBON DIOXIDE
TRIP HAMMER BASE CYLINDER
FIGURE 41
001400
The maximum length of 1/8 in. pipe between the

Quartzoid Bulb Actuator and the carbon dioxide pilot
cylinders is 100 ft. (30.5 m).
FIGURE 40 In order to determine the normal operating temperature
000323
at the QBA-5 location, utilize a maximum registering
17. Test detection system in accordance with the thermometer, Part No. 15240.
Testing and Placing in Service Section of this
manual. Part No. Description
18. When all testing has been completed in the Testing
42267 QBA-5 Assembly with bracket 135 °F (57 °C)
and Placing in Service Section, cut off excess wire
rope in the release assembly, leaving approximately 42274 QBA-5 Assembly with bracket 175 °F (79 °C)
2 in. (5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping 42276 QBA-5 Assembly with bracket 250 °F (121 °C)
device.
41893 QBA-5 Assembly without bracket
INSTALLING ACTUATORS 135 °F (57 °C)
When installing actuators on the carbon dioxide valve, 41894 QBA-5 Assembly without bracket
different styles are available depending on the require- 175 °F (79 °C)
ments of the system design or type of valve. Actuators
41895 QBA-5 Assembly without bracket
can be stacked to get the options of manual, pneumatic,
250 °F (121 °C)
and electric actuation.
7-16
6-19-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING ACTUATORS (Continued)

Pneumatic – CV-90 Valve Pneumatic Actuation – CV-98 Valve
The manual/pneumatic actuator, Part No. 32094, is used To install pneumatic actuation, complete the following
where a system design requires manual-local override steps:
at the cylinder. The manual actuator can be mounted
1. Remove the 1/4 in. pipe plug from the 1/4 in. actu-
directly to the release attachment port of the cylinder
ation port. See Figure 44.
valve. Operation is accomplished by either removing the
ring pin and depressing the red palm button or by sup- 2. Attach 1/4 in. high pressure hose to 1/4 in. actuation
plying a minimum of 100 psi (690 kPa) from an ANSUL port. See Figure 44. Securely tighten.
AUTOMAN II-C Release to the inlet port. A swivel con-
nection is provided to facilitate orientation of the inlet REMOVE 1/4 IN. PLUG
port. See Figure 42.
INLET PORT 1/4 IN. NPT

FEMALE PIPE THREAD FROM ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C OR
PRESSURE SOURCE
100 PSI (6.9 Bar) MINIMUM
SWIVEL NUT
CYLINDER VALVE FIGURE 44

002349
3. Connect high pressure actuation piping to ANSUL

AUTOMAN II-C outlet port.
FIGURE 42 4. When utilizing multiple cylinder pneumatic actu-
002261
ation, a maximum of 15 CO2 secondary pilot

The other pneumatic actuator, Part No. 32096, is used where cylinders can be actuated through the 1/4 in. actu-
a system design requires only pneumatic actuation at the ation port. See Figure 44a.
cylinder. The pneumatic actuator can be mounted directly to
the release attachment port of the valve. Operation is accom-
plished by supplying a minimum of 100 psi (690 kPa) from an
ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C Release to the inlet port. A swivel
fitting is provided for orientation of the piping. See Figure 43.
INLET PORT 1/4 IN. NPT

FEMALE PIPE THREAD
SWIVEL NUT
CYLINDER VALVE
16 IN. STAINLESS
STEEL HOSE, PART
NO. 31809 (TYP.)
TEE, PART NO.
ADAPTOR, PART
418359 (TYP.)
NO. 73236 (TYP.)
MALE ELBOW,
PART NO. 832334
FIGURE 43 (TYP.)
001884 FIGURE 44a
002714
7-17
6-19-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING ACTUATORS (Continued)

Manual Three styles of actuators are available for the CV-90
Along with the manual means of actuation on the manual/ valve:
pneumatic actuator, three styles of lever actuators are – Part No. 70846, Manual cable-pull actuator (handle
available which offer manual actuation at the cylinder and and pin; for local control)
can be connected to a remote manual pull station. Manual – Part No. 70847, Manual cable-pull actuator (handle,
actuation is accomplished by pulling the valve hand lever. no pin; for remote control with three or more cylinders)
The lever design contains a forged mechanical detent – Part No. 32098, Manual cable-pull actuator (no
which secures the lever in the open position when handle, no pin; for use with three or more cylinders)
actuated.
Two styles of actuators are available for the CV-98 valve:
! CAUTION – Part No. 423309, manual cable-pull actuator (handle
and pin; for local control)
Before mounting the lever actuator(s) on the cylinder – Part No. 423311, manual cable-pull actuator (no
valves, make certain the lever actuator is in the “SET” handle, no pin; for remote control)
position. If the lever actuator is not in the “SET”
position, cylinder will discharge when lever actuator Electric – CV-90 Valve
is installed. Electric actuation of a carbon dioxide cylinder is accom-
plished by either an HF electric actuator or a solenoid actuator
See Figure 45 for installation details.
interfaced through an AUTOPULSE Control System. A
maximum of two HF electric actuators can be used on a
single AUTOPULSE release circuit. The HF actuator, Part
No. 73327, mounts directly to the release attachment port of
MUST BE IN THE SET POSITION the carbon dioxide valve. See Figure 47.
BEFORE INSTALLING
Connect electrical circuit for the HF actuator to the
control system by following wiring instructions in the
SWIVEL NUT “HF” Electric Actuator Application and Installation
CYLINDER VALVE
FIGURE 45
001849
If the system requires two lever actuators, use con-

necting link, Part No. 42514, to tie the two together. See
Figure 46.
CONNECTING
LINK
FIGURE 46
001885
7-18
6-19-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING ACTUATORS (Continued) Stacking Actuators

Electric Actuator – CV-98 Valve Some system designs require more than one type of
A maximum of two CV-98 electric actuators can be actuation means. Actuators can be stacked, one on top
installed on a single AUTOPULSE release circuit. of the other, to accomplish this. Figure 48 shows the dif-
ferent ways the actuators can be arranged.
! CAUTION
Before installing electric actuator to top of CV-98
valve, make certain piston in bottom of actuator is
free to move up and down. If piston is in the down
position, DO NOT INSTALL. CV-90 OR
CV-98 VALVE CV-90
1. Attach actuator to top thread of CV-98 valve. VALVE
Securely tighten.
! CAUTION
ELECTRIC (NO OVERRIDE) ELECTRIC WITH MANUAL-LOCAL
Make certain all electric power from the panel to the 001847 OVERRIDE (PNEUMATIC CAPABILITY) 001886
actuator has been disconnected. Failure to dis-

connect power may cause system to accidentally dis-
charge.
2. Connect electric circuit for actuator to Control CV-90

System. Refer to appropriate AUTOPULSE Manual CV-90 OR VALVE
CV-98 VALVE
and CV-98 Electric Actuator Application and
Installation Sheet, Part No. 426003 for detailed
wiring.
ELECTRIC WITH MANUAL/CABLE MANUAL LOCAL OVERRIDE

OVERRIDE 001887 (PNEUMATIC CAPABILITY) 001888
HF ELECTRIC
ACTUATOR
OR CV-98
ELECTRIC
ACTUATOR
CV-90
VALVE CV-90 OR
CV-98 VALVE
CO2 CYLINDER
PNEUMATIC SLAVE
FIGURE 47 001889 MANUAL CABLE PULL (OR
001851 LOCAL OVERRIDE) 001848
CV-90
CV-90
VALVE
VALVE
RATE OF RISE CONTROL

RATE OF RISE CONTROL HEAD
HEAD 001890
WITH REMOTE CABLE RELEASE
001891
FIGURE 48
7-19
6-19-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES If a pulley tee is used, it must be installed between the

Manual Pull Station release assembly and first pulley elbow. The ambient
temperature range of the pulley tee is between 32 °F to
Depending on the type of actuation being used, there are a 130 °F (0 °C to 54 °C).
number of different pull stations available. Remote pull sta-
tions can be either mechanical, pneumatic, or electric. REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION SINGLE APPLICATION
MECHANICAL PULL STATION TO ANSUL AUTOMAN PULLEY ELBOW

RELEASE – To install a mechanical pull station com-
plete the following steps: RELEASE MECHANISM
CABLE OVAL SLEEVE
1. Make certain the release assembly enclosure cover LEVER
is detached and lock bar is properly inserted within WIRE ROPE
the release mechanism.
NOTICE
BREAK ROD
Failure to follow these instructions may LOCK BAR
lead to system actuation.
JUNCTION BOX (NOT SIDE
SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) STUD
2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from release
REMOTE MANUAL RING HANDLE
assembly and that the release assembly is in the PULL STATION
cocked position. FIGURE 49
001892
3. Select a convenient location in the path of exit for
mounting the pull station(s) to the wall. Height and REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION DUAL APPLICATION
location of pull station should be determined in PULLEY TEE

accordance with authority having jurisdiction.
The total length of the wire rope used for each WIRE ROPE
PULLEY ELBOW OVAL
manual pull station within a system must not exceed SLEEVE
RELEASE
125 ft. (38 m). MECHANISM CABLE
The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be JUNCTION
LEVER
BOX (NOT
used per system is 18 of Part No. 423250 and SUPPLIED
415670. BY ANSUL) COCKED
4. If junction box(es) is used, fasten a 4 in. (10 cm) LOCK BAR

junction box to wall or in wall where pull station is to
be mounted, with mounting screws positioned so REMOTE
that when pull station cover is positioned in place, REMOTE
MANUAL PULL
MANUAL PULL
STATION
the printing will appear right side up and readable. STATION
FIGURE 50
ALTERNATE METHOD OF CONNECTION: 001893
a. Thread 3/4 x 1/2 in. reducing coupling to bushing 6. Feed wire rope from each pull station through
on back of each cover assembly. conduit and each pulley elbow to cable lever located
b. Mount pull station cover(s) directly to wall at at release assembly.
selected location so that printing is right side up
and readable. NOTICE
Make certain that wire rope rides on top
5. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit, pulley tee (if
and in center of pulley sheave. If the
required), and pulley elbows from each pull station
wire rope has been spliced to accom-
to release assembly as necessary. See Figures 49
modate a longer run, do not allow the
and 50.
spliced ends to be within 12 in. (30 cm)
of any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor.
7. Fasten pull station assembly to each junction box (if
junction box is used).
8. Slide oval crimp sleeve onto wire rope. Loop wire
rope through cable lever guide holes and back
through the oval crimp sleeve. See Figure 49.
7-20
6-19-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) If a pulley tee is used, it must be installed between

Manual Pull Station (Continued) the release assembly and first pulley elbow. The
ambient temperature range of the pulley tee is
9. Pull slack out of each wire rope and crimp sleeve. between 32 °F to 130 °F (0 °C to 54 °C).
(Use the National Telephone Supply Company
6. Feed wire rope from each pull station through
Nicopress Sleeve tool Stock No. 51-C-887 or equal
conduit and each pulley elbow to cable lever located
to properly crimp stop sleeve.) See Figure 49.
at release assembly.
MECHANICAL PULL STATION TO ANSUL AUTOMAN
II-C RELEASE – To install a mechanical pull station NOTICE
complete the following steps: Make certain that wire rope rides on top
1. Insert ring pin in ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release. and in center of pulley sheave. If the
See Figure 51. wire rope has been spliced to accom-
modate a longer run, do not allow the
of any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor.
RESET LEVER
RING PIN
junction box is used).
8. Thread wire rope through rear guide hole in manual
trip lever on release. See Figure 49.
9. Pull all slack out of wire rope and thread end through
sleeve, Part No. 4596.
FIGURE 51 10. Loop the wire rope back up around and through top
001894
of sleeve.
2. If necessary, remove cartridge and install safety 11. Position sleeve approximately 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) and
shipping cap on cartridge. crimp to secure wire rope. (Use the National
3. Select a convenient location in the path of exit for Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve tool
mounting the pull station(s) to the wall. Height and Stock No. 51-C-887 or equal to properly crimp stop
location of pull station should be determined in sleeve.) See Figure 52.
accordance with authority having jurisdiction. MECHANICAL PULL STATION TO LEVER RELEASE
The total length of the wire rope used for each – To install a mechanical pull station complete the fol-
manual pull station within a system must not lowing steps:
exceed 125 ft. (38 m). 1. Select a convenient location in the path of exit for
The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be mounting the pull station(s) to the wall. Height and
used per system is 18 of Part No. 423250 and location of pull station should be determined in
415670. accordance with authority having jurisdiction.
4. If junction box(es) is used, fasten a 4 in. (10 cm) The total length of the wire rope used for each
junction box to wall or in wall where pull station is to manual pull station within a system must not exceed
be mounted, with mounting screws positioned so 125 ft. (38 m).
that when pull station cover is positioned in place, The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be
the printing will appear right side up and readable. used per system is 18 of Part No. 423250 and
ALTERNATE METHOD OF CONNECTION: 415670.
a. Thread 3/4 x 1/2 in. reducing coupling to bushing 2. If junction box(es) is used, fasten a 4 in. (10 cm)
on back of each cover assembly. junction box to wall or in wall where pull station is to
b. Mount pull station cover(s) directly to wall at be mounted, with mounting screws positioned so
selected location so that printing is right side up that when pull station cover is positioned in place,
and readable. the printing will appear right side up and readable.
5. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit, pulley tee (if
required), and pulley elbows from each pull station
to release assembly as necessary. See Figures 49
and 50.
7-21
6-19-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) 8. When installing, make certain there is at least 7 in.
Manual Station (Continued) (17.8 cm) of free cable between the cable clamp and
the flared end fitting for proper operation of lever.
ALTERNATE METHOD OF CONNECTION: See Figure 52.
a. Thread 3/4 x 1/2 in. reducing coupling to bushing
on back of each cover assembly. CABLE CLAMP 7 IN.
PULL CABLE
b. Mount pull station cover(s) directly to wall at TEMPORARILY

(17.8 cm)
MINIMUM
selected location so that printing is right side up PIN OR WIRE
LEVER IN “SET”
and readable. POSITION
WHILE
3. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit, dual/triple junction INSTALLING PULL CABLE CONDUIT
CABLE CORNER
box, and pulley elbows from each pull station to FLARED END PULLEY
FITTING
release assembly as necessary.
4. Feed wire rope from pull station through conduit and
each pulley elbow to cable lever located at release
assembly.
FIGURE 52
001895
NOTICE
Make certain that wire rope rides on top 9. Remove wire or pin that was used to hold the lever in
and in center of pulley sheave. If the place during cable installation.
wire rope has been spliced to accom- MECHANICAL PULL STATION TO H.A.D. MECH-
modate a longer run, do not allow the ANICAL HEAD – CV-90 VALVE ONLY – To install a
spliced ends to be within 12 in. (30 cm) mechanical pull station complete the following steps:
of any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor. 1. Select a convenient location in the path of exit for
mounting the pull station(s) to the wall. Height and
5. Fasten pull station assembly to each junction box (if location of pull station should be determined in
junction box is used). accordance with authority having jurisdiction.
The total length of the wire rope used for each
! CAUTION manual pull station within a system must not exceed
125 ft. (38 m).
Wire or pin the actuator lever in the “SET” position
The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be
before connecting the cable to the lever. Failure
used per system is 18 of Part No. 423250 or 415670.
to comply could result in accidental agent dis-
charge. 2. If junction box(es) is used, fasten a 4 in. (10 cm)
junction box to wall or in wall where pull station is to
6. Wire or pin the actuator lever in the “SET” position to be mounted, with mounting screws positioned so
prevent accidental discharge when installing the that when pull station cover is positioned in place,
cable. See Figure 52. the printing will appear right side up and readable.
7. Feed cable through hole in actuator lever and fasten ALTERNATE METHOD OF CONNECTION:
with cable clamp. See Figure 52. a. Thread 3/4 x 1/2 in. reducing coupling to bushing
on back of each cover assembly.
b. Mount pull station cover(s) directly to wall at
selected location so that printing is right side up
and readable.
7-22
6-19-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) 8. Remove pipe plug and install flexible conduit, Ansul
Manual Pull Station (Continued) Part No. 42788, from control head to conduit run.
See Figure 53.
3. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit, dual/triple junction
box, and pulley elbows from each pull station to PULL CABLE
release assembly as necessary. See Figures 49 and VENTED CONTROL HEAD

CONDUIT
50.
4. Feed wire rope from pull station through conduit and LOCAL MANUAL
each pulley elbow to cable lever located at release RELEASE
CORNER
assembly. FLEXIBLE
PULLEY
CONDUIT
NOTICE
Make certain that wire rope rides on top
and in center of pulley sheave. If the (1–2 CYLINDER SYSTEMS) 001896a
wire rope has been spliced to accom-

CONTROL HEAD
modate a longer run, do not allow the WITHOUT VENT
VENTED CONTROL HEAD
of any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor. LOCAL
MANUAL
RELEASE
LONG FLEXIBLE
junction box is used). FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
CONDUIT
PART NO. 45500
! CAUTION
3 OR MORE CYLINDER SYSTEMS
Do not attempt to install control cable when FIGURE 53

001896b
control head is attached to cylinder valve. Failure
to comply could result in accidental agent dis- 9. Pull on end of cable to take up slack in conduit.
charge. 10. Insert cable into mounting block and secure with set
screws. On systems requiring two control heads (3
or more cylinders), run cable completely through to
6. Remove nameplate cover from front of control head. second control head. Make certain to secure both
7. Place control head adjacent to valve actuation con- set screws in both control heads. See Figure 54.
nection so that the length of the cable and the 11. Cut cable not more than 1/2 in. (13mm) beyond the
flexible conduit will be the same as if the control cable mounting block. See Figure 54.
head was actually installed on the valve.
RATE-OF-RISE
CONTROL
HEAD CABLE PULL
CABLE BLOCK
CONDUIT
SET SCREWS
CORNER
PULLEY
LONG FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
1/2 IN. (1.3 cm) SWIVEL NUT NAMEPLATE REMOVED
(1–2 CYLINDER SYSTEMS)
SHORT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
1/2 IN. LONG FLEXIBLE CONDUIT

(1.3 cm)
(3 OR MORE CYLINDER SYSTEMS)
FIGURE 54
001897
7-23
6-19-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) 2. Weld or bolt mounting bracket to the selected

Manual Pull Station (Continued) surface. See Figure 55.
12. Reinstall nameplate cover onto front of control head. NOTICE
Where bolting the mounting bracket is
! CAUTION preferred, use 3/8 in. (corrosion-
resistant) bolts of appropriate length,
Make certain that control head is in the "SET" with lockwashers and nuts.
position with ring pin in place before installing
onto discharge valve. Failure to comply could
result in accidental agent discharge.
MOUNTING
13. Make certain control head is in the “SET” position. BRACKET
Indicator arrow on reset control must point to “SET.”
3/8 IN.
14. Make certain ring pin is inserted through manual CORROSION-
RESISTANT
release lever and is secured with visual inspection WELD TYPE
seal.
15. Remove actuation shipping cap from top thread of
carbon dioxide cylinder valve.
16. Thread the control head onto top thread of carbon
dioxide cylinder valve. Do not exceed 10 ft. lb. (13.6 FIGURE 55
001898
Nm) torque. 3. Unscrew the RED actuator button from the actuator
ELECTRIC PULL STATION TO AUTOPULSE stem and slide actuator body through mounting hole
CONTROL PANEL – The electric pull station must be on bracket. See Figure 56.
mounted in an area where it will not be exposed to 4. Rotate actuator body for desired location of actu-
physical abuse or a corrosive environment. The pull ation piping outlet connection. Screw locknut firmly
station should be mounted no higher than 60 in. (153 onto actuator body and insert ring pin. Reassemble
cm) from the floor, or what the authority having juris- button onto the stem. See Figure 56.
diction requires. See AUTOPULSE Installation,
RED ACTUATOR
Operation, and Maintenance Manuals, Part No. 74255, BUTTON
77498, 77513, or 69970 for detailed wiring instructions.
PNEUMATIC STATION TO PNEUMATIC CYLINDER LOCK NUT
VALVE – To install a manual pneumatic actuator com-

plete the following steps:
1. Select a convenient location in the path of exit for
MOUNTING
mounting the pull station(s) to the wall. Height and BRACKET
location of pull station should be determined in ACTUATOR
BODY
accordance with authority having jurisdiction.
The total length of 1/4 in. piping used for each
manual pull station within a system must not exceed
125 ft. (38 m). RING PIN AND
CHAIN
FIGURE 56
001899
7-24
6-1-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) 24 VDC ALARMS – All alarms used with the
Manual Pull Station (Continued) AUTOPULSE Control System require 24 VDC power.
See the Component Index in the appropriate
5. Affix the appropriate operating nameplate adjacent AUTOPULSE Installation, Operation, and Maintenance
to the manual actuator so that it is visible to Manual for description of available alarms.
attending personnel. See Figure 57.
120 VAC ALARMS – This type of alarm bell can only be
6. Make certain ring pin is inserted through the RED
utilized with an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C Release or a
actuator button to ensure safe cartridge installation.
mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release. It can not be
See Figure 57.
used on an AUTOPULSE Control System.
To properly install the 120 VAC alarm, complete the fol-
NAMEPLATE
lowing:
NOTICE
All wiring installations must comply with
local, state, and federal codes and must
be completed by a licensed electrician.
1. Install the alarm by first selecting a mounting

location and installing a 4 in. octagon or 4 in. square
junction box.
FIGURE 57 2. Run 1/2 in. conduit from the releasing device to the
001900
7. Seal ring pin to actuator stem with visual inspection junction box.
seal, Part No. 197. Make certain visual inspection 3. Feed lead-in wires from release and power supply
seal is looped through ring pin and around actuator junction box.
stem. Do not wrap seal around the boot cover. See 4. Refer to appropriate wiring diagrams and connect
Figure 58. wires in release junction box.
RED ACTUATOR
5. Disassemble alarm by removing bolt from face of
PLACE WIRE BETWEEN RED
BUTTON ACTUATOR BUTTON AND bell housing.
BOOT COVER
BOOT COVER
6. Connect lead-in wires to leads from rear of alarm
plunger mechanism.
WIRE
7. Secure alarm plunger mechanism mounting plate to
junction box.
RING PIN 8. Reassemble bell housing to alarm mechanism.
Selector Valves
Before installing the selector valves, it is necessary to
NOTE: DO NOT APPLY WIRE
AROUND BODY COVER determine the required size. This must be calculated in
the Design Section by the Ansul ANSCALC Computer
FIGURE 58 program. The location of the selector valve should have
1901 been determined on the piping sketch and approved by
8. Install 1/4 in. actuation piping from manual actuator the authority having jurisdiction.
to pneumatic actuator(s) on cylinder valve(s). Make
certain safety vent plug, Part No. 42175, is installed
in actuation line.
9. Install nitrogen cartridge in actuator body.
Alarms
Several types of alarms are available for use with the
carbon dioxide system. Some require 24 VDC power
and others require 120 VAC. Make certain that the alarm
chosen is compatible with the detection system control
panel used.
7-25
6-19-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) 2 IN. THRU 4 IN. SIZE VALVES – These selector valves
Selector Valves (Continued) are flanged and require carbon dioxide pressure for
actuation. Depending on the location of the top plate, the
For installing selector valves, complete the following: carbon dioxide pressure is received either locally (from
1/2 IN. THRU 1 1/2 IN. SIZE VALVES – These size the valve inlet through a specially machined port in the
valves are equipped with a threaded body. The valves valve) or remotely (piped into the remote inlet from a
are normally supplied for local pressure operation but remote pressure source).
can be ordered special for remote pressure operation. It is important to determine the type of valve needed in
1. At the location where the valve(s) are to be the installation (local or remote) and to identify which
mounted, make certain they will not be subject to type of valve it is.
damage or corrosion.
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
The incorrect selection of a valve in a installation will
Make certain directional arrow on valve body result in valve malfunction during actuation.
points in the direction of agent flow. If valve is
incorrectly installed, system will not discharge.
To determine which type of valve you have, carefully
examine the location of the top cover plate and its
2. Install valve(s) in the distribution piping making
position on the valve body casting. The body casting has
certain there is enough room above the valve to
a 1/4 in. pipe port labeled “Remote Inlet” on the top
install the required actuation component. Also,
flange casting directly above the valve outlet flange. The
make certain flow direction arrow on valve body is in
top cover plate has a 1/4 in. pipe port labeled “Auxiliary
the correct orientation.
Outlet” on the side of the plate.
NOTICE If the “Auxiliary Outlet” port is directly above the "Remote
If valve is very heavy, precautions must Inlet" port, the valve is a LOCAL type.
be taken to properly support the weight
If the “Auxiliary Outlet” port is 180 opposite the “Remote
of the valve in the distribution piping
Inlet” port, the valve is a REMOTE type.
network.
NOTICE
3. With valve properly installed and supported, attach The top plate has an unmarked 1/4 in.
actuation component to top threads of valve and plug which should never be used.
pipe or wire back to detection panel, releasing Connection of any piping to this port will
device, or discharge manifold. See Figure 59. result in valve malfunction.
4. If required, run 1/4 in. piping from the auxiliary outlet
on the valve flange to remote pressure operated
devices, such as remote discharge indicator,
pressure trip, or pressure switch.
(OPEN POSITION) (CLOSED POSITION) (OPEN POSITION) (CLOSED POSITION) (OPEN POSITION) (CLOSED POSITION)
HAND
HAND LEVER LEVER
LOCKING PIN LOCKING PIN
HAND LEVER AND CHAIN AND CHAIN
ACTUATOR ACTUATOR
NAMEPLATE NAMEPLATE
RESET
RESET
AIR VENT KNOB
KNOB
PIPE
AIR
VENT AIR
SOLENOID VENT
VALVE
FIGURE 59
001902a 001902b 001902c
7-26
2-22-01
REV. 2
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) 5. With valve properly installed and supported, attach
Selector Valves (Continued) actuation component to top threads of valve and
pipe or wire back to detection panel of releasing
Complete the following steps to ensure that the valve will device. See Figure 59.
function as required:
1. Identify valve as previously indicated (local or NOTICE
remote). When using an electric solenoid valve
2. Install valve in carbon dioxide distribution piping. for selector valve actuation, only one
The 2, 2 1/2, 3, and 4 in. valves require 3 in. x 2 in., 3 solenoid valve is allowed per
in. x 2 1/2 in., 3 in. x 3 in., or 3 in. x 4 in. flanges AUTOPULSE circuit. See “Solenoid
respectively to mate with the valve bolting circle. Valve RetroFit Instructions For
Flanges must be ASA 600 lb. class only. Selection Valves,” Part No. 415846, for
detailed installation instructions.
! CAUTION Lock Handle Stop Valves

The use of any flange other than specified in Step The lock handle stop valves are threaded ball valves.
2 will cause a mismatch of bolting circles. This will The valve must be installed in the direction of the flow
result in a hazardous application which could label. When installing the valve, make certain the
cause personal injury due to the high pressures threads on the mating pipe are free from grit, dirt, or
involved in the carbon dioxide system. burrs. Care must be taken to assure that any pipe
sealants used are not so excessively applied to the pipe
threads that the valve cavity becomes obstructed. The
3. If valve is a REMOTE type, connect the remote
valves are equipped with a monitoring switch to provide
pressure piping to the valve “Remote Inlet” port.
constant supervision of the valve at the control panel.
4. If auxiliary piping is required, connect piping to the Each valve shipping assembly includes detailed wiring
1/4 in. “Auxiliary Outlet” port on the valve top cover instructions.
plate. This port becomes pressurized when the
valve is actuated. (A typical use for this is pressure Direction/Stop Valves
switch connection to activate a discharge alarm.) Directional valves can be manually actuated in two
ways; either at the valve with the hand lever or remotely
! CAUTION with a manual cable pull station attached to a sector
located on the directional valve.
Pre-discharge alarms, which warn personnel of Before installing the valve in the carbon dioxide dis-
an impending carbon dioxide discharge, must not charge piping, make certain there is enough clearance
be connected to this port. This port only become for either the hand lever to swing freely or the sector to
pressurized when the valve is activated. rotate properly. See Figure 60 for dimension infor-
mation.
NOTICE
Maximum distance a manual cable pull
station can be located from the sector
on the directional valve is 125 ft.
(38.1 m). Operating force must be a
maximum of 40# and require no more
than 14 in. (35 cm) of travel to open
valve.
7-27
6-19-98
REV. 1
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued)

Detection/Stop Valves (Continued)
C
D
PIPE
HANDLE IN
HANDLE IN NORMALLY
OPEN CLOSED B E
POSITION POSITION
“THIS DIMENSION WITH

VALVE IN OPEN POSITION”
A
001871
Valve A B C D E
Size in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm)
1/2 in. 10 (25.4) 9 3/8 (23.8) 4 3/4 (12) 7/8 (2.2) 215/16 (7.4)
3/4 in. 14 (35.5) 12 3/4 (32.3) 5 5/8 (14.2) 1 1/8 (2.8) 3 5/8 (9.2)
1 in. 14 (35.5) 12 3/4 (32.3) 6 3/8 (16.1) 1 7/16 (3.6) 41/8 (10.4)
1 1/4 in. 17 (43.1) 15 5/8 (39.6) 7 7/8 (20) 1 11/16 (4.2) 5 (12.7)
1 1/2 in. 17 (43.1) 15 5/8 (39.6) 8 1/4 (20.9) 1 7/8 (4.7) 5 1/2 (13.9)
4 3/4 IN. 1/8 IN. STAINLESS STEEL

(12 cm) OR MONEL CABLE TO
PULL BOX A
IN
3/8 IN. FLARED
OPEN
END FITTING
POSITION
CABLE TO HAVE A
SLIGHT SLACK WHEN
VALVE IS IN B ATTACH CABLE
CLOSED POSITION IN “FIGURE 8 (LOOP)”
3 3/8 IN. BEFORE FASTENING CLAMP
(8.5 cm)
D
IN.
7 11/16 ) CABLE CLAMP
m
(19.5 c 6 13/16 IN.
(17.3 cm)
30°
PROVIDE A STOP FOR

SECTOR A THIS POINT
001872
Valve A B C D
Size in. (cm) in. (cm) in (cm) in (cm)
1/2 in. 4 3/4 (12) 3 (7.6) 7/8 (2.2) 2 15/16 (7.4)
3/4 in. 5 5/8 (14.2) 3 5/8 (9.3) 1 1/8 (2.8) 3 5/8 (9.2)
1 in. 6 5/16 (16) 4 1/8 (10.4) 1 7/16 (3.6) 4 1/8 (10.4)
1 1/4 in. 8 1/8 (20.6) 5 1/4 (13.3) 1 11/16 (4.2) 5 (12.7)
1 1/2 in. 8 1/4 (20.9) 5 3/8 (13.6) 1 7/8 (4.7) 5 1/2 (13.9)
FIGURE 60
7-28
6-19-98
REV. 2
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) Wire each pressure switch to other compatible compo-
Pressure Trip nents in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. A
QUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN should connect all electrical
Pressure trips are used to actuate spring loaded or weighted components in accordance with the authority having
mechanisms generally used to close doors or windows. The jurisdiction.
pressure trip should be securely mounted in the appropriate
location and piped with 1/4 in. actuation piping back to the Time Delay
release device. The time delay is available in settings of 10, 30, and 60
Pressure trips can be piped off the carbon dioxide dis- second delays. The time delay should be installed in the
charge piping, which is the preferred method, or if the carbon dioxide system distribution piping. On one or two
system is utilizing an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C or cylinder systems, the time delay should be mounted as
mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN release device, the close to the cylinder as conveniently possible. On mul-
pressure trip can be piped off the actuation line. See tiple cylinder systems, the time delay should be mounted
Figure 61. in the discharge manifold, between the pilot cylinders
Pressure trips can be piped in series and the last and the slave cylinders. See Figure 62. The time delay
pressure trip must contain a 1/4 in. plug in the outlet port. can be mounted in any position, vertical, horizontal, or
See Figure 61. Maximum of two pressure trips in a single any angle in between. The time delay has 3/4 in. NPT
actuation line. Operating pressure must be a minimum inlet and outlet threads which will require reducing cou-
of 75 psi (517 kPa) with a maximum load of 70 lbs. (31.8 plings if the manifold is smaller than 3/4 in. pipe.
kg).
PRESSURE
PRESSURE TRIP TRIP, PART
INSTALLATION NO. 805156
PLUG LAST
PRESSURE TRIP
PRESSURE SWITCH
(SEE COMPONENT
SECTION)
1/4 IN. VENT PLUG,

PART NO. 842175 FIGURE 62
001867
FIGURE 61 Pressure Operated Siren

001903
The pressure operated siren operates off the carbon
Pressure Switch dioxide of the system. The siren should be piped with 1/4
in. Schedule 40 piping coming off the system discharge
Pressure switches are used to pneumatically operate manifold.
electrical circuits which, in turn, will operate alarms,
lights, or turn on or turn off equipment. A maximum of four sirens are allowed on a single
system.
Pressure switches can be piped off the carbon dioxide
discharge manifold, which is the preferred method, or if The maximum pipe length is 200 ft. (61 m) minus 1 ft.
the system is utilizing an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C or (0.3 m) for every elbow used.
mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN release device, the Sirens and piping should be securely mounted with the
pressure switch can be piped off the actuation line. See proper fasteners.
Figure 64.
1. Mount pressure switch(es) in desired location(s)
with appropriate fasteners.
2. Install piping from main actuation line or from the
carbon dioxide distribution manifold to pressure
switch fitting. Piping to be 1/4 in. Schedule 40, black
or galvanized steel pipe. The piping must be
reduced from 3/8 in. NPT to 1/8 in. NPT to assemble
to pressure switch (3/8 in. to 1/8 in. reducing cou-
pling not furnished).
7-29
NOTES:
7-30
ANSUL 
Section 8
Testing and Placing in Service
TESTING H.A.D. SYSTEM If the release assembly does not trip, remove pulley
After H.A.D. system has been properly installed, the tee (if provided) and each pulley elbow cover to
system must be tested to ensure safe and reliable oper- make certain wire rope is resting on the pulley
ation. sheave. If this does not correct the problem, there is
too much slack in the cable and it must be retight-
To test the H.A.D. system, complete the following steps: ened.
1. Remove automatic control head(s) from cylinder(s). 4. If retightening or realignment was necessary, retry
In the case of three or more cylinders on the system, pull station. If release assembly operates properly,
make certain to remove both control heads. cut off any excess wire rope 3/4 in. (2 cm) above
2. Submerge H.A.D. in container of boiling water and oval sleeve.
check control head to see that it has operated. 5. Recock release assembly using cocking lever, Part
NOTICE No. 14995, and reinstall lock bar, Part No. 14985.
Make certain control head is reset prior 6. Slide glass break rod through stud and ring handle.
to reinstalling on cylinder. Indicator Tighten set screw into stud.
arrow must be in “SET” position. Failure To test a remote cable pull station to cylinder lever
to reset will cause accidental discharge release(s), complete the following steps:
of the system. (Allow H.A.D. to cool for
at least five minutes before resetting
control head(s).) ! CAUTION
3. Reset control head(s) and reinstall on cylinder(s). Make certain lever actuator(s) are removed from
Do not exceed 10 ft. lb. (13.6 Nm) torque. cylinder valves prior to testing pull station. Failure to
do so will cause cylinder discharge.
TESTING PULL STATION
To test a remote electric pull station, refer to appropriate 1. Remove lever actuator(s) from cylinder valve.
AUTOPULSE system installation, operation, and main-
NOTICE
tenance manual.
After removing actuator(s) from cylinder
To test a remote cable pull station to ANSUL AUTOMAN valve, securely support actuator(s) in
release, complete the following steps: order for it to operate when pull station
is pulled.
! CAUTION 2. Pull remote cable pull station. Lever actuator should

move to the tripped position.
When testing pull station, make certain cartridge is not
installed in ANSUL AUTOMAN release. Failure to If lever actuator does not trip, remove each pulley
remove cartridge will cause system actuation. Make elbow cover to make certain wire rope is resting on
certain shipping cap is installed on cartridge. the pulley sheave. If this does not correct the
problem, there is too much slack in the cable and it
must be retightened.
1. With the gas cartridge removed, remove lock bar
3. If retightening or realignment was necessary, retry
from release assembly cable lever.
pull station.
2. Remove glass break rod from pull station by
removing set screw on side of stud and slide glass
break rod out.
3. Pull ring handle on pull station. If the release
assembly is tripped easily, the remote cable pull
station is properly installed.
8-1
Section 8 – Testing and Placing in Service
6-19-98
REV. 1
TESTING PULL STATION (Continued)] TESTING ELECTRIC DETECTION SYSTEM –

4. If pull station operated properly, reset lever actuator. AUTOPULSE CONTROL SYSTEM – CV-90 VALVE
CAUTION ! CAUTION
!
Electric HF actuators, Part No. 73327, must not be
Make certain lever actuator is in the “SET” posi- installed on carbon dioxide CV-90 cylinder valve
tion before reinstalling on cylinder valve. Failure during test. If installed, testing of the electric detection
to do so will cause actuation when reinstalling. system will cause actuation and discharge of the fire
suppression system.
5. Reinstall lever actuator on cylinder valve. Wrench
tighten. In order to properly test the electric detection and actua-
tion system, refer to the appropriate AUTOPULSE
To test a remote cable pull station to H.A.D. control
Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual, and
head, complete the following steps:
the HF Electric Actuator Application and Installation
! CAUTION
TESTING CV-98 ELECTRIC DETECTION/ACTUATION
Make certain control head(s) are removed from SYSTEM – AUTOPULSE CONTROL SYSTEM
cylinder valve(s) prior to testing pull station. Failure to
do so will cause cylinder discharge. ! CAUTION
Electric CV-98 actuator, Part No. 423684, must not be
1. Remove control head from cylinder valve. installed on carbon dioxide CV-98 cylinder valve
NOTICE during test. If installed, testing of the electric detection
After removing control head from system will cause actuation and discharge of the fire
cylinder valve, securely support control suppression system.
head in order for it to operate when pull In order to properly test the electric detection and actua-
station is pulled. tion system, refer to the appropriate AUTOPULSE
Control System Installation, Operation, and Main-
2. Pull remote cable pull station. Check control
tenance Manual, and the CV-98 Electric Actuation
head(s) to see that they have operated.
Application and Installation Sheet, Part No. 426003.
If control head(s) do not operate, remove each
pulley elbow cover to make certain wire rope is When CV-98 electric actuator is actuated correctly, the
resting on the pulley sheave. If this does not correct piston in the bottom of the actuator will be locked in the
the problem, there is too much slack in the cable and down position. It will be locked in that position by the
it must be retightened. internal discharged METRON PROTRACTOR. The
3. If retightening or realignment was necessary, retry METRON PROTRACTOR must be replaced before re-
pull station. installing actuator to valve. See Recharge Section for
replacement instructions.
4. If pull station operated properly, reset control head.
TESTING ELECTRIC DETECTION SYSTEM – ANSUL
AUTOMAN II-C RELEASE
! CAUTION
When utilizing an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release for
Make certain control head is reset before rein- electric detection or in combination with an
stalling on cylinder valve. Indicator arrow must AUTOPULSE Control System, refer to ANSUL
be in “SET” position. Failure to reset will cause AUTOMAN II-C Releasing Device Installation,
accidental system discharge. Operation, and Maintenance Manual, Part No. 17788, or
for explosion-proof version, Part No. 31496, for detailed
5. Reinstall control head on cylinder valve. Wrench information.
tighten.
8-2
6-19-98
REV. 1
TESTING MECHANICAL – ANSUL AUTOMAN RELEASE

WITH FUSIBLE LINK 3. If release mechanism does not actuate, check the
following components and remedy any disorder:
! CAUTION a. Check the detector linkage for correct posi-
tioning.
Do not install cartridge at this time. If installed, testing
of the mechanical detection system will cause actua- b. Check the wire rope for knotting or jamming.
tion and discharge of the fire suppression system. c. Check pulley elbows to see that wire rope is free
and centered in pulley sheaves. If any evidence
1. If installed, remove cartridge. of pulley elbow deformation is found, replace the
2. Test detection system by completing the following pulley elbow.
steps: d. Make certain the lock bar is removed.
a. Raise release mechanism tension lever to the e. Make certain that release mechanism is cocked.
“UP” position. See Figure 1. f. Make certain that tension lever is in “DOWN”
position.
4. Re-test the system by completing the following
steps:
a. Make certain release is cocked and lock bar is
TENSION LEVER inserted.
IN “UP” POSITION
b. Raise the release mechanism tension lever to the
“UP” position.
c. Install a new test link, Part No. 15751, on the ter-
minal detector.
d. Lower the release mechanism tension lever to
the “DOWN” position.
FIGURE 1
000322 e. Check for 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum to 3/8 in.
b. Remove fusible link from terminal detector and (9.5 mm) maximum clearance between the trip
install a test link, Part No. 15751. See Figure 2. hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly.
See Figure 3.
TRIP HAMMER ASSEMBLY
1/4 IN. (6.4 mm)

MINIMUM
3/8 IN. (9.5 mm)
TEST LINK MAXIMUM
FIGURE 2
000363
c. Locate detector linkage and center in each TRIP HAMMER

bracket. For “clip on” style linkage, locate linkage BASE
slightly toward terminal detector side.

d. Lower mechanism tension lever to “DOWN” posi-
tion and remove lock bar.
e. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal
detector to simulate automatic actuation. FIGURE 3
000323
f. If system actuates successfully, go to Step 5.
f. Remove the lock bar.
g. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal
detector to simulate automatic actuation.
8-3
6-19-98
REV. 1
TESTING MECHANICAL – ANSUL AUTOMAN RELEASE

WITH FUSIBLE LINK (Continued) NOTICE
5. Upon successful actuation of the system, complete The test cylinder should be adequately
the following steps: sized to allow for a minimum of 50 lbs.
a. Raise tension lever to “UP” position and install a for the delay plus an additional 11
properly-rated fusible link in the terminal lbs./min. for each siren in the system
detector. plus the additional carbon dioxide
needed for the expected delay at the
b. Cock release mechanism using cocking lever,
test cylinder temperature.
Part No. 14995, and insert lock bar, Part No.
14985. 2. Install a pressure gauge between the test cylinder
c. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position. and the time delay device. The gauge should be cal-
d. Locate detector linkage and center in each ibrated with a capability of at least 1500 psi with
bracket. For “clip on” style linkage, locate linkage increments of 10 psi.
slightly toward terminal detector side. 3. Disconnect the piping from the outlet of the time
e. Make certain the 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum to 3/8 delay and install another pressure gauge, similar to
in. (9.5 mm) maximum clearance was maintained the type specified in Step 2. See Figure 4.
between the base of the trip hammer assembly
and the cable lever assembly. See Figure 3. SIREN
NOTICE
Reset any electrical equipment that may
have been affected by the system actu-
ation.
If no additional components are installed, pro-

ceed with Step f. through i. If additional compo-
nents require testing, test per instructions listed.
f. Install LT-30-R cartridge into the release mecha-
TEST CYLINDER
nism receiver. Hand tighten firmly.
g. Remove lock bar.
h. Install cover on release assembly, insert visual
seal, Part No. 197, and secure.
i. Record installation date on tag attached to unit
and/or in a permanent file.
FIGURE 4
000927
TESTING 60 SECOND TIME DELAY

To determine if the time delay is functioning properly, NOTICE
test per the following steps: The timing cycle should begin when
carbon dioxide is introduced into the
time delay device inlet and should end
! CAUTION
when the pressure gauge in the outlet of
Disconnect all system cylinders from actuation and the time delay reads 50 psi.
distribution piping before running time delay test.
Failure to disconnect system cylinders could cause 4. Open the test cylinder to allow flow into the inlet of
cylinder actuation during time delay test. the time delay and simultaneously begin timing.
5. Observe the pressure gauge approximately 2-3 sec-
1. Fill the test cylinder and allow it to stabilize for a min- onds after opening the test cylinder and record the
imum of 48 hours for cylinders of 50 lb. capacity and pressure reading.
72 hours for larger cylinders. The test cylinder must 6. Observe the pressure gauge on the outlet of the
be equipped with a siphon tube. time delay. When the gauge reads 50 psi, stop
timing. Record the time delay period measured.
8-4
6-19-98
REV. 1
TESTING 60 SECOND TIME DELAY (Continued) 9. If the actual delay period falls within the range deter-
7. Referring to Figure 5, relate the pressure recorded mined in Step 8, the time delay is acceptable.
in Step 5 to the actual temperature of the carbon
dioxide test cylinder. For example, if the recorded
pressure is 600 psi, the carbon dioxide test cylinder
temperature is approximately 48 °F.
THIS CURVE SHOWS THE PRESSURE IN CARBON DIOXIDE THIS CURVE SHOWS THE PRESSURE IN CARBON DIOXIDE
CYLINDERS WHEN FILLED TO 60% OF THEIR CYLINDERS WHEN FILLED TO 68% OF THEIR
°F
WATER CAPACITY WATER CAPACITY
180
170
160
150
140
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10
-20
-30
-40
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200 3400 3600 3800
PRESSURE – LBS. PER SQ. IN.
PER CENT FILLING = LB. CO2 IN CYLINDER
x 100
LB. H2O IN CYLINDER
FIGURE 5
000928
8. Refer to the Time vs Temperature Chart in Figure 6,

and record the acceptable time delay range for the
temperature determined in Step 7. For example, at
48 °F, the acceptable range is 57.0 to 77.5 seconds.
130
TEMPERATURE CORRECTION
FOR 60 SECOND TIME DELAY
120 ANSUL PART NO. 54168
110
TIME (SECONDS)
100
90
80
70
60
50
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
TEMPERATURE (DEGREES °F)
FIGURE 6
000929
8-5
NOTES:
8-6
ANSUL 
Section 9
REV. 1
Resetting and Recharge
CLEAR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Refer to AUTOPULSE installation, operation, and main- 2. Cock release mechanism using cocking lever, Part
tenance manuals for detailed instructions on resetting No. 14995, and install lock bar, Part No. 14985. See
the electric detection system. Figure 2.
NOTICE
If AUTOPULSE Control System is uti-
lizing an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C
releasing device for pneumatic actu-
ation, AUTOPULSE panel will remain in
trouble condition until ANSUL
AUTOMAN II-C is recocked.
LOCK BAR
If utilizing an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release with PROPERLY
INSTALLED
thermal detectors, detectors must be cooled down,
below their set point, before release can be reset.
Refer to ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C Installation, Operation,
and Maintenance Manuals, Part No. 17788 and 31496,
for detailed instructions.
FIGURE 2
000321
CHECK ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 3. Remove empty cartridge from release assembly.
Piping and Nozzles ! CAUTION

A fire condition could cause damage to the piping and
Do not install replacement cartridge at this time or
nozzles and possibly support members. Check all rigid
system may be actuated.
pipe supports and all fitting connections. Take the noz-
zles off the piping, inspect for damage, corrosion, or
obstructions, clean and reinstall, making certain they are 4. Install properly-rated fusible links in all detectors
aimed correctly. except the terminal detector.
Mechanical Detection System NOTICE
Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release: If actuation was caused by a fire situ-
ation, all fusible links must be replaced.
1. Raise tension lever to “UP” position. See Figure 1.
5. Install test link, Part No. 15751, in terminal detector.
6. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position.
7. Remove lock bar.
8. Using wire cutter, cut test link at the terminal
detector to simulate automatic actuation.
9. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to
TENSION LEVER
“UP” position.
IN “UP” POSITION
10. Install properly-rated, Ansul approved, fusible link
in terminal detector.
11. Cock release mechanism and install lock bar, Part
No. 14985.
12. Locate detector linkage and correctly position in
each bracket.
FIGURE 1
000322
9-1
Section 9 – Resetting and Recharge
6-19-98
REV. 1
CHECK ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT H.A.D. Detection System

(Continued) To properly reset the H.A.D. system, complete the fol-
Mechanical Detection System (Continued) lowing:
13. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position. See 1. Check the condition of all H.A.D. heads and all
Figure 3. tubing runs in the hazard area. Make certain no
14. Inspect base of wire rope clamping device to make damage has been caused to them from the fire.
certain there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) to 3/8 2. Remove the control head from the discharged
in. (9.5 mm) maximum clearance between the base carbon dioxide cylinder.
of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever 3. The carbon dioxide cylinder can now be removed for
assembly. See Figure 3. recharge.
TRIP HAMMER 4. Reset the control head by moving the control head
ASSEMBLY
1/4 IN. (6.4 mm)
indicator to the “SET” position. Indicator arrow on
MINIMUM reset control must point to “SET.”
3/8 IN. (9.5 mm)
MAXIMUM 5. If H.A.D. control head was actuated manually, reset
manual release lever, insert ring pin, and secure
TRIP HAMMER with visual inspection seal.
BASE
Pressure Switch
Reset the pressure switch by completing the following
steps:
1. Make certain all pressure in the line to the switch
FIGURE 3 has been properly relieved.
000323
2. Push in red knob on end of pressure switch plunger.
NOTICE
3. Make certain electrical function has been correctly
If clearance is not 1/4 in. (6.4 mm)
reset.
minimum, raise tension lever to “UP”
position, raise trip hammer 3/8 to 1/2 in. PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE
(9.5 to 12.7 mm), loosen and retighten
set screws, and repeat Steps 13 and 14. Recharge CO2 Cylinder
15. Remove lock bar. Because of the number of different style valves existing
16. Manually test release mechanism by operating the in older systems, this manual will address recharging for
remote manual pull station. the current CV90 valve and also two other styles, the
MAX valve and the AP8 valve.
17. Recock release mechanism and insert lock bar.
18. Reset all devices which were affected by system CV90 VALVE
actuation. NOTICE
Electric Detection System If maintenance is performed on the
valve before recharging, use Mobil 1 oil
ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C RELEASING DEVICE – For on all O-Rings. Mobil 1 oil is the ONLY
complete resetting instructions, refer to Installation, approved lubricant for the CV90 valve.
Operation, and Maintenance Manuals, Part No. 17788
and 31496. The following steps must be followed when recharging
the CV90 valve:
ANSUL AUTOPULSE CONTROL SYSTEM – For com-
1. Remove shipping cap and weigh cylinder. Compare
plete resetting instructions, refer to the appropriate
actual cylinder weight with weight stamped on
installation, operation, and maintenance manual, and
cylinder shoulder. Also check the last date stamped
HF Electric Actuator Application and Installation Sheet,
on the cylinder. Refer to NFPA 12 (Standard on
Part No. 73330.
Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems) for hydro-
static test guidelines.
9-2
PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) 3. With cylinder completely empty, once again,
Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued) depress actuation plunger down until it bottoms out
(approximately 3/8 in. (.9 cm)) and quickly release.
CV90 VALVE (Continued) This will cause the plunger stem to pop up flush or
2. If pressure and/or weight must be relieved, perform within .010 in. (.2 mm) below the top of the actuation
the following: attachment port. This is the correct position for
a. Secure cylinder. proper seating.
b. Make certain discharge outlet cap IS NOT in
place on valve outlet. See Figure 4.
! CAUTION
NOTICE
When depressing the actuation Failure to use proper fill adaptor may cause the
plunger, the anti-recoil will close on valve to actuate due to back pressure build-up.
the valve outlet, but a small amount
of CO2 will discharge out of the NOTICE
outlet, around the anti-recoil device. For recharging the CV90 cylinder
valve, it is necessary to have a
special fill adaptor assembly, Part
No. 45389. The assembly consists
of a fill adaptor, having a 1/2-14
straight male thread for hose
attachment and a discharge outlet
cap.
4. Attach the fill adaptor to the side filling inlet of the
valve. See Figure 6. The side filling inlet is the lower
of the two large threaded ports. Make certain the
washer is in place in the fill adaptor. Screw the
adaptor on the valve filling inlet, wrench tighten.
DISCHARGE OUTLET CAP MUST NOT BE 5. Screw the knurled discharge outlet cap on the dis-
INSTALLED WHILE BLEEDING DOWN CYLINDER.
charge outlet, the highest large threaded port on the
FIGURE 4 side of the valve. See Figure 6. This should be hand
001515
tight only as the pin inside the cap acts to open the
c. Depress actuation plunger stem, located on top anti-recoil. By holding the anti-recoil open, the
of valve, and relieve all cylinder pressure. See residual pressure under the main valve seat is
Figure 5. It may be necessary to repeat this step a relieved, allowing the valve to properly close.
number of times until all pressure is relieved.
FILL ADAPTOR
1/2-14 STRAIGHT
DISCHARGE THREAD
OUTLET CAP
FIGURE 5
001516
FILLING ADAPTOR ASSEMBLY,

PART NO. 45389
FIGURE 6
001517
9-3
6-19-98
REV. 2
PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) RECHARGE CYLINDER

Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued) The following steps must be followed when removing
discharged cylinders from the system:
CV90 VALVE(Continued)
1. Disconnect the flex bend from the cylinder(s) outlet.
6. Place the cylinder on scale and secure with bracket
2. Remove all actuators from the cylinder valves.
or chain to prevent movement during filling.
3. If necessary, remove 1/4 in. actuation hose from
! CAUTION pneumatic actuation port.
4. If necessary, install plug, Part No. 42410, into pneu-
To prevent injury or damage, take proper safety matic actuation port and wrench tighten.
precautions when filling carbon dioxide cylinders.
5. With cylinder secured in bracket, relieve any
7. Attach filling hose to fill adaptor and begin filling by remaining pressure in the cylinder by completing the
slowly opening the fill valve. Gradually open the fill following:
valve until it is completely open. a. Make certain discharge cap IS NOT on valve
outlet. See Figure 7.
NOTICE
If the top actuation plunger drops during
recharge, the valve has opened. Stop
filling and refer to instructions in O-Ring
Reconditioning Kit, Part No. 415250.
You may see a slight amount of residual
CO2 coming out the discharge outlet
during recharging. This is acceptable
and will stop when the cylinder pressure DISCHARGE OUTLET
increases high enough to completely CAP MUST NOT BE
INSTALLED WHILE
seat the valve main seal. BLEEDING DOWN
CYLINDER
8. Fill to cylinder capacity.
NOTICE
FIGURE 7
If CO2 continues to discharge out the 001515
valve outlet after recharge is complete,

the main seal is leaking. Reclaim CO2 ! CAUTION
an replace main seal, using Main Seal
Reconditioning Kit, Part No. 415251. Attach bleed down device, Part No. 426028, to fill
inlet of discharged cylinders only. Never attach
9. Check cylinder valve for leaks.
this device to fully charged cylinders as this will
10. Mark the date and weight on the record card cause high pressure to discharge out of the fill
attached to the neck of the cylinder. Replace valve inlet. Also, install device hand tight only. Do not
shipping cap to prevent damage during shipping wrench tighten. NOTE: Bleed-down device, Part
and handling. No. 416656, CANNOT be used on CV-98 valve.
CV-98 VALVE b. Attach bleed down device, Part No. 426028, to
Recharge procedures for cylinder assemblies utilizing valve fill inlet. See Figure 9.
the CV-98 valve with a CV-98 electric actuator requires
normal cylinder recharging along with replacing the dis-
charged METRON PROTRACTOR located within the
electric actuator.
PIN IN BLEED DOWN DEVICE

WILL DEPRESS CHECK
VALVE IN FILL INLET
FIGURE 8
001853
9-4
6-19-98
REV. 2
PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued)

Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued) 5. Discard used METRON PROTRACTOR assembly.
c. Bleed residue pressure from cylinder. Make cer- A discharged METRON PROTRACTOR will have
tain cylinder is completely empty before the stainless steel pin extending approximately 1/8
removing bleed down device. – 3/16 in. out of the bottom. On a new METRON
PROTRACTOR, the pin will not be visible. See
d. With cylinder completely empty, remove bleed
Figure 10.
down device and install safety shipping cap.
e. Complete Steps a. through d. on all discharged
cylinders, both pilot and slave.
FILLING ADAPTORS
The CV-98 valve utilizes filling adaptors different from
those used for the CV-90 valve. When filling the CV-98
cylinder assemblies, use the following components: PIN EXTENDING APPROXIMATELY
1/8 – 3/16 IN. (.3 – .5 cm) OUT OF
PIN NOT VISIBLE
INDICATES METRON
BODY INDICATES METRON PROTRACTOR PROTRACTOR HAS NOT
CV-98 Fill Adaptor for Part No. 423659 HAS BEEN ACTUATED BEEN ACTUATED
CO2 Cylinders FIGURE 10
001855
CV-98 Conversion Adaptor Part No. 423657
(Converts CV-90 Fill Adaptor 6. Before positioning new METRON PROTRACTOR
for use on CV-98 valves) housing assembly, Part No. 423958, into electric
actuator body, remove the piston. Thoroughly clean
REPLACE METRON PROTRACTOR IN CV-98 ELECTRIC piston and inside bottom surface of actuator body of
ACTUATOR any dirt or foreign material. As the pin is emitted from
To replace the METRON PROTRACTOR in the electric a METRON PROTRACTOR when it operates, a
actuator, complete the following steps: small metal disc is ejected. This metal disc may be
found resting on the piston inside the actuator body.
1. Remove power from electric actuator circuit.
Before replacing the actuated METRON PRO-
2. If equipped, remove manual actuator. TRACTOR assembly with a new one, make certain
3. Remove electric actuator from cylinder valve. this metal disc is removed from the piston area.
4. Unscrew actuator cap. See Figure 9. Replace piston back into body. When replacing
piston, make certain pin end is facing down. Red dot
on bottom of stem must be facing down. See Figure 9.
ACTUATOR CAP
7. Position METRON PROTRACTOR housing
assembly back into electric actuator body, making
PLUNGER certain METRON PROTRACTOR housing
assembly and spring are properly seated in bottom
of actuator body. See Figure 9
METRON PROTRACTOR
ASSEMBLY ! CAUTION
Before completing Step No. 8, make certain the
control panel is reset and the release circuit is not
SPRING
in an actuated mode.
PISTON (PIN END MUST
BE DOWN) – RED DOT ON
BOTTOM OF STEM MUST
FACE DOWN 8. Plug wire connector together. See Figure 9.
ACTUATOR BODY 9. Carefully tuck wire connector at an approximately
45° angle down along the inside of METRON PRO-
TRACTOR housing assembly between the spring
and the inside of the actuator body. NOTE: Make
FIGURE 9 certain wires are not located over top of
001854
housing.
4. Lift actuated METRON PROTRACTOR assembly
housing out of actuator body and disconnect wire 10. Make certain plunger moves freely up and down.
plug. See Figure 9. See Figure 9.
9-5
6-19-98
REV. 1
PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) MAX VALVE

Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued) The MAX valve requires a supply of high pressure
nitrogen to close the valve as part of the CO2 recharge
Replace METRON PROTRACTOR In Electric Actuator procedure. Because of the additional equipment
(Continued) required to properly fill the cylinder, Ansul suggests set-
11. Screw actuator cap back on actuator body. Securely ting up the filling station as shown in Figure 12. Also
tighten. listed below is a recommended tool and equipment list.
12. Make certain piston on bottom of actuator is free to CO2 VENT TO
move up and down. See Figure 11. NOTE: If pin is NITROGEN VENT
TO ATMOSPHERE
ATMOSPHERE
(OUTSIDE)
not visible in bottom hole of actuator, the piston has (OUTSIDE) CO2 VENT
SAFETY
RELIEF FROM
been re-installed incorrectly. Red dot on bottom of VALVE VALVE CO2
CO2 SUPPLY
piston stem must be visible from bottom of actuator. PRESSURE
Disassemble and correct. GAUGE
REGULATOR NITROGEN
W/GAUGES VENT VALVE
CO2 SUPPLY
CO2 FILL
VALVE
HOSE
QUICK
CONNECT
QUICK CO2 FILL
CONNECT VALVE
FILL ADAPTOR
PISTON MUST BE FREE TO BOTTOM OF (PART NO. 70396)
NITROGEN
MOVE UP AND DOWN. ACTUATOR BODY HOSE
RED DOT ON BOTTOM OF MAX
PISTON STEM MUST BE VISIBLE. NITROGEN VALVE
SUPPLY VALVE
FIGURE 11 NITROGEN
CYLINDER
001857
VALVE CLOSING
After the cylinder(s) has been secured back in the ADAPTOR CO2
(PART NO. 70384) CYLINDER
bracket and discharge hose(s) have been reconnected,
attach the actuator(s) by completing the following:
FIGURE 12
001905
! CAUTION
Special Tools and Equipment
Make certain all electric power from the panel to the – Torque Wrench, 1/2 in. Drive, Capable of up to 60 ft.
actuator has been disconnected. Failure to discon- lb. (81.3 Nm)
nect power may cause system to accidentally dis- – Crowfoot Wrench Attachment, 1 3/8 in., 1/2 in. Drive
charge. – Socket, 1 1/2 in., 1/2 in. Drive
1. Make certain CV-98 actuator has been recharged – Silicone Grease, Dow Corning No.4
with a new METRON PROTRACTOR assembly. – Torque Drive, Capable of up to 30 in. lb. (3.4 Nm)
– Automotive Valve Core Tool (Steel)
! CAUTION – Socket Adaptor (Valve Core Tool to Torque Drive)
Before installing electric actuator to top of CV-98 – Recharge Kit (Part No. 78764)
valve, make certain piston in bottom of actuator is Includes: Piston O-Ring–Part No. 68656
free to move up and down. Refer to Figure 11. Piston Gasket–Part No. 68661
Valve Cap O-Ring–Part No. 22604
2. Attach CV-98 actuator to top thread of CV-98 valve. Valve Actuator Seal–Part No. 77423
Securely tighten.
Valve Core (2)–Part No. 31712
3. If the manual actuator was used, apply a small
Safety Wire–Part No. 75828
amount of lubricant, such as WD-40, to the pin
between the handle and the body. Lead Seal–Part No. 45220
4. Attach manual actuator to CV-98 electric actuator.
9-6
6-19-98
REV. 1
PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) 5.Remove slave back-pressure actuator from MAX
Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued) valve actuation cap. Then, remove and discard actu-
ator seal. See Figure 13.
MAX VALVE (Continued)
Recommended Fill System Equipment CO2 FILL HOSE
– Ball Valves and 2000 WOG minimum

FILL ADAPTOR
Pipe ASSEMBLY
– Pipe (if used) Schedule 80 VALVE ACTUATION
CAP
– Hoses (if used) 4000 psi (27576 kPa)
minimum REMOVE AND DISCARD
ACTUATOR SEAL
– Pressure Relief 1200 psi (8273 kPa)
SLAVE BACK-PRESSURE
Valve maximum ACTUATOR REMOVED
Suitable for use with CO2
– Nitrogen Cylinder 0-4000 psi (0-27576 kPa) inlet
Regulator 0-1500 psi (0-10341 kPa) FIGURE 13
001906
outlet with compatible gauges
– CO2 Manifold 0-2000 psi (0-13788 kPa),
! CAUTION
Pressure gauge calibrated
Do not remove valve actuation cap from MAX
! CAUTION valve. If cap is removed from a pressurized CO2
cylinder valve, velocity of unrestricted escaping
Make certain cylinder is secured with a bracket gas is forceful enough to cause injury, especially
or chain during filling and whenever shipping cap about the face and head.
is removed. Failure to comply could result in per-
sonal injury due to violent cylinder movement if 6. Make certain CO2 supply valve is closed and open
cylinder is actuated. CO2 vent valve.
1. Place CO2 cylinder on a weigh scale and secure
with chain or bracket. Then, remove safety shipping ! CAUTION
cap. The vent must be open to outside atmosphere.
2. Remove valve outlet safety plug and attach fill The release of CO2 into an enclosed area will
adaptor (with valve and quick connect) to valve displace the oxygen which could result it uncon-
outlet. See Figure 13. sciousness or suffocation.
! CAUTION 7. Check seals, Part No. 70386 and 76804, on valve

closing adaptor; replace if deteriorated or separated
For safety, do not remove back-pressure actuator from body. Then, attach valve actuation cap. See
at this time as cylinder may contain high CO2 Figure 14.
pressure.
VALVE CLOSING ADAPTOR
3. Close CO2 fill valve. PART NO.
(PART NO. 70384)
70386
4. Attach CO2 fill hose to fill adaptor assembly.
PART NO. 76804
FIGURE 14
001907
! CAUTION
Carbon dioxide can cause freeze burns if it con-

tacts the skin. A face shield and protective gloves
should always be worn when servicing a cylinder
that has been disconnected from discharge hose
and piping.
9-7
6-19-98
REV. 1
PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) 13. Using valve core tool (steel automotive type),
Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued) remove and discard valve core. See Figure 18.
REMOVE AND
MAX VALVE (Continued) DISCARD
VALVE CORE
8. Open MAX valve by inserting a 3/32 in. (.2 cm) diam-
eter rod (not supplied) through valve closing adaptor
VALVE
to depress valve core in actuation cap. See ACTUATION
Figure 15. CAP
PISTON
3/32 IN.
DIAMETER
ROD FIGURE 18
001911
VALVE CLOSING
ADAPTOR WITH 14. Carefully insert 3/32 in. (.2 cm) diameter rod through
QUICK CONNECT
valve core port and push out valve piston. See
Figure 19. Be careful not to damage internal valve
core seat and threads.
3/32 IN.
DIAMETER ROD
FIGURE 15
001908
9. Open CO2 fill valve to allow any residual pressure to

be relieved from cylinder through CO2 vent.
10. Remove rod and valve closing adaptor from actua-
tion cap.
11. Cut and remove safety wire to allow removal of valve
3/32 IN.
actuation cap. See Figure 16. DIAMETER ROD
FIGURE 19
001912
CUT AND REMOVE

SAFETY WIRE 15. Remove O-Ring from groove in upper portion of
piston. See Figure 20. Be careful not to scratch
piston groove. Discard O-Ring.
16. Lubricate new O-Ring, Part No. 68656, with Dow
Corning No. 4 silicone grease. Insert O-Ring into
piston groove.
FIGURE 16 17. Without removing check housing assembly from
001909
piston, visually inspect exposed portion of gasket at
12. Using 1 1/2 in. socket, unscrew valve actuation cap, bottom of piston. See Figure 20. If damaged, remove
with piston assembly, from MAX valve. See check housing and replace gasket, Part No. 68661;
Figure 17. then reinstall check housing.
O-RING
(PART NO. 68656)
REMOVE
VALVE ACTUATION
CAP WITH
PISTON GASKET
(PART NO. 68661)
FIGURE 20
001913
FIGURE 17
001910
9-8
6-19-98
REV. 1
PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) 22. Visually inspect cap-to-body O-Ring. Replace if
damaged. Use O-Ring, Part No. 22604. See Figure
Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued)
23.
MAX VALVE (Continued) 23. Apply a thin film of Dow Corning No. 4 silicone
18. Make certain check housing assembly is tightened grease to valve-to-cap O-Ring.
into bottom of piston to 30 in. lb. (3.4 Nm) torque. If 24. Using 1/2 in. drive torque wrench and 1 1/2 in.
spool is secured in vise, make certain spool body is socket, screw valve actuation cap, with piston
protected. assembly, into MAX valve as shown in Figure 23.
19. Using a vise, press piston into valve actuation cap as Use 60 ft. lb.
shown in Figure 21. Be careful not to damage piston (81.3 Nm) torque. Thread locking compound MUST
O-Ring. Use vise jaw protection to prevent damage NOT BE USED. LUBRICATE
to piston and cap. O-RING
REINSTALL
VALVE VALVE ACTUATION
PISTON CAP WITH PISTON
ACTUATION
CAP
VISE VISE
JAW JAW
FIGURE 21
001914
20. Using torque drive, install valve core into actuation

cap. Tighten to 3 in. lb. (.34 Nm) torque. Do not lubri-
cate valve core seal. FIGURE 23
001916
21. Measure depth of valve core using dial depth indi-
cator: 25. Install new safety wire, Part No.75828, through holes
– Proper depth range is .007 to .020 in. (1.7 to provided in valve actuation cap hex and MAX valve
5.2 mm). See Figure 22. body flat. Secure safety wire using crimp-type lead
seal, Part No. 45220. See Figure 24.
LEAD SEAL
– If valve core depth is greater than .020 in. (PART NO. 45220)
(5.2 mm), replace valve core and measure again.
– If valve core depth is less than .007, retighten
until depth is between .007 and .020 in. (1.7 and SAFETY WIRE
(PART NO. 75828)
5.2 mm) using a maximum 6 in. lb. (.68 Nm)
torque.
– If valve core depth of .007 to .020 in. (1.7 to
5.2 mm) cannot be obtained with 6 in. (.68 Nm)
maximum torque, replace valve core and mea-
sure again.
FIGURE 24
001917
26. Check seals, Part No. 70386 and 76804, on valve

.007 – .020
closing adaptor; replace if deteriorated or separated
(1.7 – 5.1 mm) from body. See Figure 14. Then, attach valve closing
adaptor, with quick connect, to MAX valve actuation
cap.
27. Make certain nitrogen supply valve and nitrogen vent
valve are closed.
28. With nitrogen cylinder valve closed, attach nitrogen
FIGURE 22 hose to valve closing adaptor.
001915
29. Close CO2 vent valve and open CO2 supply valve
until cylinder is filled to rated capacity. Then, close
CO2 supply valve.
9-9
6-19-98
REV. 1
PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) 37. Inspect sealing edges on slave back-pressure actu-
Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued) ator, Part No. 68713, for nicks, gouges, etc. Replace
if damaged. See Figure 26.
MAX VALVE (Continued)
30. Open nitrogen cylinder valve and adjust nitrogen
regulator until pressure reading is 250 to 300 psi BACK-PRESSURE
ACTUATOR
(1724 to 2068 kPa) higher than CO2 pressure indi- (PART NO. 68713)
cated on CO2 pressure gauge.
NOTICE
Pressure in nitrogen cylinder must be
1000 psi (6894 kPa) minimum to assure INSPECT SEALING EDGES
that adequate pressure is available for FIGURE 26
closing MAX valve. 001919
38. Reset back-pressure actuator to its fully retracted

Wait until frost clears from MAX valve (set) position. See Figure 27.
body (approximately 1 to 2 minutes)
before continuing to Step 31.
31. Open nitrogen supply valve for 5 seconds to close
MAX valve. Then, close nitrogen supply valve.
32. Open nitrogen vent valve to relieve pressure from
nitrogen manifold.
33. Slowly open CO2 vent valve. With valve fully open,
venting should continue for only a short time to allow PISTON IN FULLY
CO2 manifold to relieve. If venting continues, close RETRACTED (SET) POSITION
CO2 vent valve, increase nitrogen regulator setting FIGURE 27

001920
by 50 psi (345 kPa), and repeat Steps 31 and 32.
Excessive nitrogen closing pressure, 1100 psi (7584 39. Install slave back-pressure actuator into valve actu-
kPa) maximum, indicates a need for valve teardown, ation cap. After cylinders have been reinstalled in
cleaning, and lubricating. system, torque all back-pressure actuators to 40 ft.
lb. (54.2 Nm) using 1/2 in. drive torque wrench and
34. Remove nitrogen hose and valve closing adaptor. 1 3/8 in. crowfoot wrench attachment.
35. Using soap solution or water bath, check valve core 40. Remove CO2 hose and CO2 fill adaptor.
for leakage. If leakage is detected, repeat Steps 6 Immediately reinstall safety plug in MAX valve
through 34. outlet.
36. Install new actuator seal, Part No. 77423, so that 41. Check MAX valve for leaks and note recharge infor-
seal ridge rests in cap recess as shown in Figure 25. mation on record tag.
ACTUATOR 42. Reinstall safety shipping cap, Part No. 70209, on
SEAL
(PART NO. 77423) cylinder collar.
! CAUTION
RIDGE IN
DOWN POSITION
Never leave CO2 cylinder unguarded or unse-
cured without the safety plug in place. If plug is
not in place and cylinder is discharged, escaping
CO2 or cylinder movement could cause injury or
property damage.
FIGURE 25
001918
9-10
6-19-98
REV. 1
PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) Any leak at the valve outlet indicates leakage past the
Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued) main check. This could be caused by:
a. Nick on the main seat.
AP-8 VALVE
b. Foreign material on or damage to the main seal of
For recharging the AP-8 cylinder valve, it is necessary to the main check.
have a special filling adaptor assembly. The assembly,
c. The main check is not seating properly due to distor-
Part No. 45389, is composed of a hose adaptor, having a
tion of the valve bore. Such distortion is usually evi-
1/2-14 male thread for hose attachment and a discharge
dent in the area of the safety disc due to over-
outlet cap.
torquing of the safety disc nut. A maximum torque of
The hose adaptor is attached to the side filling inlet, nor- 23 ft. lbs. (31.2 Nm) is to be used when installing the
mally covered with a knurled cap with four holes in it. safety disc nut.
See Figure 28. Be sure that the O-Ring is in place Leakage out of the top of the valve (with the bonnet cap
around the charging hole in the adaptor before attaching removed), usually also indicates leakage past the main
adaptor. Install adaptor wrench tight. check.
The knurled discharge outlet cap should be attached Leakage out the vent may be due to a number of rea-
onto the discharge outlet, the lowest outlet on the side of sons:
the valve. See Figure 28. This should be attached hand a. Leakage past the pressure release check, Part No.
tight only as the pin inside the cap acts to hold open the 42394, due to foreign material on the seat, damage
outlet check. By holding the outlet check open, the to its seal, or a scored release check seat, Part No.
residual pressure under the main valve seat is relieved, 42413.
allowing the valve to close properly.
b. Leakage past the copper washer, Part No. 42255,
below the release check seat.
HOSE ADAPTOR
1/2-14 STR. THREAD ! CAUTION
DISCHARGE When removing the piston assembly, Part No.

OUTLET 42416, make certain piston is not forced down
CAP
before taking it from the valve body. If piston is
forced down, either by hand or by the tool used to
remove it, it could cause the valve to open and
FIGURE 28 the cylinder to discharge.
001921
Whether leakage is due to a. or b. above, it can be

! CAUTION determined by removing the bonnet cap and the
piston assembly, Part No. 42416, and observing
To prevent injury or damage, take proper safety pre-
whether the leak is at the periphery of the release
cautions when filling carbon dioxide cylinders.
check seat (indicating leakage past the copper
washer) or past the check stem (indicating leakage
To recharge cylinder, place cylinder on scale and secure past the check).
with bracket or chain to prevent movement during filling.
c. Leakage out of the vent may also be caused by
Attach filling adaptor as described above. Attach filling
leakage past the copper washer, Part No. 42387,
hose to adaptor and fill with dry CO2 to proper weight.
under the valve bonnet.
The total full weight of the cylinder and valve is stamped
on the side of the valve. Leakage at the filling inlet can be caused by:
a. Ice forming in the inlet or attachments
When the charging hose and adaptor are detached, the
check in the filling inlet will seat under pressure and no b. Leakage past the filling check due to foreign mate-
further sealing is necessary. The knurled cap should be rial on the seat, damage to its seal, or scoring of the
replaced on the filling inlet for protection. seat.
Be sure to mark the date and weight on the record card
Check valve for possible leaks. Should a leak be discov-
attached to the neck of the cylinder. Replace valve ship-
ered, the following information may help in determining
ping cap to prevent damage during handling and ship-
what the cause is.
ping.
9-11
6-19-98
REV. 1
PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) Before reinstalling HF electric actuator, check to see if
Pneumatic Valve Actuator the actuator is armed or fired.
1. Check to see if the actuator is armed or fired by
Reinstall each pneumatic valve actuator by completing the
referring to steps a. and b. respectively.
following steps:
a. The actuator is armed if the following conditions
1. Ensure that pneumatic valve actuator internal piston
exist: See Figure 30.
is in the full “UP” position by forcing the piston up, by
hand or with a short length of 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. pipe. – When the plunger is pushed, the actuator pin
See Figure 29. will move freely up and down approximately 1/8
in. (3.2 mm).
PISTON
– When the actuator is held upright, the plunger
will be approximately flush with the top surface
of the actuator.
– The pin is retracted .010 to .015 in. (.25 to .38
mm) inside the reference surface at the bottom
PISTON MUST BE “UP” INCORRECT
of the actuator.
BEFORE INSTALLING
ACTUATION IN ARMED POSITION PLUNGER
(FLUSH WITH
FIGURE 29 TOP SURFACE)
001883
2. Remove the actuation safety shipping cap from the

top of the valve and wrench-tighten the pneumatic
actuator to the slave assembly.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each additional pneumatic ACTUATION
PIN
valve actuator. ARMED
.010 – .015 IN.
HF Electric Valve Actuator FREE PIN
.(25 – .38 MM)
PIN
Note: HF Electric Actuator cannot be used to actuate an TRAVEL REFERENCE SURFACE
AP-8 valve or a CV-98 valve. 1/8 IN. REFERENCE SURFACE

(3.2 CM)
! CAUTION FIGURE 30
001922
The carbon dioxide system will actuate if the HF elec-
b. The actuator is in the fired position if the following
tric actuator pin is down, in the fired position. Before
conditions exist: See Figure 31.
each installation, make certain all actuators are in the
armed condition. ACTUATION IN FIRED POSITION TOP OF PLUNGER APPROXIMATELY
1/8 IN. (.3 cm) BELOW TOP SURFACE
ACTUATOR
PIN
PIN OUTSIDE
REFERENCE SURFACE REFERENCE SURFACE
FIGURE 31
001923
– When pushed, the actuator pin will have no

movement.
– When the actuator is held upright, the plunger
will be below the top surface of the actuator.
9-12
6-19-98
PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) 7. Feed lead and wire seal, Part No. 75568, through
Electric Valve Actuator (Continued) hole in actuator swivel hex. Wrap around actuator
body, over conduit connection, and back to swivel
2. To arm the actuator, use arming tool, Part No. hex. Then, crimp seal to wire.
75433, to force the pin inside the reference surface
DO NOT REMOVE CAP UNLESS INSTALLING
until a distinct “click” is heard. See Figure 32. To ADDITIONAL ACTUATOR
verify that the actuator is properly armed, repeat
Step 1.
HF ELECTRIC
NOTICE ACTUATOR
Considerable force, 45-50 lbs. (13-23 LEAD AND WIRE SEAL
(PART NO. 75568)
kg) is required to arm the HF electric
actuator.
CV90 VALVE
ACTUATOR
PIN
CO2 CYLINDER
PUSH UP UNTIL
REFERENCE "CLICK" IS HEARD FIGURE 33
SURFACE 001851
ARMING TOOL
(PART NO. 75433) Manual Valve Actuator
Before installing manual actuator back unto cylinder
valve or electric actuator, make certain manual actuator
FIGURE 32 is in the “SET” position. On manual actuator with ring
001924
pins, make certain ring pin is in position and secured

3. If no other actuators are to be installed on top of the
with a visual inspection seal.
HF electric actuator, reinstall black safety cap after
arming. Manual Pull Station
4. To install HF actuator to cylinder valve, remove actu- Reset remote manual pull station by completing the fol-
ation shipping cap from top threads of CV90 cylinder lowing steps:
valve.
1. If necessary, remove set screw that is retaining the
5. Make certain HF electric actuator is properly armed. break glass rod.
See Step 2.
2. If necessary, carefully remove any remaining
6. Thread the HF electric actuator onto top threads of broken glass from station.
cylinder valve. Do not exceed 10 ft. lb. torque. See
3. Press and position handle in proper location against
Figure 33.
cover and slide the replacement glass break rod,
Part No. 4834, through stud and handle.
4. Tighten set screw into stud.
Replace ANSUL AUTOMAN Cartridge

Install new cartridge by completing the following steps:
1. Remove shipping cap and weigh replacement car-
tridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or
more, below weight stamped on cartridge.
2. Make certain release mechanism is cocked and lock
bar is installed. Then, install replacement cartridge
into release assembly and hand tighten.
3. Remove lock bar.
4. Secure cover on ANSUL AUTOMAN and seal with
visual inspection seal.
5. Record recharge date on tag attached to unit and/or
in a permanent file.
9-13
NOTES:
9-14
ANSUL 
Section 10
Inspection
Inspection is a “quick check” that a system is operable. It DISTRIBUTION PIPING AND NOZZLES
is intended to give reasonable assurance that the Check that the piping is secure and nozzles are in place.
system is fully charged and will operate. This is done by Make certain the nozzles are not covered with dirt,
seeing that the system has not been tampered with and grease, or paint. Make certain nozzles are aimed in the
there is no obvious physical damage, or condition, to proper direction.
prevent operation. The value of an inspection lies in the
frequency, and thoroughness, with which it is con-
ducted. Systems should be inspected at regular monthly ALARMS AND SIRENS
intervals, or at more frequent intervals when circum- Check that they are in place and are not damaged.
stances require.
The following visual checks should be performed during MISCELLANEOUS
a CO2 system inspection: Make a check list of details that are important to the
system which are not discussed above, i.e., has the
MANUAL PULL STATION hazard size or configuration been changed? Are
Check that it has not been tampered with and is ready dampers or doors jarred open where they shouldn’t be?
for operation. Lead and wire seal or break rod must be in Are special signs in place? Are nozzles obstructed by
place. equipment moved in the area? Are there any conditions
that would hinder the operation of the system?
DETECTORS
Check that they are in place, not damaged or coated
with dirt, grease, paint, or any contaminating substance.
CONTROL SYSTEM
Make certain the panel has not been tampered with and
that the green “power on” light is illuminated. No other
system lights should be on.
ANSUL AUTOMAN RELEASING DEVICE

Make certain the releasing device has not been tam-
pered with, and that the visual inspection seal is not
broken or missing.
CYLINDER
Check that the mounting brackets are secure. Visually
check cylinder for any dents or signs of corrosion.
CYLINDER ACTUATOR
Make certain the electric, pneumatic, or manual actu-
ator(s) are in place. Check that the actuation piping
and/or wiring has not been tampered with or discon-
nected.
10-1
Section 10 – Inspection
NOTES:
10-2
ANSUL 
Section 11
6-19-98
REV. 1
Maintenance
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION 10. If provided, make certain each electric, pneumatic,
Systems shall be maintained at regular intervals, not or fusible link detector is unobstructed and not dam-
more than six-months apart, or when specifically indi- aged. Inspect each detector for dirt and dust accu-
cated by an inspection. Maintenance is a “thorough mulation. Fusible links should be replaced every six
check” of the system. It is intended to give maximum months or sooner depending on conditions.
assurance that a system will operate effectively and 11. Weigh each cylinder by completing the following:
safely. It includes a thorough examination and any nec- a. Loosen the mounting bracket on the cylinder.
essary repair, recharge, or replacement. It will reveal if b. Attach the weigh scale, Part No. 74241, to the
there is a need for hydrostatic testing of the cylinder. weigh rail above the cylinder. Thread lifting yoke,
Part No. 69877, on cylinder collar threads and lift
NOTICE
cylinder from floor. Record weight while cylinder
Before proceeding with semi-annual
is suspended. See Figure 1.
maintenance examination, insert lock
bar in ANSUL AUTOMAN release and 21 IN. BEAM
(53.3 cm)
ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release and BEAM MUST BE HORIZONTAL
FOR CORRECT WEIGHT
remove nitrogen cartridge. Install safety ANGLE IRON READING
WEIGHING RAIL
shipping cap on cartridge.
SCALE ROTATED 90°
LIFTING YOKE, FOR CLEARNESS,
1. Note appearance of the system and component PART NO. 69877 PART NO. 74241
parts, checking for mechanical damage or corro- SCALE EYE
sion.
CARBON DIOXIDE CYLINDER
2. Remove HF or CV-98 electric valve actuator or CYLINDER SADDLE
H.A.D. actuator (if provided) from each cylinder and
reinstall actuation safety shipping cap on the valve.
3. Remove pneumatic valve actuator or lever actuator FLOOR
(if provided) from each tank and reinstall safety

shipping cap on the valve assembly.
FIGURE 1
4. Remove cylinder(s) from distribution piping by dis- 001925
connecting flexible hose at the valve outlet. Install c. Compare actual weight with weight stamped on
safety shipping cap on cylinder valve. the cylinder collar. If cylinder weight loss exceeds
5. Check nameplate(s) for readability, corrosion, or 10 percent of weight stamped on cylinder collar,
looseness. cylinder must be recharged or replaced.
6. Check distribution piping for mechanical damage or d. Check hydrostatic date stamped on cylinder
corrosion. Make certain piping connections are tight collar. Cylinder may require hydrostatic testing.
and hangers are secured to prevent excessive pipe Refer to NFPA 12, Standard on Carbon Dioxide
movement during a discharge. Extinguishing Systems, for detailed instructions
7. Examine each discharge nozzle for mechanical concerning hydrostatic test requirements.
damage, corrosion, or obstructions. Make certain
discharge nozzle orifices are clear and aimed cor-
! CAUTION
rectly at the hazard.
8. Check actuation piping for mechanical damage or DO NOT reinstall any actuator to cylinder
corrosion. Make certain the piping connections are valve at this time. Actuators must remain off
tight and hangers are secure. valve until they have been tested. If actuators
9. Check each pull station for mechanical damage. are mounted on cylinder valve at this time,
Make certain each pull station is unobstructed, that accidental actuation and discharge will result
operating instructions are visible and (if provided), when actuators are tested.
break glass rod is in place.
11-1
Section 11 – Maintenance
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION 7. Cock ANSUL AUTOMAN mechanism using cocking

(Continued) lever, Part No. 14995. See Figure 3.
12. Reattach flex bend to cylinder valve outlet and
reclamp cylinder in bracket.
Fusible Link Detection/Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN

Release
1. Make certain lock bar, Part No. 14985, is in place in
ANSUL AUTOMAN release mechanism. See
Figure 2.
FIGURE 3
LOCK BAR 001882
PROPERLY INSTALLED
8. Remove empty nitrogen cartridge and reset all aux-
iliary devices.
! CAUTION
FIGURE 2
000321
Pneumatic cylinder actuator(s) must be reset
2. Make certain no pneumatic actuators are installed prior to installing on cylinder valve or system will
to any cylinder valves. actuate.
! CAUTION
9. Reset pneumatic tank actuator(s). See Figure 4.
During this maintenance test, if any pneumatic
actuators are installed to cylinder valves, the NOTICE
testing of the system will cause cylinder dis- Piston should move up and down with
charge. little resistance. If not, a small amount of
Dow Corning 4 Silicone grease should
be placed into the piston bore when the
3. Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in ANSUL piston is up. Operate the piston up and
AUTOMAN release mechanism. Check gasket for down 2 or 3 times. If the piston is still
elasticity or cuts and replace if necessary. Clean hard to move, the actuator should be
and coat gasket lightly with a good grade of extreme replaced. Make certain actuator is left in
temperature grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge the reset (piston up) position.
receiver.
4. Install LT-30-R cartridge in ANSUL AUTOMAN
release. Hand tighten. PISTON
5. Remove lock bar and manually test system by oper-

ating the remote manual pull station or push “strike”
button on ANSUL AUTOMAN release.
6. After operating manually, check that functions have
been accomplished and the pneumatic tank actu- PISTON MUST BE “UP”
INCORRECT
ator(s) have actuated. BEFORE INSTALLING
FIGURE 4
001883
11-2
6-19-98
REV. 1
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION 18. Lower the tension lever to “DOWN” position. See
(Continued) Figure 6.
Fusible Link Detection/Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN 19. Recock the release mechanism and insert the lock
Release (Continued) bar.
10. Make certain release mechanism is cocked. 20. Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to
make certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in.
11. Raise tension lever to “UP” position. See Figure 5.
(6.4 mm) to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maximum clearance
between the base of the trip hammer assembly and
the cable lever assembly. See Figure 7.
TRIP HAMMER
ASSEMBLY
TENSION LEVER
IN “UP” POSITION 1/4 IN. (6.4 mm)
MINIMUM
3/8 IN. (9.5 mm)
MAXIMUM
TRIP HAMMER
BASE
FIGURE 5
000322
12. Install test link, Part No. 15751, in terminal detector.

13. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position. See
Figure 6.
FIGURE 7
000323
21. Locate detector linkage and properly position in

TENSION LEVER
each bracket.
IN “DOWN” POSITION 22. Make certain additional devices have operated as
intended.
23. Before reinstalling cartridge, reset all additional
equipment by referring to appropriate section of
Resetting and Recharge, Section 9.
FIGURE 6 24. Remove shipping cap and weigh each nitrogen car-
001926 tridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g) or
14. Using wire cutter, cut test link at terminal detector to more, below weight stamped on cartridge.
simulate automatic actuation. 25. Make certain release mechanism is cocked and lock
15. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to bar is installed, screw cartridge into release mecha-
“UP” position. nism and hand tighten.
16. Clean and return properly-rated, Ansul approved, 26. Remove lock bar.
fusible link to terminal detector. 27. Install cover on enclosure, install ring pin through
“STRIKE” button, and secure with visual seal,
NOTICE
Part No. 197.
Fusible links installed in system for
six months or more must be 28. Reinstall pneumatic actuator(s) on cylinder valves.
replaced. 29. Record semi-annual maintenance date on tag
attached to unit and/or in a permanent file.
17. Remove, clean, and return additional fusible links to
series detector linkage(s). Fusible links loaded with
extraneous material can result in excessive delays
in actuation.
11-3
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION 8. Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in ANSUL

(Continued) AUTOMAN II-C release mechanism. Check gasket
Thermal Detection/Electric ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C for elasticity or cuts and replace if necessary. Clean
Release and coat gasket lightly with a good grade of extreme
temperature grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge
1. Make certain ring pin is in place in ANSUL receiver.
AUTOMAN II-C release mechanism. See Figure 8.
RESET ! CAUTION
LEVER
Pneumatic cylinder actuator must be reset prior
RING PIN to installing on cylinder valve or system will
actuate.
9. Reset pneumatic cylinder actuator(s). See Figure 9.
NOTICE
Piston should move up and down with
FIGURE 8 little resistance. If not, a small amount
001894
of Dow Corning 4 Silicone grease
2. Make certain no pneumatic actuator(s) are installed
should be placed into the piston bore
on any cylinder valves.
when the piston is up. Operate the
piston up and down 2 or 3 times. If the
! CAUTION piston is still hard to move, the
actuator should be replaced. Make
During this maintenance test, if any pneumatic
certain actuator is left in the reset
actuators are installed to cylinder valves, the
(piston up) position.
testing of the system will cause cylinder dis-
charge.
PISTON
3. If necessary, install LT-30-R cartridge in ANSUL

AUTOMAN II-C release. Hand tighten.
4. Remove ring pin and manually test system by oper-
ating the remote manual pull station or push PISTON MUST BE “UP” INCORRECT
“STRIKE” button on ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C BEFORE INSTALLING
release.
5. After operating manually, check that all functions FIGURE 9
001883
have been accomplished and the pneumatic
10. Make certain the release mechanism is cocked and
cylinder actuator(s) have actuated.
ring pin is removed.
6. Cock ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release mechanism
using cocking lever, Part No. 26310, and install ring
pin.
7. Remove empty nitrogen cartridge and reset all aux-
iliary devices.
11-4
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION H.A.D. Detection/Mechanical Control Head

(Continued)
Thermal Detection/Electric ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C ! CAUTION
Release (Continued)
11. Test each thermal detector by submerging in a pan of For systems with dual control heads, remove both
hot or boiling water or by using an approved heat heads before testing.
lamp. Test each detector individually and recock
release mechanism after each test. 1. With mechanical control head disconnected from
cylinder, remove locking pin and operate local
NOTICE manual control to test proper operation of head.
If system does not fire, check the 2. Replace locking pin and reset control head. DO
integrity of the solenoid by using an NOT attach control head to cylinder valve.
ohmmeter and measure the resis-
3. Inspect H.A.D. detectors and clean off all foreign
tance of the solenoid coil. If it is not
within the resistance range, replace substances. Failure to clean detecting device will
solenoid. There are two different sole- seriously impair the efficiency of the automatic fea-
noids used in the ANSUL AUTOMAN ture of the system which may result in a failure to
II-C release and their resistance is as detect the fire.
follows: 4. To test the H.A.D. detector, make certain the control
head is not mounted on the cylinder valve.
Number Stamped Resistance Submerge H.A.D. detector in container of hot water,
on Solenoid Measurement 180 °F to 200 °F, (82 °C to 93 °C). It is not advisable
P4-2025 12-18 ohms to use torch on detectors since they are very sensi-
TBX16-C-12 VDC 21-32 ohms tive to heat. Check control heads to see that they
have operated.
12. With release mechanism cocked, install ring pin.
See Figure 8.
! CAUTION
13. Before installing cartridge, reset all additional equip-
ment by referring to appropriate section of Resetting Be sure head is reset. Indicator arrow must be in
and Recharge, Section 9. “SET” position. Failure to reset will cause acci-
14. Remove shipping cap and weigh each nitrogen car- dental discharge of the system. Allow detectors
tridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or to cool for at least five minutes before resetting
more, below weight stamped on cartridge. control heads.
15. Make certain release mechanism is cocked and ring
pin is installed, screw replacement cartridge into 5. Reset control head, reinstall on cylinder valve, and
release mechanism and hand tighten. wrench tighten swivel nut. Do not exceed 10 ft. lb.
16. Remove ring pin. (13.6 Nm) torque.
17. Install cover on enclosure, install ring pin through 6. Install new seal wire on control head(s).
"STRIKE" button, and secure with visual seal, Part 7. Record semi-annual maintenance date on tag
No. 197. attached to unit and/or in a permanent file.
18. Reinstall pneumatic actuator(s) on cylinder valves.
Make certain actuator(s) have been reset before
installing on cylinder valve.
19. Record semi-annual maintenance date on tag
attached to unit and/or in a permanent file.
11-5
SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION

(Continued)
Electric Detection/AUTOPULSE Control System
NOTICE
Remove the HF electric valve actuator
and any additional actuators from the
cylinder valve prior to testing the
AUTOPULSE Control System. Failure
to do so will cause accidental system
discharge.
Perform system semi-annual maintenance by following

the instructions listed in the appropriate AUTOPULSE
Control System Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance Manual and the HF Electric Actuator
Application and Installation Sheet, Part No. 73330.
11-6
ANSUL 
Section 12
Typical Applications
In order to help understand the design process, twelve

example hazards are covered in this section. There may be
different design approaches that can be taken for each
hazard. The examples are only intended to show what has
to be done to complete the design and hydraulic calcula-
tions.
An outline of each of the example hazards is provided and
each item is listed in the numerical order in which it should
be performed.
12-1
Section 12 – Typical Applications
EXAMPLE NO. 1 – DIP TANKS

A dip tank operation may consist of a simple hand held
basket of parts or may be a more complex operation with
material being conveyed to the tank by an overhead mono-
rail conveyor, or parts dipped by an overhead hoist.
The tank may or may not be enclosed by a hinged lid and
often has a drain board or drip area which may or may not be
enclosed.
The hazard to be protected would be the liquid surface of the
tank, any hanging material above the drip area, the drain
board/drip area, and any associated pumps within the area.
If an exhaust system is utilized, this must also be protected.
It is essential that all pumps, motorized conveyor, heaters,
and ventilation fans be stopped. The exhaust duct, if any,
must be dampered to close upon system actuation.
In paint and varnish operations, it is common practice for the
dipped parts to be dried in a bake oven. The authority having
jurisdiction may require that the oven also be protected.
Hazard
The dip tank is 8 ft. 10 1/2 in. x 4 ft. 5 in. with a 6 in. free board.
The drainboard is 7 ft. x 4 ft. 5 in.
Nozzles are not to be closer than 30 in. from the surface.
Hanging parts are within 1 ft. 6 in. from the surface.
Factory Mutual is the insurance authority.
ITEM NO. 1 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation
sheet with the information required to determine flow rate
and total quantity of agent.
ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as
accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number
of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles.
ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information
on pipe lengths,fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the
input form.
ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No.1.The first print out that the
computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, dis-
charge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print
out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given
in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point
to choose the nearest nominal orifice size available and re-
input the hydraulic calculations data (nozzle codes and pipe
sizes) to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pres-
sures do not fall below the approved minimums.
ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and
pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print
out will verify that the system will function properly.
ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be
generated to show the complete list of all required hard-
ware.
12-2

Item No. 1 – Calculation Sheet
001927
12-3

Item No. 2 – Drawing
001928
12-4

Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form/1
001929
12-5

001930
12-6

Item No. 4 – Print Out No. 1/1
001931
12-7

001932
12-8

001933
12-9

001934
12-10

001935
12-11

001936
12-12

Item No. 6 – Bill Of Material
001937
12-13
EXAMPLE NO. 2 – COMPUTER ROOM AND SUBFLOOR ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information
Electronic data processing involves storage, recall and use on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the
of information via electronic equipment. Due to the input form.
extremely high dollar value of equipment and data con- ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the
tained within the computer facility, the necessity for fire pro- computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, dis-
tection in combination with a fast responding detection charge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print
system is readily apparent. out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given
The computer room and subfloor space can be protected in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point
with a total flood carbon dioxide system, especially when to choose the nearest nominal size orifice available and re-
the computer room is normally unoccupied. input the hydraulic calculations to make certain the dis-
charge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the
Fires can occur as deep seated fires within the computer approved minimums.
electrical insulation and in the cable bundles in the subfloor.
Paper debris that has been allowed to accumulate in the ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and
subfloor is also a source for ignition. pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print
The CO2 system is designed in accordance with NFPA 12,
which states that a 30%concentration must be achieved ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be
within two minutes and a design concentration of 50% must generated to show the complete list of all required hard-
be reached within seven minutes. Design concentration ware.
must be maintained for a period of not less than twenty
minutes.
Factory Mutual (FM) requires a 65% design concentration if
the subfloor is constructed of combustible material, or has
contents other than cable. FM also requires the design con-
centration of 65% then be held for a minimum of thirty
minutes.
Occasionally, drainage is installed in the subfloor area.
Provisions must be made for making the drain piping a
closed system unless water is present to assist in assuring
the necessary concentration.
When the computer room is normally occupied, personnel
safety is of first concern. Alarms must be located in the room
and a mechanical time delay must be incorporated in the
system to allow sufficient time for personnel to evacuate the
room prior to discharge.
Smoke detection is generally used.
The authority having jurisdiction may have additional
requirements.
Hazard
A computer room having dimensions of 70 ft. x 50 ft. x 8 ft.
A subfloor having dimensions of 70 ft. x 50 ft. x 1 ft.
No unclosable openings.
Ventilation to be shut down at system actuation.
12-14
EXAMPLE NO. 2 – COMPUTER ROOM AND SUBFLOOR

Item No. 1 – Calculation Sheet/1
001938
12-15
REV. 1

001939
12-16

Item No. 2 – Drawing/1
001940
12-17

Item No. 2 – Drawing/2
001941
12-18

001942
12-19

001943
12-20

001944
12-21

001945
12-22

001946
12-23

001947
12-24

001948
12-25

001949
12-26

001950
12-27

001951
12-28

001952
12-29

001953
12-30

001954
12-31

001955
12-32

001956
12-33

001957
12-34

001958
12-35

001959
12-36
EXAMPLE NO. 3 – WAVE SOLDER MACHINE ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.The second printout reflects
A typical wave solder machine consists of an enclosure and the first hydraulic run using 3-100 lb. cylinders (total of 300
fume exhaust system. The machine usually employs a lbs.) instead of 3-75 lb. cylinders as first was used. Notice
motorized conveyor for transporting parts from flux tubs to a the nozzle orifices need to be rounded to a nominal size and
preheater and then to the solder pots, all of which are within then rerun to determine everything is still acceptable.
the enclosure. ITEM NO. 6 – Print Out No. 3.This printout confirms that
Access doors may be installed on one or both sides of the after the orifices sizes and pipe sizes were inputted, the
enclosure. If these doors are always in the closed position, resulting hydraulic calculations are acceptable.
then the enclosure may be treated as a total flood hazard. In ITEM NO. 7 – Bill of Material.This should then be com-
those cases where the doors are left open, the hazardous pleted for the system protecting the open sided wave solder
surface must be treated as a local application hazard. machine.
In any case, the exhaust system would be considered as a ITEM NO. 8 – Calculation Sheet. Fill out the calculation
total flood hazard. A fire condition can exist when an excess sheet with the information required to determine flow rate
amount of flux is applied to the parts and is then ignited by and total quantity of agent for the enclosed wave solder
the preheater or the molten solder which can be at a temper- machine.
ature of 500 °F to 550 °F (260 °C to 288 °C). ITEM NO. 9 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as
Shut down of all heating sources, pumps, conveyor and accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number
exhaust system must be automatically accomplished prior of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles.
to the carbon dioxide system discharge. It is essential that ITEM NO. 10 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information
the duct be dampered with the damper to close upon on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the
system actuation. input form.
Hazard ITEM NO. 11 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the
Enclosure with dimensions of 16 ft. x 4 ft. x 3 ft. computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, dis-
Two conveyor openings of 2 ft. x 6 in., down 3 ft. 6 in. from charge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print
top of the enclosure. out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given
Exhaust duct is 9 in. diameter and 12 ft. long. to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and re-
A reserve system is required. input the hydraulic calculations to make certain the dis-
Two design approaches: open sides and enclosed. charge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the
approved minimums.
sheet with the information required to determine flow rate ITEM NO. 12 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and
and total quantity of agent. pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print
accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number ITEM NO. 13 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be
of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. generated to show the complete list of all required hard-
ware.
on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the
input form.
ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the
out, the computer printed out a warning stating the dis-
charge time of 29.9 seconds was below the minimum local
application time of 30 seconds. It is not possible on this
example to lengthen the time by reducing the flow rate
because the flow rate is already very close to the minimum.
Therefore, it is necessary to add more agent.
12-37
EXAMPLE NO. 3 – WAVE SOLDER MACHINE

001960
12-38

001961
12-39

001962
12-40

001963
12-41

001964
12-42

001965
12-43

001966
12-44

001967
12-45

001968
12-46

001969
12-47

Item No.5 – Print Out No. 2/3
001970
12-48

001971
12-49

001972
12-50

001973
12-51

001974
12-52

001975
12-53

001976
12-54

Item No. 10 – Hydraulic Input Form
001977
12-55

001978
12-56

001979
12-57

001980
12-58

001981
12-59

Item No. 13 – The Bill Of Material
001982
12-60
REV. 1
EXAMPLE NO. 4 – ELECTRICAL CABINETS ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and
Electrical cabinets contain equipment and wiring subject to pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print
fire due to an electrical fault. Burning insulation soon out will verify that the system will function properly.
becomes deep-seated in nature.The common approach to ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be
fire protection is to totally flood the enclosure. This is accom- generated to show the complete list of all required hard-
plished by injecting a sufficient quantity of carbon dioxide ware.
within the cabinet to suppress the fire and allow a “soaking’’
period.
Electrical cabinets may have a completely open interior or
be compartmentalized. If the cabinet construction consists
of a series of compartments, a CO2 nozzle and detector
must be installed in each compartment.
Cabinets may be reasonably “tight’’ or may have loose fit-
ting doors or louver openings. If leakage is appreciable,
making it difficult to maintain the required CO2 concentra-
tion over a set period of time, then an extended discharge of
CO2 will be required.
NFPA 12 states that a 50% concentration of CO2 is required
for dry electrical fires in general and that a 30% concentra-
tion shall be achieved within two minutes with the design
concentration being achieved within seven minutes. In
addition, the design concentration must be maintained for a
minimum of twenty minutes.
Electrical power and any ventilation must be shut down prior
to the CO2 discharge.
Hazard
The room contains a series of five electrical cabinets, each
measuring 5 ft. x 4 ft. x 7 ft. high.
The room is 50 ft. x 40 ft. x 10 ft.
Each cabinet has a louvered door. The louvers measure 3 ft.
x 4 in. and the center of each louver is 5 ft. from the top of the
cabinet.
input form.
to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and re-
input the hydraulic calculations to make certain the dis-
approved minimums.
12-61
EXAMPLE NO. 4 – ELECTRICAL CABINETS

001983
12-62

001984
12-63

001985
12-64

001986
12-65

001987
12-66

001988
12-67

001989
12-68

001990
12-69

001991
12-70

001992
12-71
EXAMPLE NO. 5 – TRANSFORMERS Items 7 through 12 are for deep-seated protection.

Transformers may be either set in the open or in vaults. Items 13 through 19 are for open, local application protec-
Transformers in vaults are treated as surface type total flood tion.
hazards. If there is a possibility that a heated transformer ITEM NO. 1– Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation
core could produce a “deep-seated’’ fire in the insulation, sheet with the information required to determine flow rate
then treating the vault as a “deep-seated’’ hazard may be and total quantity of agent.
justified. This should be determined by consulting with the ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as
owners and the authority having jurisdiction. accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number
Transformers located in the open, where it is impractical to of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles.
flood the room, are protected by locally applying CO2 using ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information
the rate by area method. Discharge nozzles are located on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the
around the transformer in order to completely engulf the input form.
transformer with CO2. Discharge nozzles are located in
accordance with UL listings regarding discharge rate, dis- ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the
tance and area of coverage. computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, dis-
If egress is difficult, install a time delay in the discharge out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given
piping. in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point
When the hazard cannot be reduced to equivalent surface to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and re-
areas, the rate by volume method of design should be input the hydraulic calculations to make certain the dis-
employed, whereby the transformer is regarded to be within charge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the
an assumed volume, with the amount of CO2 required approved minimums.
being based on this volume. ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and
Electrical clearances should be maintained in accordance pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print
with NFPA 12. out will verify that the system will function properly.
For vault protection, all openings must be sealed, doors ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be
must fit tightly and ventilation must be shut down. generated to show the complete list of all required hard-
Any vault floor drains should be provided with a normally ware.
closed valve, which only opens by oil pressure during an oil ITEM NO. 7 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation
spill. sheet with the information required to determine flow rate
Thermal detection is recommended. and total quantity of agent.
Hazard ITEM NO. 8 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as

Transformer vault surface type fire. A vault with dimensions of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles.
of 10 ft. x 12 ft. x 15 ft. high.
ITEM NO. 9 – Hydraulic Input Form. With the information
One unclosable opening 2 ft. x 1 ft., with its center line 3 ft. on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the
from ceiling. input form.
All equipment to be shut down at system discharge. ITEM NO. 10 – Print Out No.1.The first print out that the
Transformer vault deep-seated fire. A vault with dimensions computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, dis-
of 10 ft. x 12 ft. x 15 ft. high. charge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print
One unclosable opening 2 ft. x 1 ft., with its center line 3 ft. out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given
from ceiling. in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point
All equipment to be shut down at system discharge. input the hydraulic calculations to make certain the dis-
Transformer in the open, indoor area. Transformer size is 4 charge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the
ft. x 4 ft. x 5 ft. high. approved minimums.
A diked area has been formed 2 ft. from all sides of the trans- ITEM NO. 11 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and
former. pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print
Fan in area to be shut down. Items 1 through 6 are for sur- out will verify that the system will function properly.
face protection.
12-72
ITEM NO. 12 – Bill Of Material. A bill of material should be

ware.
ITEM NO. 14 – Drawing.Complete a drawing or sketch as
input form.
approved minimums.
out will verify that the system will function properly. This
second print out shows that the nozzle orifices chosen
caused the system flow rate to drop to 85 lbs. per minute
which is below the required minimum of 90.
ITEM NO. 18 – Print Out No. 3.The nozzle No. 102 was
changed to a orifice code of 7.5 from the originally chosen
code of 7.0 and the calculations were rerun. This print out
shows that the system flow rate is now acceptable.
ware.
12-73
EXAMPLE NO. 5 – TRANSFORMERS

Item No. 1– Calculation Sheet
001993
12-74

001994
12-75

001995
12-76

001996
12-77

001997
12-78

001998
12-79

001999
12-80

002000
12-81

002001
12-82

002002
12-83

002003
12-84

002004
12-85

002005
12-86

002006
12-87

002007
12-88

002008
12-89

002009
12-90

002010
12-91

002011
12-92

002012
12-93

002013
12-94

002014
12-95

002015
12-96

002016
12-97

002017
12-98

002018
12-99

002019
12-100

002020
12-101

002021
12-102
EXAMPLE NO. 6 – SUBFLOOR ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as

Subfloor fires can occur as deep-seated fires in electrical accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number
insulation, in combustible debris accumulated due to poor of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles.
maintenance, or in the construction material of the subfloor ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information
itself. on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the
Protection of data processing subfloor spaces can be input form.
accomplished with a total flood system. The CO2 system is ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the
designed in accordance with NFPA 12. computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, dis-
Some CO2 loss will occur through cable openings into the charge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print
equipment and through perforated tile. Make a complete out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given
evaluation of possible leakage sources and add CO2 to in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point
compensate. If leakage is excessive, an extended dis- to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and re-
charge system must be considered. input the hydraulic calculations to make certain the dis-
Subfloor airspaces are often used as a plenum for the air approved minimums.
handling system. If the space is used as a plenum, the air
handling system MUST be shut down, tightly dampered ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and
and the air handling equipment at full rest BEFORE CO2 pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print
system discharge or the CO2 will be rapidly exhausted. out will verify that the system will function properly.
A 50% design concentration is required for dry electrical ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material. A bill of material should be
fires by NFPA 12. A 30% concentration must be achieved generated to show the complete list of all required hard-
within two minutes and design concentration must be ware.
reached within seven minutes. Design concentration must
be maintained for a minimum of twenty minutes. Factory
Mutual (FM) requires a 65% design concentration if the
subfloor is constructed of combustible material or has con-
tents other than cable. FM requires the design concentra-
tion be held for a minimum of 30 minutes.
Occasionally, drainage is installed in a subfloor area.
Provisions must be made for making the drain piping a
closed system unless water is present. This will assist in
assuring the necessary CO2 concentrations.
Smoke detectors are usually employed for early warning of
fire to allow manual release of the CO2 system with thermal
detectors used as a backup to allow automatic system
release.
When protecting a subfloor area, it is a good idea to reduce
the spacing and increase the quantity of nozzles protecting
this area. If a forceful discharge is used to expel the carbon
dioxide, some of the agent will be lost through openings into
the computers and other openings around the area. This
can lead to problems meeting the concentrations required.
The authority having jurisdiction may have additional
requirements.
Hazard
A subfloor having dimensions of 70 ft. x 50 ft. x 1 ft.
12-103
EXAMPLE NO. 6 – SUBFLOOR

002022
12-104

002023
12-105

Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form 1/1
002024
12-106

002025
12-107

002026
12-108

002027
12-109

002028
12-110

002029
12-111

002030
12-112

002031
12-113

002032
12-114

002033
12-115

002034
12-116

002035
12-117
EXAMPLE NO. 7 – BATTERY STORAGE VAULTS

Acid type batteries are normally stored and charged in
rooms or vaults which have adequate ventilation, so that
large amounts of hydrogen are unable to collect.
Any small hydrogen fires that result in the vault can be suc-
cessfully suppressed by injecting a concentration of 75%
carbon dioxide.
It should be noted that the carbon dioxide system is not an
explosion suppression system.
The carbon dioxide system must be properly grounded to
eliminate any possibility of a spark in an explosive atmos-
phere. Objects exposed to the CO2 discharge must be
grounded to dissipate possible electrostatic charges (NFPA
77).
Any openings which cannot be closed, or ventilating sys-
tems which cannot be shut down, shall be compensated for
by additional carbon dioxide (NFPA 12).
If egress is difficult, install time delay in discharge piping.
Photoelectric smoke detection is recommended. The need
for a time delay device should also be addressed.
Hazard
A battery storage vault has dimensions of 9 ft. x 15 ft. x 8 ft.
high.
Ventilation system must be shut down at discharge.
ITEM NO. 1 – Calculation Sheet. Fill out the calculation
input form.
input the hydraulic calculations to make certain discharge
time and nozzle pressures do not fall below approved mini-
mums.
ware.
12-118

002036
12-119

002037
12-120

002038
12-121

002039
12-122

002040
12-123

002041
12-124

002042
12-125

002043
12-126
EXAMPLE NO. 8 – DOCUMENT STORAGE ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be
The typical document storage room may consist of shelves generated to show the complete list of all required hard-
containing stacks of records and documents, or the docu- ware.
ments may be in file cabinets or cartons. A fire could result
in surface burning and internal burning and therefore is con-
sidered a “deep-seated” type hazard.
Fire suppression is accomplished by totally flooding the
room with a 65% concentration of CO2, using a flooding
factor of 8 cu. ft. per lb. of CO2 (NFPA 12).
Additional compensating CO2 must be
provided for all unclosable openings
(NFPA 12).
NFPA 12 states that the design concentration shall be
achieved within seven minutes, but that the discharge rate
shall not be less than that required to develop a concentra-
tion of 30% in two minutes.
The design concentration must be held for a minimum of
twenty minutes, which necessitates a fairly tight enclosure.
(Per I.R.I. the minimum is thirty minutes.) For personnel
safety, a time delay device should be included in the system
design.
Hazard
A record storage room having dimensions of 15 ft. x 30 ft. x
11 ft. high.
Ventilation to shut down at system discharge.
input form.
approved minimums.
12-127
EXAMPLE NO. 8 – DOCUMENT STORAGE

002044
12-128

002045
12-129

002046
12-130

002047
12-131

Item No. 4 – Print Out No.1/1
002048
12-132

002049
12-133

002050
12-134

002051
12-135

002052
12-136

002053
12-137

002054
12-138
EXAMPLE NO. 9 – CONTROL ROOMS ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be
As a typical control room may have most of the room volume generated to show the complete list of all required hard-
taken up with electrical equipment and wiring, it is therefore ware.
considered a “deep-seated’’ type hazard. In accordance ITEM NO. 7 – Application Drawing.This typical applica-
with NFPA 12, the room is flooded with a 50% concentration tion drawing is an example of the type of drawing which is
of carbon dioxide. generated from Ansul Applications Engineering
The volume of the room determines the NFPA 12 flooding Department. This drawing is normally used to secure
factor to be used. For spaces containing a volume up to and approval from the local authority.
including 2000 cu. ft., a flooding factor of 10 cu. ft. per lb. of
CO2 is to be used.
For volumes greater than 2000 cu. ft., a flooding factor of 12
cu. ft. per lb. of CO2 is used.
Additional compensating CO2 must be provided for all
unclosable openings.
NFPA states that the design concentration shall be
achieved within seven minutes, but that the discharge rate
shall not be less than that required to develop a concentra-
tion of 30% in two minutes.
The design concentration must be held for a minimum of
twenty minutes.
For personnel safety, a time delay device should be incorpo-
rated in the system design.
Hazard
A control room having dimensions of 20 ft. x 32 ft. x 10 ft.
high.
input form.
approved minimums.
12-139
EXAMPLE NO. 9 – CONTROL ROOMS

002055
12-140

002056
12-141

002057
12-142

002058
12-143

002059
12-144

002060
12-145

002061
12-146

002062
12-147

002063
12-148

002064
12-149
REV. 1
NOTES:
12-150
12-150.1
EXAMPLE NO. 10 – LUBE OIL PITS ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information
Open top pits containing lube oil pumps and motors, up to a on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the
depth of 4 ft. (1.2 m) and not exceeding a depth equal to one input form.
quarter of the width, should be protected as a local applica- ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the
tion type hazard, using the rate by area method of calcula- computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, dis-
tion. The quantity of carbon dioxide required is determined charge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print
by calculating the total floor area and utilizing UL listed noz- out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given
zles. It may also be necessary to locate nozzles in the center in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point
of the pit to provide complete coverage. The discharge time to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and re-
must be a minimum of 30 seconds. input the hydraulic calculations to make certain the dis-
Open pits greater than 4 ft. (1.2 m) in depth and with a depth charge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the
not exceeding one quarter its width, may be protected on approved minimums.
the basis of 4 lbs./min./sq.ft. of floor area and calculated for ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and
a minimum of a 30 second discharge. pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print
Open top pits should have nozzles located slightly above out will verify that the system will function properly.
the two-thirds level above the pit floor, provided the nozzle ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be
listings are not exceeded, and that if liquid is present, there generated to show the complete list of all required hard-
is no danger of splashing. ware.
If the pit has a partial covering of solid plate, so that the open ITEM NO. 7 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation
area is less than 3% of the cubic foot volume expressed in sheet with the information required to determine flow rate
square feet, then the quantity of CO2 required may be cal- and total quantity of agent.
culated on a total flood basis, using a factor of .25 lbs./cu.ft. ITEM NO. 8 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as
(four solid walls). Any leakage from the open area should be accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number
compensated for by adding one pound per square foot of of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles.
opening.
ITEM NO. 9 – Hydraulic Input Form. With the information
Refer to NFPA-12 Appendix B for additional guidance on on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the
protection for lube oil pits. input form.
Thermal detection is recommended. ITEM NO. 10 – Print Out No.1.The first print out that the
The following designs are based on NFPA 12. computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, dis-
Hazard charge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print
Example A – Pit is 8 ft. wide x 12 ft. long x 3.9 ft. deep. in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point
System is to be local application. to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and re-
Example B – Pit is 10 ft. wide x 15 ft. long x 8 ft. deep. System input the hydraulic calculations to make certain the dis-
is to be local application. charge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the
Example C – Pit is 12 ft. wide x 20 ft. long x 8 ft. deep and approved minimums.
partially covered. The area which is not covered is 6 ft. x 3 ft. ITEM NO. 11 – Hydraulic Input.After the nozzle orifices
The system is to be total flood. and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer
Items 1 through 6 are for local application protection for pit print out will verify that the system will function properly. In
“A’’. this case though, after this input, an error message was
shown on the computer screen stating that the pipe sizes
Items 7 through 14 are for local application protection for pit are too small for the orifice codes chosen. It is now neces-
“B”. sary to increase the pipe sizes and rerun the calculation.
Items 15 through 20 are for total flooding protection for pit ITEM NO. 12 – Print Out No. 2.After the error message
“C”. was received from the computer, the pipe sizes were
ITEM NO. 1 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation increased and the computer was left to choose the nozzle
sheet with the information required to determine flow rate codes again.
and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 13 – Print Out No. 3.After the second print out
ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as ran successfully, the nominal orifice codes were chosen and
accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number the final calculation was run to determine the system will
of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. function properly.
12-151

ware.
ITEM NO. 16 – Drawing.Complete a drawing or sketch as
input form.
approved minimums.
ITEM NO. 20 – Bill Of Material. A bill of material should be
ware.
12-152
EXAMPLE NO. 10 – LUBE OIL PITS

002066
12-153

002067
12-154

002068
12-155

002069
12-156

002070
12-157

002071
12-158

002072
12-159

002073
12-160

002074
12-161

002075
12-162

002076
12-163

002077
12-164

002078
12-165

002079
12-166

0020780
12-167

002081
12-168

002082
12-169

Item No. 11 – Hydraulic Input
002083
12-170

002084
12-171

002085
12-172

002086
12-173

002087
12-174

002088
12-175

002089
12-176

002090
12-177

002091
12-178

002092
12-179

Item No.17 – Hydraulic Input Form
002093
12-180

002094
12-181

002095
12-182

002096
12-183

002097
12-184

002098
12-185
EXAMPLE NO. 11 – GENERATORS (RECIRCULATING ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as
AND NON-RECIRCULATING TYPE) accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number
RECIRCULATING TYPE – Turbine generators are gener- of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles.
ally of the enclosed recirculating type. If an electrical fault ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form. With the information
occurs which can cause a deep seated type fire in the elec- on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the
trical insulation, the resultant fire can be completely sup- input form.
pressed with carbon dioxide. This is accomplished by total ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No.1.The first print out that the
flooding the enclosure with a carbon dioxide fixed fire sup- computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, dis-
pression system. charge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print
The CO2 system is designed in accordance with NFPA 12, out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given
which addresses the fire protection of rotating electrical in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point
equipment. to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and re-
The CO2 system normally consists of a two pipe system. input the hydraulic calculations to make certain the dis-
One group of cylinders is piped to a set of nozzles to give an charge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the
initial high rate of discharge. This discharge rate shall be approved minimums.
such as to achieve a 30% concentration of CO2 within two ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and
minutes, with the design concentration to be achieved pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print
within seven minutes. (Note: Factory Mutual requires a 30% out will verify that the system will function properly.
concentration in one minute.) ITEM NO. 6 – Hydraulic Input Form.This hydraulic input
A second group of cylinders is discharged simultaneously at form is required to calculate the extended discharge portion
a much slower rate through a separate network of pipe and of the system.
nozzles. This cylinder group provides an extended dis- ITEM NO. 7 – Print Out No.1.The first print out that the
charge of CO2 for the generator deceleration period in computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, dis-
order to maintain an inert atmosphere within the enclosure. charge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print
A minimum concentration of 30% must be maintained out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given
throughout the deceleration period but for not less than in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point
twenty minutes. (Refer to NFPA 12.) to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and re-
Multiple generators can be protected with CO2 by use of input the hydraulic calculations to make certain the dis-
selector valves in conjunction with a common bank of cylin- charge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the
ders. A reserve bank of cylinders is normally required as a approved minimums.
common back-up. ITEM NO. 8 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and
NON-RECIRCULATING TYPE – These generators are pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print
protected in the same manner as the recirculating type out will verify that the system will function properly.
except that 35% must be added to the gas requirement for ITEM NO. 9 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be
the extended discharge as determined from NFPA 12. generated to show the complete list of all required hard-
Hazard ware.
Generator housing having dimensions of 14 ft. x 8 ft. x 6 ft. 4 ITEM NO. 10 – Calculation Sheet. Fill out the calculation
in. and a pit of 13 ft. x 7 ft. 6 in. x 8 ft. sheet with the information required to determine flow rate
No unclosable openings. and total quantity of agent.
Generator is a recirculating type with a deceleration period ITEM NO. 11 – Drawing.Complete a drawing or sketch as
of twenty minutes. accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number
Items 1 through 9 are for protection of the recirculating gen-
erator. ITEM NO. 12– Hydraulic Input Form. With the information
Items 10 through 18 are for protection of the non-recircu- input form.
lating generator.
12-186
approved minimums.
ITEM NO. 15 – Hydraulic Input Form.This hydraulic input
form is required to calculate the extended discharge portion
of the system.
approved minimums.
ware.
12-187
EXAMPLE NO. 11 – GENERATORS (RECIRCULATING

AND NON-RECIRCULATING TYPE)
002099
12-188

002100
12-189

002101
12-190

002102
12-191

002103
12-192

002104
12-193

002105
12-194

002106
12-195

002107
12-196

002108
12-197

002109
12-198

002110
12-199

002111
12-200

002112
12-201

002113
12-202

002114
12-203

002115
12-204

002115
12-205

002116
12-206

002117
12-207

002118
12-208

002119
12-209

002120
12-210

002121
12-211

002122
12-212

002123
12-213
EXAMPLE NO. 12 – INDUSTRIAL FRYER The third method of protection is Local Application Rate by
Many types of foods are prepared by deep fat frying in oil Area in conjunction with Total Flood protection. In this case
contained in large industrial type fryers. the fryer is protected by the same Total Flooding system as
utilized in the first method and is also protected by a Local
The cooking oil is generally at a temperature of 350 °F to Application system designed to cover the liquid surface
400 °F (177 °C to 204 °C) and is maintained by thermostatic when the hood is in the up position. The Local Application
controls. A fire condition exists when these controls fail, nozzles are positioned just outside of the hood and even
allowing the temperature of the oil to rise above 700 °F with the bottom of the hood when it is in the up position. Both
(371 °C), which is the auto-ignition point of the oil. systems will discharge simultaneously so that the hazard is
With a carbon dioxide system, an extended discharge of protected regardless of the position of the hood. Even
CO2 for a minimum period of three minutes is required to though this system employs two separate systems it is usu-
allow for sufficient cooling of the oil and heated metal sur- ally more cost effective than the Local Application Rate by
faces. Volume system.
Several configurations of cooking fryers exist. This discus- Hazard
sion will concern itself only with the rectangular type fryer A potato chip fryer has dimensions of 12 ft. x 3 ft. x 4 ft. when
with an elevating hood and exhaust system. the hood is down during the frying operation. There are con-
The three types of design approaches to be considered are: veyor openings at both ends, each 2 ft. 6 in. x 9 in., with the
1. Total flooding with the hood in the down position. centerline 2 ft. from the top of the hood.
2. Rate by volume local application with the hood up (entire A drainboard is at the exit end having dimensions of
volume will include fryer plus 2 ft. (.6m) above and on 12 ft. x 3 ft.
each side of the fryer). There is an adjacent cooking oil pump having a dimension
3. A combination system from either hood up or hood down. of 3 ft. x 2 ft.
(Total flooding if the hood is down, local application rate A telescoping exhaust duct exits from the top of the hood,
by area if the hood is up.) measuring 18 in. diameter x 40 ft. in total length.
All three designs also include a local application system for The roof fan housing measures 5 ft. x 4 ft. x 4 ft.
the drainboard and pump. Items 1 through 5 are protection for the hood in the down
It is essential that prior to the CO2 discharge all fuel sup- position only.
plies, heaters, equipment, and exhaust fans be shut down Items 6 through 8 are protection for the drain board.
and a damper in the exhaust dust be allowed to close.
Item 9 is a bill of materials for the hood down system and the
Since the hood and a section of the duct is capable of being drain board system.
raised or lowered, the interconnecting of the CO2 hood
piping is by means of a looped section of high pressure CO2 Items 10 through 17 are protection for hood up, rate by
hose. volume, including local application.
The first method of protection would consist of Total Items 18 through 23 are protection for the hood in either the
Flooding Protection of the hood only when it is in the down up or down position.
position. This is the least reliable method as it requires the ITEM NO. 1 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation
hood to be in the down position to be effective. Many fires sheet with the information required to determine flow rate
involving these cooking appliances start when the hood is in and total quantity of agent.
the up position for maintenance or when the operator opens ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as
the hood in the event of a fire. In these cases the system is accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number
useless. We would recommend this method be employed of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles.
only if the owner and the Authority Having Jurisdiction are
willing to sign a waiver stating that the fryer will only be pro- ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information
tected when the hood is in the down position. on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the
input form.
The second method of protecting this hazard would be to
design the system based upon Local Application Rate by
Volume. This may be employed if the fryer is a relatively
small hazard. This method will put all of the nozzles on the
hood and is designed per NFPA 12 to cover an area approx-
imately 2 ft. (.6 m) outside the fryer on all sides and the top.
This will usually be the most costly method of protection.
12-214
ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the ITEM NO. 14 – Hydraulic Input.After the nozzle orifices
computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, dis- and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer
charge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print print out will verify that the system will function properly. In
out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given this case though, after this input, an error message was
in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point shown on the computer screen stating that the pipe sizes
to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and re- are too small for the orifice codes chosen. It is now nec-
input the hydraulic calculations to make certain the dis- essary to increase the pipe sizes and rerun the calculation.
charge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the ITEM NO. 15 – Print Out No. 2.After the error message
approved minimums. was received from the computer, the pipe sizes were
ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and increased and the computer was left to choose the nozzle
pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print codes again.
out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 16 – Print Out No. 3.After the second print out
ITEM NO. 6 – Hydraulic Input Form.(Drain board) With ran successfully, the nominal orifice codes were chosen and
the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and the final calculation was run to determine the system will
nozzles, fill in the input form for the drain board system. function properly.
ITEM NO. 7 – Print Out No. 1.(Drain board) The first print ITEM NO. 17 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be
out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle generated to show the complete list of all required
codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the hardware.
first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer ITEM NO. 18 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation
are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at sheet with the information required to determine flow rate
this point to choose the nearest nominal size available ori- and total quantity of agent.
fice and re-input the hydraulic calculations to make certain
the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below ITEM NO. 19 – Drawing.Complete a drawing or sketch as
the approved minimums. accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number
ITEM NO. 8 – Print Out No. 2. (Drain board) After the
nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the ITEM NO. 20 – Hydraulic Input Form. With the information
second computer print out will verify that the system will on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the
function properly. input form.
ITEM NO. 9 – Bill Of Material. A bill of material should be ITEM NO. 21 – Print Out No.1.The first print out that the
generated to show the complete list of all required computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, dis-
hardware. charge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print
ITEM NO. 10 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point
sheet with the information required to determine flow rate to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and re-
and total quantity of agent. input the hydraulic calculations to make certain the dis-
ITEM NO. 11 – Drawing.Complete a drawing or sketch as charge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the
accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number approved minimums.
of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 22 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and
ITEM NO. 12 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print
on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the out will verify that the system will function properly.
input form. ITEM NO. 23 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be
ITEM NO. 13 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the generated to show the complete list of all required
computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, dis- hardware.
approved minimums.
12-215
EXAMPLE NO. 12 – INDUSTRIAL FRYER

002124
12-216

002125
12-217

002126
12-218

002127
12-219

002128
12-220

002129
12-221

002130
12-222

002131
12-223

002132
12-224

002133
12-225

002134
12-226

002135
12-227

002136
12-228

002137
12-229

002138
12-230

002139
12-231

002140
12-232

002141
12-233

002142
12-234

002143
12-235

002144
12-236

002145
12-237

002146
12-238

002147
12-239

002148
12-240

002149
12-241

002150
12-242

002151
12-243

002152
12-244

Item No. 14 – Hydraulic Input/1
002153
12-245

Item No. 14 – Hydraulic Input/2
002154
12-246

002155
12-247

002156
12-248

002157
12-249

002158
12-250

002159
12-251

002160
12-252

002161
12-253

002162
12-254

002163
12-255

002164
12-256

Item No. 17 –Bill Of Material/1
002165
12-257

Item No. 17 –Bill Of Material/2
002166
12-258

002167
12-259

002168
12-260

002169
12-261

002170
12-262

002171
12-263

002172
12-264

002173
12-265

002174
12-266

002175
12-267

002176
12-268

002177
12-269

Item No. 23 – Bill Of Material/1
002178
12-270

Item No. 23 – Bill Of Material/2
002179
12-271
NOTES:
12-272
ANSUL ®
PROPOSAL CARBON DIOXIDE
INFORMATION FIRE
SUPPRESSION
SYSTEMS
001061
Submitted by _______________________________________ Date __________________ Due Date ____________________
In order to expedite the processing of system proposals, it is necessary to give us ALL the information asked for in this form. Fill
out the General Information first. Then fill out the section which pertains to the hazard under consideration.
GENERAL INFORMATION
PROSPECT’S NAME ______________________________________________________________________________________
ADDRESS ______________________________________________________________________________________________
PERSON CONTACTED ______________________________________________ TITLE ________________________________
QUOTATION ADDRESSED TO ________________________________________ TITLE ________________________________
DISTRIBUTOR ____________________________________________________ ADDRESS ____________________________
ORIGINAL TO BE MAILED TO: □ CUSTOMER □ DISTRIBUTOR □ SALESMAN
APPROVAL REQUIRED BY □ IRI □ FM □ Fire Dept. Other __________________
HAZARD _______________________________________________________________________________________________
TYPE OF SYSTEM: □ Manual □ Automatic
PREFERRED TYPE OF AUTOMATIC: □ Rate of Rise □ Fixed Temperature Electric □ Photoelectric
□ IONIZATION □ Other Detection – Type_____________________________________________________________
TYPE OF MANUAL: □ Local Control □ Remote Control
CONNECTED RESERVE: □ Yes □ No
SPARE CYLINDERS: □ Yes □ No ALARM REQUIRED: □ Bell □ Siren
Blueprints or sketch to scale showing size and detail of hazards must be sent with proposal. Show location of hazards with regard
to their relation to each other if two or more are to be protected. Show space available for cylinders and specify distance from haz-
ard. Show location of remote manual controls. Also answer applicable questions on “Check List for Total Flooding”, “Local
Application”, “Rotating Electrical Equipment”, and “Hose Reels”. Use space provided for sketches.
TOTAL FLOODING CHECKLIST
1. Name of space ______________________________________________________________________________________
2. Contents of space ____________________________________________________________________________________
3. Size of space: ________ ft. ________ in. Iong X ________ ft. ________ in. wide X ________ ft. ________ in. high.
4. Is ceiling □ Flat □ Sloped □ Peaked
5. If ceiling has exposed beams, show size and arrangement on sketch.
6. Electrical equipment to be shut down:
Name: ____________________________ Rating: _______________ Volts: _______________ Amps: ______________
Name: ____________________________ Rating: _______________ Volts: _______________ Amps: ______________
7. Can all electric equipment be shut down with one switch? □ Yes □ No. If “no” how many switches are required?
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
2
TOTAL FLOODING CHECKLIST (Continued)
8. Method of ventilation: □ Forced, If “forced”, locate number, size and location of all intake and exhaust ducts on sketch.
□ Natural. Are ducts equipped with dampers? □ Yes □ No. If “no”, can dampers be installed? □ Yes □ No.
NOTE: It is Ansul policy to shut down or damper ventilation equipment prior to the discharge of carbon dioxide.
9. On sketch show number, size and location of all doors, windows, other openings. Indicate whether normally open or normally
closed and indicate if they can be arranged for automatic closing.
10. Operating temperature: _________°F. Maximum _________°F. Minimum
11. If hazard is an oven, type of heating: □ Gas □ Electric □ Steam
12. Are people working in hazard? □ Yes □ No
LOCAL APPLICATION CHECKLIST
Hazard to be protected – Check appropriate box.
1. □ Dip tank: ________ft. ________ in. Iong X ________ ft. ________ in. wide, with ________ in. freeboard.
2. □ Drainboard: ________ft. ________ in. Iong X ________ ft. ________ in. wide.
3. □ Quench tank: ________ft. ________ in. Iong X ________ ft. ________ in. wide, with ________ in. freeboard.
4. □ Spray booth: ________ft. ________ in. Iong X ________ ft. ________ in. wide X ________ ft. ________ in. high.
Booth opening: ________ ft. ________ in. wide X ________ ft. ________ in. high.
5. □ Mixing tank: ________ ft. ________in. diameter ________ ft. ________ in. high. (See Question 12)
6. Coating machine:
a. Number, diameter and width of coating rolls _______________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
b. Coated material is ________ft. ________ in. Iong X ________ ft. ________ in. wide.
c. Material coated □ One Side Only, or □ Both Sides
d. Describe coating process: _____________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Flammable material: □ Lacquer □ Paint □ Varnish □ Oil □ Other
If lacquer, specify type ______________________________ If other, specify and provide MSDS _____________________
8. Name and dimensions of equipment dipped or quenched: ______________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. How is material dipped? □ Hand □ Conveyor □ Hoist □ Other Motor Driven
If other, specify: _____________________________________________________________________________________
10. If material is dipped by conveyor or is drained over tank, what is the height of top of material above tank or drainboard. (Show
on sketch.)
11. Are there baffles or structures across dip or quench tanks that will affect nozzle location? Describe: ____________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
3
LOCAL APPLICATION CHECKLIST (Continued)
12. If hazard is mixing or storage tank, answer the following questions:
a. Are tanks closed? □ Yes □ No
b. Do tanks have □ Bolted Covers, or □ Hinged Covers
c. Size of cover _______________________________________________________________________________________
d. Indicate size and location of all openings (hatches, fill lines, vent lines, etc.) on sketch.
13. If heating equipment is involved:
a. Type of heating equipment: □ Gas □ Steam □ Electric ________Volts ________Amps
b. Maximum operating temperature ________ °F.
14. Electrical equipment to be shut down:
Name: ____________________________ Rating: _______________ Volts: _______________ Amps: ________________
Name: ____________________________ Rating: _______________ Volts: _______________ Amps: ________________
15. Can all electrical equipment be shut down with one switch? □ Yes □ No
If “no”, how many switches are required?_______________________
16. Method of ventilation: □ Forced □ Natural
If forced, locate number, size and location of all intake and exhaust ducts on sketch. Are ducts equipped with dampers?
□ Yes □ No. If “no”, can dampers be installed? □ Yes □ No
17. Ceiling height of room in which hazard is located: __________ ft. __________ in.
18. For range hoods, supply the following information:
a. Fill in dimensions or make sketch.
DUCT
GIVE LOCATION AND FRYER

DESIGNATIONS LIQUID
SURFACE
001062
b. Fryer size (container only) L ____________ W ____________
L ____________ W ____________
If industrial fryer, does hood raise: □ YES □ NO
If yes, specify type of protection required □ Total Flood Only □ Total Flood and Local Application
c. Auxiliary cooking surfaces sizes L ____________ W ____________
L ____________ W ____________
L ____________ W ____________
4
LOCAL APPLICATION CHECKLIST (Continued)
d. If electric powered: Volts ____________ Amps ____________
e. If gas powered: Gas Iine size ____________
f. On overall sketch, show approximate locations of cylinders, remote actuator(s), exhaust fan(s), fire damper(s).
19. For protection of all hazards not covered by the above questions, complete drawings or dimensioned sketches must be fur-
nished.
ROTATING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST
1. Type of machine to be protected:
□ Generator □ Converter □ Motor
2. Voltage available for electric system: ______________________ □ AC □ DC
3. Is machine:
a. □ Self-contained recirculating (i.e., no pits or ducts)
b. □ Closed recirculating (i.e., sits over pit)
c. □ Non-recirculating (i.e., air passes in and out)
4. Decelerating time for machine to stop without braking is ____________________ minutes.
Static air volume of machine is ____________________ cubic feet.
HOSE REEL CHECKLIST
1. Type hazard to be protected
2. Size and quantity of cylinders required
Size ____________ lb. Quantity ____________
3. Control type: □ Local Manual □ Remote Manual □ Electric
4. Length of hose required ____________________
5
Scale: 1 square equals______________________
6
7
Litho in U.S.A.
1995 Ansul Incorporated
Form No. F-94148
ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542

ANSUL 
Carbon Dioxide System Installation
Parts List for Single Row

Cylinder Bracketing With Weigh Rail
Item Part
No. Description No. 1
1 Weigh Rail Support 71683

2 Weigh Rail –
Two Cylinders 73266 2
Three Cylinders 73267
Four Cylinders 73268 3
10
Five Cylinders 73269
Six Cylinders 73270
3 Upright (For Either Right Or Left Side) 73257 9 4
6
4 Backframe Assembly – 5
Two Cylinders 79638
Four Cylinders 79640
Five Cylinders 79641 7
Six Cylinders 79642
5 Carriage Bolt With Nut –
10 in. (25 cm) Long – For 50 lb. 73250
11
(22.7 kg) Cylinders 8
10.5 in. (27 cm) Long – For 75 lb. 73251
(34 kg) Cylinders
12 in. (31 cm) Long – For 100 lb. 73252
(45.4 kg) Cylinders
6 Cylinder Clamp – 002182
Two Cylinders 73091 Note:

Three Cylinders 73092 • Some drilling required for assembly of feet, backframes, and weigh rails.
• When bolting components together, use the following size bolts, nuts,
7 Bracket Foot – Right Side 73554 flatwashers, and lockwashers:
– Backframe to Upright – one 2 1/2 in. (6.4 cm) x 1/2 in. diameter bolt, nut,
8 Bracket Foot – Left Side 73553 flatwasher, and lockwasher (9/16 in. (1.4 cm) clearance hole required).
– Weigh Rail to Weigh Rail Support – one 1 1/2 in. (3.8 cm) x 7/16 in. dia-
meter bolt, nut, flatwasher, and lockwasher (15/32 in. (1.2 cm) clearance
9 Connector – Required For Attaching 79413 hole required).
Back Frames Together For Seven – Weigh Rail Support to Upright – two 1 1/2 in. (3.8 cm) x 7/16 in. diameter
Or More Cylinders bolts, nuts, flatwashers, and lockwashers (15/32 in. (1.2 cm) clearance
holes required).
– Bracket Foot to Upright – two 1 1/2 in. (3.8 cm) x 7/16 in. diameter bolts,
10 Center Upright – Required With 73256 nuts, flatwashers, and lockwashers (15/32 in. (1.2 cm) clearance holes
Weigh Rail Assembly Of Seven Or required).
More Cylinders In A Row – Backframe Connector to Backframe – two 1 1/2 in. (3.8 cm) x 7/16 dia-
meter bolts, nuts, flatwashers, and lockwashers.
11 Center Upright Foot 418508
ANSUL 
Parts List for Double Row

Item Part
No. Description No.
1
2 Weigh Rail –
Two Cylinders 73266
Three Cylinders 73267 2
Five Cylinders 73269 3
10
Six Cylinders 73270
4
3 Upright (For Either Right Or Left Side) 73257 9
4 Backframe Assembly – 5
6
Two Cylinders 79638
Six Cylinders 79642 7

30 in. (51 cm) Long – For 50 lb. 73253 11
(22.7 kg) Cylinders
8
20.5 in. (52 cm) Long – For 75 lb. 73254
(34 kg) Cylinders
22 in. (64 cm) Long – For 100 lb. 73255
(45.4 kg) Cylinders

holes required).
ANSUL 
Parts List for Back To Back

Item Part
No. Description No.
1
2 Weigh Rail –
Two Cylinders 73266
Three Cylinders 73267 2

3
10
Six Cylinders 73270
3 Upright (For Either Right Or Left Side) 73257 4
9
4 Backframe Assembly – 5 6
Two Cylinders 79638
7
Six Cylinders 79642
10 in. (25 cm) Long – For 50 lb. 73250
11
(22.7 kg) Cylinders
8
10.5 in. (27 cm) Long – For 75 lb. 73251
(34 kg) Cylinders
12 in. (31 cm) Long – For 100 lb. 73252
(45.4 kg) Cylinders

holes required).
ANSUL 
CARBON DIOXIDE CV90
SYSTEM CYLINDER
PARTS LIST VALVE
21
22
28
23
19
24
27
25
26
20
18
11
10
12
13 1
14 2*
3*
4
*Note: All valves manufactured after

March 1995 do not have a
5
6 removable ball and spring.
7
Note: Safety nut (Item No. 5) must
be installed within 290-300 in.
16 17
lbs. (32.8 – 33.9 Nm) of
15 torque.
9 002185
FIG. PART
NO. DESCRIPTION NO.
– CV90 Valve Shipping Assembly 79075
1 Body 417511
2 Ball 40018
3 Spring 42409
4 Pipe Plug 42411
5 Safety Nut 77366
6 Safety Disc 45010
7 Safety Washer 45011
8 Main Seal Kit Shipping Assembly 415251
9 Stem Assembly 79972
10 Spring 79389
11 Seal 79133
12 Set Screw 79401
13 Recoil Seat 79390
14 Valve 79391
15 Inlet Seat 42412
16 Pressure Release Plug 42394
17 Gasket 41447
18 Spring Stop 79131
19 Reconditioning Kit Shipping Assembly 415250
20 Spring 79082
21 O-Ring 79627
22 O-Ring 79626
23 O-Ring 79625
24 O-Ring 11873
25 O-Ring – .070 in. Cross Section 79623
26 O-Ring – .103 in. Cross Section 79624
27 Plunger 79392
28 Actuation Insert 79394
29 Spanner Wrench (not shown) 415252
30 Cap Shipping (Top and Fill Part) – Not Shown 77726
31 Safety Shipping Cap – Not Shown 73066

Ansul HP CO2 Design Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Ansul HP CO2 Design Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ansul HP CO2 Design Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CARBON DIOXIDE

DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE REV. NO.

6-19-98 1-1.1 New Page 6-19-98 7-14 1

6-19-98 1-5.1 New Page 6-19-98 7-15 1

6-19-98 1-8 1 6-19-98 7-16 1

6-19-98 1-8.1 New Page 6-19-98 7-17 1

6-19-98 1-11 1 6-19-98 7-18 1

6-19-98 1-11.1 New Page 6-19-98 7-19 1

6-19-98 1-12 1 6-19-98 7-20 1

6-19-98 1-14 1 6-19-98 7-21 1

6-19-98 1-15 1 6-19-98 7-22 1

6-19-98 1-16 2 6-19-98 7-23 1

6-19-98 1-17 1 6-19-98 7-24 1

6-19-98 1-18 1 6-19-98 7-25 1

6-19-98 1-19 2 6-19-98 7-26 1

6-19-98 1-44 1 6-19-98 7-28 1

6-19-98 1-54 1 6-19-98 7-29 2

6-19-98 1-55 1 6-19-98 8-2 1

6-19-98 2-14 New Page 6-19-98 8-3 1

6-19-98 4-1 1 6-19-98 8-4 1

6-19-98 4-2 1 6-19-98 8-5 1

6-19-98 7-4 1 6-19-98 9-2 1

6-19-98 7-5 1 6-19-98 9-4 2

6-19-98 7-8 2 6-19-98 9-5 2

6-19-98 7-9 1 6-19-98 9-6 1

6-19-98 7-10 1 6-19-98 9-7 1

6-19-98 7-11 1 6-19-98 9-8 1

6-19-98 7-12 1 6-19-98 9-9 1

6-19-98 7-13 1 6-19-98 9-10 1

Indicates revised information.

DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE REV. NO.

6-19-98 9-13 New Page

2-22-01 1-33.1 New Page

Indicates revised information.

Discharge Nozzle – Type “D” F-90216-1 1-11

Discharge Nozzle – 4 In. Multi-Discharge Type F-90221-2 1-16

Nameplate – MAIN F-90191 1-21

Warning Plate – Outside Room With Alarm F-90193 1-26

Selector Valves With Lever Actuator F-90210-1 1-32

Pneumatic Time Delay F-90207 1-41

Header Vent Plug F-90188 1-46

Pressure Switch – 3PST F-90199 1-51

Wave Solder Machines F-90165 2-11

Industrial Fryers F-90172 2-12

4. GENERAL INFORMATION 4-1 – 4-2

5. PLANNING 5-1 – 5-4

7. INSTALLATION 7-1 – 7-30

8. TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE 8-1 – 8-6

9. RESETTING AND RECHARGE 9-1 – 9-14

10. INSPECTION 10-1 – 10-2

12. TYPICAL APPLICATIONS 12-1 – 12-272

CV90 Cylinder Shipping Assembly

Component Material Thread Size/Type Approvals

CV90 Valve Brass 1-11 1/2 NPT, Male x

Valve/Tank UL (EX-2968), FM Approved, Complies

Shipping Cap Steel 3.125-11 NS1, Female

Finish: Red Enamel Paint

79814 25 (11.3) 98 (44.5) 26 1/2 (67) 8 1/2 (21.6)

Finish: Red Epoxy Paint